Symantec Backup Exec 2010

R3

Administrator's Guide
The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used
only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.

Documentation version: 2010

Legal Notice
Copyright © 2011 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Symantec and the Symantec Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec
Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks
of their respective owners.

This Symantec product may contain third party software for which Symantec is required
to provide attribution to the third party (“Third Party Programs”). Some of the Third Party
Programs are available under open source or free software licenses. The License Agreement
accompanying the Software does not alter any rights or obligations you may have under
those open source or free software licenses. Please see the Third Party Legal Notice Appendix
to this Documentation or TPIP ReadMe File accompanying this Symantec product for more
information on the Third Party Programs.

The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use,
copying, distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document
may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of
Symantec Corporation and its licensors, if any.

THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS,
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT,
ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO
BE LEGALLY INVALID. SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING,
PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED
IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer software
as defined in FAR 12.212 and subject to restricted rights as defined in FAR Section 52.227-19
"Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights" and DFARS 227.7202, "Rights in
Commercial Computer Software or Commercial Computer Software Documentation", as
applicable, and any successor regulations. Any use, modification, reproduction release,
performance, display or disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation by the U.S.
Government shall be solely in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.
Symantec Corporation
350 Ellis Street
Mountain View, CA 94043

http://www.symantec.com
Technical Support
Symantec Technical Support maintains support centers globally. Technical
Support’s primary role is to respond to specific queries about product features
and functionality. The Technical Support group also creates content for our online
Knowledge Base. The Technical Support group works collaboratively with the
other functional areas within Symantec to answer your questions in a timely
fashion. For example, the Technical Support group works with Product Engineering
and Symantec Security Response to provide alerting services and virus definition
updates.
Symantec’s support offerings include the following:
■ A range of support options that give you the flexibility to select the right
amount of service for any size organization
■ Telephone and/or Web-based support that provides rapid response and
up-to-the-minute information
■ Upgrade assurance that delivers software upgrades
■ Global support purchased on a regional business hours or 24 hours a day, 7
days a week basis
■ Premium service offerings that include Account Management Services
For information about Symantec’s support offerings, you can visit our Web site
at the following URL:
www.symantec.com/business/support/
All support services will be delivered in accordance with your support agreement
and the then-current enterprise technical support policy.

Contacting Technical Support

Customers with a current support agreement may access Technical Support
information at the following URL:
www.symantec.com/business/support/
Before contacting Technical Support, make sure you have satisfied the system
requirements that are listed in your product documentation. Also, you should be
at the computer on which the problem occurred, in case it is necessary to replicate
the problem.
When you contact Technical Support, please have the following information
available:
■ Product release level
 ■ Hardware information
■ Available memory, disk space, and NIC information
■ Operating system
■ Version and patch level
■ Network topology
■ Router, gateway, and IP address information
■ Problem description:
■ Error messages and log files
■ Troubleshooting that was performed before contacting Symantec
■ Recent software configuration changes and network changes

Licensing and registration

If your Symantec product requires registration or a license key, access our technical
support Web page at the following URL:
www.symantec.com/business/support/

Customer service
Customer service information is available at the following URL:
www.symantec.com/business/support/
Customer Service is available to assist with non-technical questions, such as the
following types of issues:
■ Questions regarding product licensing or serialization
■ Product registration updates, such as address or name changes
■ General product information (features, language availability, local dealers)
■ Latest information about product updates and upgrades
■ Information about upgrade assurance and support contracts
■ Information about the Symantec Buying Programs
■ Advice about Symantec's technical support options
■ Nontechnical presales questions
■ Issues that are related to CD-ROMs or manuals
Support agreement resources
If you want to contact Symantec regarding an existing support agreement, please
contact the support agreement administration team for your region as follows:

Asia-Pacific and Japan [email protected]

Europe, Middle-East, and Africa [email protected]

North America and Latin America [email protected]

 Contents

Technical Support ............................................................................................... 4

Chapter 1 Introducing Backup Exec ................................................... 65
About Backup Exec ....................................................................... 65
How Backup Exec works ................................................................ 70
What’s new in Backup Exec ............................................................ 72
What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options .................................. 77
Backup Exec agents and options ...................................................... 82
About Backup Exec media server components ............................. 82
About Backup Exec server protection agents ............................... 83
About Backup Exec application protection agents ........................ 84
About Backup Exec's virtual machine agents ............................... 87
About Backup Exec client protection agents ................................ 88
About Backup Exec media server storage options ......................... 89
About the Administration Console ................................................... 93
About the Backup Exec version ................................................. 97
About the Home view .................................................................... 97
Configuring the Home view ...................................................... 97
Restoring the Home view's default configuration ......................... 98
Editing items on the Home view ................................................ 98
Help and Technical Support items ............................................. 98
Summary items .................................................................... 100
Detail items ......................................................................... 101

Chapter 2 Installing Backup Exec ...................................................... 103

About installing Backup Exec ........................................................ 104
Before you install ....................................................................... 105
About the Environment Check ................................................ 106
Checking your environment before installing ............................ 107
About the Backup Exec service account .................................... 108
Changing service account information ..................................... 109
About changing Windows security ........................................... 110
Changing Windows security to back up servers (only) in one
domain ......................................................................... 111
8 Contents

Changing Windows security to back up servers and selected

workstations in one domain ............................................. 111
Changing Windows security to back up servers in more than one
domain ......................................................................... 112
Changing Windows security to back up servers and workstations
in more than one domain ................................................. 113
About Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition components
installed with Backup Exec ............................................... 113
About Backup Exec’s standard features .................................... 114
System requirements .................................................................. 116
About the differences between a typical installation and a custom
installation ......................................................................... 118
Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec ................................ 118
Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec ................................ 121
Installing additional Backup Exec options to the local media
server ................................................................................. 125
Special considerations for installing Backup Exec to remote
computers ........................................................................... 127
Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers ............................ 128
About installing Backup Exec options to remote computers ................ 133
Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option
to remote computers ............................................................. 136
Push-installing the Desktop Agent and DLO Maintenance Service
from the media server to remote computers .............................. 139
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems .................. 141
Installing the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option
to a remote computer in the backup selections list ................ 142
How to install the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option
in an Active Directory network ......................................... 142
Using a command prompt to install the Remote Agent on a
remote computer ............................................................ 147
Using a command prompt to uninstall the Remote Agent from
a remote computer ......................................................... 149
Using a command script to install the Remote Agent and AOFO
................................................................................... 150
Using a command script to uninstall the Remote Agent and
AOFO ........................................................................... 151
Installing the Remote Administrator ............................................. 152
Running the Remote Administrator ........................................ 153
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode) ............. 155
Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup
Exec ............................................................................. 156
 Contents 9

Installing the Remote Administrator using the command

line .............................................................................. 164
Uninstalling Backup Exec using the command line ..................... 166
Creating installation parameter files ........................................ 166
Using installation parameter files ............................................ 167
Installing a trial version of Backup Exec agents and options ............... 168
About the installation log ............................................................. 168
Repairing Backup Exec ................................................................ 169
Starting and stopping Backup Exec services .................................... 170
Backup Exec Services Manager options ..................................... 170
Uninstalling Backup Exec ............................................................ 170
Uninstalling Backup Exec options from the local media server ............ 171
About updating Backup Exec with LiveUpdate ................................. 172
About scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate ............... 173
Scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate ........................ 174
Running LiveUpdate manually ................................................ 175
Viewing installed updates ...................................................... 175
Viewing license information ......................................................... 176
License information options ................................................... 177
Adding licenses .......................................................................... 178
Finding installed licenses in your environment ................................ 179
About Backup Exec maintenance contract information ...................... 180
Running the Backup Exec Renewal Assistant ............................. 181
Viewing Backup Exec maintenance contract information ............. 181
About upgrading from previous versions of Backup Exec ................... 182
Post-installation tasks ................................................................. 184

Chapter 3 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options ........... 187

About configuring Backup Exec ..................................................... 188
About configuring logon accounts ................................................. 188
About the default Backup Exec logon account ............................ 189
About Backup Exec restricted logon accounts ............................ 190
Creating a Backup Exec logon account ...................................... 191
About the Backup Exec System Logon Account .......................... 193
Editing a Backup Exec logon account ........................................ 194
Changing a Backup Exec logon account password ....................... 195
Replacing a Backup Exec logon account .................................... 196
Deleting a Backup Exec logon account ...................................... 196
Changing your default Backup Exec logon account ..................... 197
Creating a new Backup Exec System Logon Account .................... 197
About Backup Exec defaults .......................................................... 198
About job priority ....................................................................... 199
10 Contents

Changing the default device and media set for jobs ........................... 200
Default Device and Media options ............................................ 200
Changing application settings for Backup Exec preferences ................ 201
Application settings for Backup Exec preferences ....................... 201
Copying configuration settings to another media server .................... 204
Adding multiple destination media servers by importing a
list ............................................................................... 205
Adding a destination media server in a non-CASO
environment ................................................................. 205
Adding a destination media server in a CASO environment .......... 206
Copy Settings options ............................................................ 207
Copying logon account information ............................................... 208
Copy Logon Account options .................................................. 209
About audit logs ......................................................................... 209
Configuring the audit log ....................................................... 210
Viewing the audit log ............................................................ 211
Removing entries from the audit log ........................................ 212
Saving the audit log to a file ................................................... 213
About database maintenance ........................................................ 213
Configuring database maintenance .......................................... 214
Viewing the location of Backup Exec databases ................................ 216
Advanced properties for a media server .................................... 217
About the Symantec RSS Reader ................................................... 218
Viewing an article in the Symantec RSS Reader .......................... 218
Customizing the Symantec RSS Reader .................................... 219
Removing a default RSS feed from the Symantec RSS
reader .......................................................................... 219
Hiding columns .......................................................................... 220
Showing a hidden column ............................................................ 220
Rearranging columns .................................................................. 221
Sorting column information ......................................................... 221
Sort options ........................................................................ 221
Column Settings options ........................................................ 222
Viewing properties ..................................................................... 223

Chapter 4 Managing media ................................................................ 225

About media in Backup Exec ......................................................... 225
About media overwrite protection ................................................. 229
About the default media set .................................................... 232
About creating media sets ...................................................... 232
Deleting a media set .............................................................. 234
Renaming a media set ........................................................... 234
 Contents 11

Associating media with a media set .......................................... 235

Editing general properties for media sets .................................. 236
Media overwrite protection levels ............................................ 238
About overwriting allocated or imported media .......................... 238
How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media ..................... 239
Selecting settings for media management ....................................... 243
Settings for media management ............................................. 243
Viewing audit log entries for media operations ................................ 247
Configuring specific media operations to appear in the audit log ......... 247
Media labeling ........................................................................... 248
Renaming a media label ......................................................... 249
Imported media labeling ........................................................ 250
Bar code labeling .................................................................. 250
Bar code rules in mixed media libraries ..................................... 251
Creating bar code rules in mixed media libraries ........................ 251
Editing a bar code rule ........................................................... 251
Deleting a bar code rule ......................................................... 252
Application settings for bar code rules ..................................... 252
Add Bar Code Rule options ..................................................... 253
About WORM media ................................................................... 253
Creating a new catalog ................................................................ 254
Device options for catalog jobs ................................................ 255
Creating a restore job while reviewing media or devices ..................... 256
Media locations and vaults ........................................................... 256
Creating media vaults ........................................................... 257
Media Vault Properties .......................................................... 257
Configuring vault rules for media sets ...................................... 258
Properties for vault rules for media sets ................................... 258
Deleting a media vault ........................................................... 259
Renaming a media vault ........................................................ 259
Finding media in a location or vault ......................................... 260
About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location ........... 260
Scanning bar code labels to move media ................................... 261
Scheduling a job to move media .............................................. 261
Using the Vault Wizard to move media ..................................... 262
Using the Move to vault task to move media .............................. 263
Move Media options .............................................................. 263
Move Media to Vault options .................................................. 264
Drag and drop methods to move media ..................................... 264
Using drag and drop methods to move media ............................. 265
About removing damaged media ................................................... 265
About deleting media ............................................................ 266
Deleting media ..................................................................... 266
12 Contents

General properties for media ........................................................ 267

Statistics properties for media ...................................................... 269
Media rotation strategies ............................................................. 271
Son media rotation strategy ................................................... 271
Father/son media rotation strategy .......................................... 272
Grandfather media rotation strategy ........................................ 273

Chapter 5 Preparing for backup ........................................................ 275

How to prepare for backup ........................................................... 276
About backup strategies .............................................................. 276
How to choose a backup strategy ................................................... 276
How to determine your backup schedule ................................... 277
How to determine the amount of data to back up ........................ 277
How to determine a schedule for data storage ............................ 278
How to determine which devices to back up ............................... 278
How to determine the number of resources to back up in a
job ............................................................................... 278
About the archive bit and backup methods ................................ 279
About backup methods .......................................................... 280
About using the Windows NTFS Change Journal to determine
changed files ................................................................. 286
About selecting data to back up .................................................... 286
About using fully qualified computer names in backup
selections ............................................................................ 288
About the Computer Name node in the backup selections list .............. 288
About the Favorite Resources node in the backup selections list .......... 290
Adding a Windows system to the Favorite Resources node in the
backup selections list ...................................................... 291
Deleting a Windows system from the Favorite Resources node
in the backup selections list .............................................. 292
About the Domains node in the backup selections list ........................ 293
Adding an Active Directory domain to the Active Directory Domains
node .................................................................................. 294
Deleting an Active Directory domain from the Active Directory
Domains node ...................................................................... 295
Manage Active Directory Domains options ................................ 295
About the User-defined Selections node in the backup selections
list ..................................................................................... 296
Adding a user-defined selection to the User-defined Selections
node .................................................................................. 296
Deleting a user-defined selection from the User-defined Selections
node .................................................................................. 298
 Contents 13

User-defined Selections options .............................................. 298

About managing Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk (VHD) files in Backup
Exec ................................................................................... 299
How to back up user-defined Microsoft Windows Distributed File
System data ......................................................................... 300
About selection lists .................................................................... 301
Creating selection lists .......................................................... 302
Merging selection lists ........................................................... 306
Replacing selection lists ........................................................ 307
Copying selection lists ........................................................... 308
Holding jobs that back up a selection list ................................... 309
Deleting selection lists .......................................................... 309
Editing selection lists ............................................................ 310
Editing the Excludes selection list ............................................ 311
About priority and availability windows for selection lists ............ 312
Setting default priority and availability windows for all selection
lists ............................................................................. 313
Setting priority and availability windows for selection lists .......... 313
Creating separate selection lists for each computer or
resource ....................................................................... 315
Creating a custom filter for backup selection lists ....................... 316
Filtering backup selection lists ................................................ 319
Searching selection lists ........................................................ 320
Viewing the history for backup selection lists ............................ 320
Viewing a summary for a selection list ..................................... 321
About resource discovery ............................................................. 322
Using resource discovery to search for new resources ................. 322
About the Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system ............ 326
How to restore individual items by using Granular Recovery
Technology ......................................................................... 327
Recommended devices for backups that use Granular Recovery
Technology ................................................................... 330
About requirements for jobs that use Granular Recovery
Technology ................................................................... 331

Chapter 6 Backing up data ................................................................. 335

How to back up data .................................................................... 335
Required user rights for backup jobs ........................................ 337
Creating a backup job by using the Backup Wizard ............................ 337
Preventing the Backup Wizard from launching from the Backup
button .......................................................................... 338
14 Contents

Configuring the Backup Wizard to launch from the Backup

button .......................................................................... 338
Creating a backup job by setting job properties ................................ 338
Selections options for backup jobs ........................................... 342
Resource Credentials options .................................................. 343
Resource Order Backup options ............................................... 344
Device and media options for backup jobs and templates ............. 345
General options for backup jobs and templates .......................... 348
Advanced options for backup jobs ............................................ 354
Pre/post commands for backup or restore jobs ........................... 358
Job Summary properties ........................................................ 361
How to include or exclude files for backup ................................. 361
About scheduling jobs ................................................................. 362
Scheduling jobs .................................................................... 362
About the scheduling calendar ................................................ 365
Scheduling a job to run on specific days .................................... 365
Scheduling a job to run on recurring week days .......................... 366
Scheduling a job to run on recurring days of the month ............... 367
Scheduling a job to run on a day interval ................................... 368
Setting the effective date for a job schedule ............................... 369
About time windows ............................................................. 370
Setting the time window for a scheduled job .............................. 370
Restarting a job during a time interval ..................................... 371
Excluding dates from a schedule ............................................. 372
Configuring default schedule options ....................................... 372
About the full backup method for backing up and deleting files ........... 373
Backing up and deleting files .................................................. 374
About duplicating backed up data .................................................. 375
Duplicating backed up data .................................................... 375
How to copy data directly from a virtual tape library to a physical
tape device .................................................................... 387
Verifying a backup ...................................................................... 389
Selections properties for verify jobs ......................................... 389
Device properties for verify jobs .............................................. 390
General properties for verify jobs ............................................ 390
About test run jobs ..................................................................... 391
Creating a test run job ........................................................... 392
Setting test run default options ............................................... 393

Chapter 7 Customizing backup options ........................................... 397

Setting default backup options ...................................................... 397
Default Backup options .......................................................... 398
 Contents 15

About pre/post commands ........................................................... 405

Setting default pre/post commands ......................................... 406
About specifying backup networks ................................................ 408
About using IPv4 and IPv6 in Backup Exec ................................ 410
Setting default backup network and security options .................. 410
About using Backup Exec with Symantec Endpoint Protection ............ 414
About using Backup Exec with firewalls .......................................... 415
Backup Exec Ports ................................................................ 417
Backup Exec Listening Ports ................................................... 418
Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option ports ........................... 419
Browsing systems through a firewall ........................................ 420
About enabling a SQL instance behind a firewall ........................ 420
About encryption ....................................................................... 421
About software encryption ..................................................... 421
About hardware encryption .................................................... 422
Encryption keys ......................................................................... 422
About restricted keys and common keys in encryption ................ 423
About pass phrases in encryption ............................................ 423
About encryption key management ......................................... 424
Creating an encryption key .................................................... 426
Replacing an encryption key ................................................... 427
About deleting an encryption key ............................................ 428
Deleting an encryption key ..................................................... 428
About restoring encrypted data ............................................... 429
About cataloging media that contains encrypted backup
sets .............................................................................. 429
About configuring DBA-initiated job settings ................................... 430
Creating a template for DBA-initiated jobs ................................ 430
Editing DBA-initiated jobs ............................................................ 441
DBA-initiated job settings options ........................................... 442
Deleting a job template for DBA-initiated jobs .................................. 442
About preferred server configurations ........................................... 443
Creating preferred server configurations .................................. 443
Deleting preferred server configurations .................................. 445
Editing settings for preferred server configurations .................... 445
Designating a default preferred server configuration .................. 446
Removing the default status for a preferred server
configuration ................................................................. 446

Chapter 8 About devices ..................................................................... 449

About storage devices ................................................................. 449
About the Configure Devices Assistant ........................................... 451
16 Contents

Configuring storage devices by using the Configure Devices

Assistant ...................................................................... 452
About sharing storage ................................................................. 452
Managing shared storage ....................................................... 453
Pausing a media server ................................................................ 454
Resuming a media server ............................................................. 454
Pausing storage devices ............................................................... 455
Resuming storage devices ............................................................ 455
Renaming storage devices ............................................................ 455
About inventorying media ............................................................ 456
Inventorying media in a device ..................................................... 457
Erasing media ............................................................................ 458

Chapter 9 Managing tape drives and robotic libraries ................. 461

About tape drives and robotic libraries ........................................... 461
About the Virtual Tape Library Unlimited Drive Option .............. 462
About the Library Expansion Option ....................................... 463
About configuring tape devices by using the Tape Device
Configuration Wizard ............................................................ 463
About adding or replacing devices by using the Hot-swappable Device
Wizard ............................................................................... 463
Adding or replacing devices by using the Hot-swappable Device
Wizard ......................................................................... 464
About installing Symantec tape device drivers ................................ 465
Installing Symantec tape device drivers by running
tapeinst.exe ................................................................... 465
Installing Symantec tape device drivers by using the Tape Device
Configuration Wizard ...................................................... 466
Changing the preferred block size, buffer size, buffer count, and high
water count for devices .......................................................... 466
Enabling hardware compression for devices .................................... 467
Specifying read and write operations on types of media ..................... 467
Viewing storage device properties ................................................. 468
General properties for devices ................................................ 468
Configuration properties for devices ........................................ 470
SCSI information for devices .................................................. 473
Statistics properties for devices .............................................. 473
Cleaning properties for devices ............................................... 475
Media type properties for devices ........................................... 476
About robotic libraries in Backup Exec ........................................... 477
Requirements for setting up robotic library hardware ................. 478
Troubleshooting the display of robotic library devices ................. 479
 Contents 17

Initializing robotic libraries when the Backup Exec service

starts ........................................................................... 480
Enabling bar code rules for robotic libraries .............................. 480
Defining a cleaning slot ........................................................ 481
Configuration properties for robotic libraries ............................ 481
Statistics properties for robotic libraries ................................... 482
Properties for robotic library slots ........................................... 482
About robotic library partitions .............................................. 485
About creating utility jobs to help manage devices and media ............. 490
Utility jobs for virtual tape libraries and simulated tape
libraries ........................................................................ 492
General options for utility jobs ............................................... 492
Inventorying robotic libraries when Backup Exec services
start ............................................................................. 493
Creating a job to initialize a robotic library ................................ 494
Retensioning a tape .............................................................. 494
Formatting media in a drive ................................................... 495
Labeling media ..................................................................... 496
Ejecting media from a drive .................................................... 497
Creating a cleaning job .......................................................... 498
About importing media to a robotic library ................................ 499
Exporting media from a robotic library ..................................... 500
About exporting expired media from a robotic library ................. 501
Locking the robotic library’s front panel ................................... 503
Unlocking the robotic library’s front panel ................................ 504

Chapter 10 Managing backup-to-disk folders .................................. 505

About backup-to-disk folders ....................................................... 506
Requirements for creating a backup-to-disk folder ..................... 507
Requirements for creating a removable backup-to-disk
folder ........................................................................... 508
Creating a backup-to-disk folder by using the Backup-to-Disk
Wizard ......................................................................... 508
Creating a backup-to-disk folder by setting properties ................. 509
About sharing backup-to-disk folders ............................................. 515
Sharing an existing backup-to-disk folder ................................. 516
Changing the path of a backup-to-disk folder ................................... 516
Deleting a backup-to-disk folder .................................................... 517
Recreating a backup-to-disk folder and its contents .......................... 517
Changing the status of a device to online ........................................ 518
Renaming a backup-to-disk file ..................................................... 518
Deleting a backup-to-disk file ....................................................... 519
18 Contents

Recreating a deleted backup-to-disk file .......................................... 519

Erasing backup-to-disk files ......................................................... 520
Recommendations for using backup-to-disk folders with backup jobs
that use Granular Recovery Technology ................................... 521
How to reclaim disk space for backup jobs that use Granular Recovery
Technology ......................................................................... 523

Chapter 11 Managing device pools ..................................................... 525

About device pools ...................................................................... 525
Creating device pools .................................................................. 526
Device pool options ..................................................................... 527
Adding devices to a device pool ..................................................... 527
Setting priorities for devices in a device pool ............................. 528
Removing devices from a device pool ....................................... 529
Deleting device pools ............................................................ 529
Retarget Job options ............................................................. 530
Device Pool Properties ........................................................... 530

Chapter 12 Policies and templates ..................................................... 531

About policies and templates ........................................................ 531
Creating a new policy ............................................................ 532
Creating a new policy using the Policy Wizard ........................... 533
Editing a policy .................................................................... 536
Deleting a policy .................................................................. 536
Using an example policy ........................................................ 537
Re-creating example policies .................................................. 539
About using templates in policies ............................................ 539
Adding a backup template to a policy ....................................... 540
About the verify backup sets templates .................................... 543
Adding a verify backup sets template to a policy ........................ 544
About export media templates ................................................ 546
Adding an export media template to a policy ............................. 547
Importing a template into a policy ........................................... 548
Editing a template in a policy .................................................. 549
Deleting a template from a policy ............................................ 550
About template rules ................................................................... 550
Setting template rules ................................................................. 552
Changing template rules ........................................................ 553
Deleting template rules ......................................................... 553
About creating jobs using policies and selection lists ......................... 554
Creating new jobs for a policy ................................................. 554
Creating new jobs for a selection list ........................................ 555
 Contents 19

Viewing the policies that are designated to back up selection

lists ............................................................................. 556
Viewing the selection lists that are designated for backup by
policies ......................................................................... 556
Editing the next occurrence of a policy-based job ....................... 556
Deleting a job created from a policy ......................................... 557
Renaming a job created from a policy ....................................... 558
About duplicate backup set templates ............................................ 558
Adding a duplicate backup template to a policy .......................... 561

Chapter 13 Administrating Backup Exec ........................................... 565

About administrating Backup Exec ................................................ 565
Copying jobs, selection lists, or policies .......................................... 566
Copy to Media Server options ................................................. 567
Viewing the job log for a copy to media server job ....................... 568
Editing job properties .................................................................. 568
Job Monitor options .................................................................... 569
Viewing properties for active jobs ............................................ 569
Searching for text in the job history or job properties .................. 573
Canceling an active job .......................................................... 574
Placing all scheduled occurrences of an active job on hold ............ 575
Removing the hold on a scheduled job ...................................... 575
Active job statuses ................................................................ 575
Scheduled job statuses ........................................................... 577
Running a scheduled job immediately ...................................... 580
Placing a scheduled job on hold ............................................... 580
Removing the hold on a scheduled job ...................................... 581
Placing the job queue on hold ................................................. 581
Removing the hold on the job queue ......................................... 582
Changing the priority for a scheduled job .................................. 582
Running a test job for a scheduled job ...................................... 582
Deleting scheduled jobs ......................................................... 583
Viewing the properties for completed jobs ................................. 584
Viewing the history of a job, policy, or selection list .................... 587
Deleting completed jobs ......................................................... 588
Linking from the job log to the Symantec Technical Support Web
site .............................................................................. 589
Completed job statuses .......................................................... 589
Configuring default job log options .......................................... 592
About using job logs with vertical applications ........................... 593
Filtering jobs ............................................................................. 594
About managing custom filters ..................................................... 594
20 Contents

Creating a custom filter for jobs .............................................. 595

Creating a custom filter for current jobs ................................... 595
Creating a custom filter for jobs in the job history ...................... 597
Deleting custom filters .......................................................... 599
Editing custom filters ............................................................ 600
Viewing the job workload for a media server from the Calendar
tab ..................................................................................... 600
Viewing jobs for specific days on the calendar .................................. 601
Managing jobs from the Calendar tab ............................................. 601
Viewing the Symantec Endpoint Protection Security Summary ........... 602
About error-handling rules .......................................................... 602
Creating a custom error-handling rule ...................................... 603
Custom error-handling rule for recovered jobs ........................... 607
Cluster failover error-handling rule ......................................... 608
How thresholds are used to stall, fail, and recover jobs ...................... 608
Setting thresholds to recover jobs .................................................. 609
Application settings for job status and recovery options ............. 610
Job Setup options ....................................................................... 610

Chapter 14 Restoring data .................................................................... 613

About restoring data ................................................................... 613
Restore jobs and the catalog ......................................................... 614
Changing application settings for the catalogs ........................... 615
Catalog levels ...................................................................... 617
Restoring data by using the Restore Wizard .................................... 618
Preventing the Restore Wizard from launching from the Restore
button ................................................................................ 618
Configuring the Restore Wizard to launch from the Restore
button ................................................................................ 619
Restoring data by setting job properties .......................................... 619
Selections options for restore jobs ........................................... 623
Device options for restore jobs ................................................ 625
General options for restore jobs .............................................. 626
Advanced options for restore jobs ............................................ 627
Network and security restore options ...................................... 631
Running pre and post commands for restore jobs ....................... 632
About restoring file permissions ............................................. 633
About System State ............................................................... 634
Restoring System State .......................................................... 635
About restoring Shadow Copy Components ............................... 636
About restoring utility partitions ............................................ 637
About performing redirected restores of utility partitions ............ 637
 Contents 21

About restoring media created with other backup software .......... 638
About restoring data from ARCserve media ............................... 638
Restoring data from ARCserve media ....................................... 639
About selecting data to restore ...................................................... 640
Creating a restore selection list ............................................... 642
Changing and testing resource credentials for restore jobs ........... 644
Searching for files to restore .................................................. 645
About redirecting restore jobs ....................................................... 648
File Redirection restore options .............................................. 648
About redirecting restore jobs to native Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk
(VHD) files .......................................................................... 650
Using redirected restore for Active Directory, Active Directory
Application Mode for Windows Server 2003/2008 ...................... 650
Setting defaults for restore jobs .................................................... 652
Default restore options ......................................................... 652
Canceling a restore job ................................................................ 655

Chapter 15 Alerts and notifications .................................................... 657

About alerts and notifications ....................................................... 658
About alert views ....................................................................... 659
Active Alerts view and Alert History view ................................. 660
Viewing alerts ............................................................................ 662
Filtering alerts ..................................................................... 662
Creating custom filters for alerts ............................................. 663
Editing custom filters for alerts ............................................... 665
Deleting custom filters for alerts ............................................. 665
Viewing alert properties ........................................................ 666
Viewing the job log from an alert ............................................. 668
Responding to active alerts .......................................................... 669
About automatic responses for alert categories .......................... 669
Configuring automatic responses for alert categories .................. 670
Clearing informational alerts from the Active Alerts pane ............ 672
Alert response options .......................................................... 672
Configuring alert category properties ............................................. 673
Configure Alert Categories options .......................................... 674
Enabling or disabling alerts from the Active Alerts pane .................... 676
Deleting alerts from the Alert History ............................................ 676
Setting up notification for alerts ................................................... 676
Configuring SMTP for email or mobile phone text message
notification ................................................................... 677
Configuring MAPI email for notification ................................... 679
Configuring VIM email for notification ..................................... 680
22 Contents

Configuring a pager for alert notification .................................. 681

Configure Recipients options ........................................................ 681
Configuring SMTP email or mobile phone text messaging for a
person recipient ............................................................. 682
Configuring MAPI mail for a person recipient ............................ 683
Configuring VIM mail for a person recipient .............................. 685
Configuring a pager for a person recipient ................................ 686
Configuring a Net Send recipient ............................................. 689
Configuring a printer recipient ............................................... 690
Configuring a group recipient ................................................. 692
Scheduling notification for recipients ...................................... 692
Editing recipient notification properties ................................... 693
Editing recipient notification methods ..................................... 694
Removing recipients ............................................................. 694
Assigning recipients to alert categories for notification ..................... 695
Assign Recipients to Alert Categories options ............................ 695
Stopping alert notification for a recipient ....................................... 696
Sending a notification when a job completes .................................... 697
Sending a notification when a selection list is used in a job ................. 697
Notification options for jobs ................................................... 697
About SNMP notification ............................................................. 698
Installing and configuring the SNMP system service ......................... 701
Installing the Windows Management Instrumentation performance
counter provider .................................................................. 702
Installing the Windows Management Instrumentation provider for
SNMP ................................................................................. 702
Uninstalling the Windows Management Instrumentation performance
counter provider .................................................................. 703
Uninstalling the Windows Management Instrumentation provider
for SNMP ............................................................................ 703

Chapter 16 Reports in Backup Exec .................................................... 705

About reports in Backup Exec ....................................................... 706
Viewing the list of available reports ............................................... 707
Running a report ........................................................................ 707
Additional settings for standard reports ......................................... 708
Available groups for creating reports ............................................. 709
Running a new report job ............................................................. 710
General options for a new report job ........................................ 711
Saving a report .......................................................................... 712
Saving a report to a new location ................................................... 712
Printing a report from the Backup Exec Report Viewer ...................... 713
 Contents 23

Printing a report that is saved in PDF format ................................... 713

Printing a report that is saved in HTML format ................................ 713
Deleting a report from Job History ................................................. 714
About scheduling report jobs and setting notification recipients ......... 714
About custom reports in Backup Exec ............................................. 715
Creating a custom report ............................................................. 715
Custom report name and description options ............................. 716
Field options for custom reports .............................................. 717
About grouping fields in custom reports ................................... 718
Sorting fields in custom reports .............................................. 720
Setting graph options in custom reports ................................... 722
Example graphs for custom reports ......................................... 724
Previewing custom reports ..................................................... 728
Setting filters for custom reports .................................................. 728
Filter expressions for defining custom reports ........................... 731
Copying custom reports ............................................................... 734
Editing custom reports ................................................................ 734
Deleting custom reports .............................................................. 735
Editing application settings for reports .......................................... 735
Application settings for reports .............................................. 736
Viewing report properties ............................................................ 737
General properties for reports ................................................ 737
Available reports ........................................................................ 738
Active Alerts Report .............................................................. 745
Active Alerts by Media Server Report ....................................... 746
Alert History Report ............................................................. 746
Alert History by Media Server Report ....................................... 747
Application Event Log Report ................................................. 748
Audit Log Report .................................................................. 748
Backup Job Success Rate Report .............................................. 749
Backup Recommendations Report ........................................... 749
Backup Resource Success Rate Report ...................................... 750
Backup Set Details by Resource Report ..................................... 750
Backup Sets by Media Set Report ............................................. 751
Backup Size By Resource Report .............................................. 752
Configuration Settings Report ................................................ 753
Current Job Status Report ...................................................... 754
Daily Device Utilization Report ............................................... 754
Deduplication device summary ............................................... 755
Deduplication summary ......................................................... 756
Device Summary Report ........................................................ 756
Device Usage by Policy .......................................................... 757
Error-Handling Rules Report .................................................. 758
24 Contents

Event Recipients Report ........................................................ 759

Failed Backup Jobs Report ...................................................... 760
Job Distribution by Device Report ............................................ 761
Jobs Summary Report ............................................................ 761
Machines Backed Up Report ................................................... 762
Managed Media Servers Report ............................................... 763
Media Audit Report ............................................................... 764
Media Errors Report ............................................................. 765
Media Required for Recovery Report ........................................ 765
Media Set Report .................................................................. 766
Media Vault Contents Report .................................................. 767
Missed Availability Report ..................................................... 768
Move Media to Vault Report ................................................... 768
Operations Overview Report ................................................... 769
Overnight Summary Report ................................................... 771
Policy Jobs by Resource Summary Report ................................. 772
Policy Jobs Summary Report ................................................... 773
Policy Properties Report ........................................................ 774
Policy Protected Resources ..................................................... 775
Problem Files Report ............................................................. 775
Recently Written Media Report ............................................... 776
Resource Backup Policy Performance Report ............................. 777
Resource Risk Assessment Report ........................................... 777
Resources Protected by Policy report ....................................... 778
Restore Set Details by Resource Report .................................... 778
Retrieve Media from Vault Report ........................................... 779
Robotic Library Inventory Report ............................................ 780
Scheduled Server Workload .................................................... 781
Scratch Media Availability Report ........................................... 782
Selection Lists Report ............................................................ 782
Test Run Results Report ........................................................ 783
Archive Job Success Rate report .............................................. 784
Archive Selections by Archive Rules and Retention Categories
report ........................................................................... 784
Exchange Mailbox Group Archive Settings report ....................... 785
Failed Archive Jobs report ...................................................... 786
File System Archive Settings report ......................................... 786
Overnight Archive Summary report ......................................... 787
Vault Store Usage Details report ............................................. 788
Vault Store Usage Summary Report ......................................... 789
 Contents 25

Chapter 17 Disaster preparation and recovery ................................ 791

About disaster preparation ........................................................... 791
About key elements of a disaster preparation plan (DPP) ................... 792
Returning to the last known good configuration ............................... 793
Creating a hardware profile copy ................................................... 794
About creating an emergency repair disk (Windows 2000 computers
only) .................................................................................. 795
About manual disaster recovery of Windows computers .................... 796
About a manual disaster recovery of a local Windows computer
(includes non-authoritative and authoritative restore of Active
Directory for a domain controller) ........................................... 796
Running a manual disaster recovery of a local Windows computer
(includes non-authoritative and authoritative restore of
Active Directory for a domain controller) ............................ 797
About a disaster recovery operation of a remote Windows computer
(includes non-authoritative and authoritative restore of Active
Directory for a domain controller) ........................................... 801
Running a disaster recovery operation on a remote Windows
computer (includes non-authoritative and authoritative
restore of Active Directory for a domain controller) .............. 802

Chapter 18 Troubleshooting ................................................................. 805

Troubleshooting hardware-related issues ....................................... 805
How to get more information about alerts and error messages ............ 810
Troubleshooting backup issues ..................................................... 811
About cluster sizes for NTFS partitions .......................................... 812
Troubleshooting restore issues ..................................................... 813
How to improve Backup Exec's performance .................................... 813
About the Symantec Knowledge Base ............................................ 817
Searching the Symantec Knowledge Base .................................. 818
How to contact Technical Support ................................................ 818
About Backup Exec diagnostic tools ............................................... 818
About the Symantec Backup Exec Support Tool .......................... 819
About the Backup Exec diagnostic application ........................... 820
How to use the Symantec Gather Utility for
troubleshooting ............................................................. 824
Running the begather utility to troubleshoot Backup Exec
components on Linux servers ........................................... 825
Using the Backup Exec Debug Monitor for troubleshooting .......... 826
About the Backup Exec debug tool ........................................... 826
26 Contents

Chapter 19 Using Symantec Backup Exec with Server

Clusters .......................................................................... 829
About Backup Exec and clusters .................................................... 830
Requirements for clustering Backup Exec in a Microsoft Cluster Server
environment ....................................................................... 831
How Backup Exec works in a Microsoft Cluster Server
environment ....................................................................... 832
Requirements for installing Backup Exec on a Microsoft Cluster
Server ................................................................................ 832
Installing Backup Exec on a Microsoft Cluster Server ....................... 834
Upgrading Backup Exec on a Microsoft cluster ........................... 835
Installing additional Backup Exec options on a Microsoft cluster
................................................................................... 836
Uninstalling Backup Exec from a Microsoft cluster ..................... 836
Creating device pools for Microsoft Cluster Servers .......................... 837
Using checkpoint restart on Microsoft Cluster Server failover ............ 838
Enabling or disabling checkpoint restart ........................................ 840
Specifying a different failover node ............................................... 840
Designating a new SAN SSO primary server and central
administration server in a Microsoft Cluster Server .................... 841
Configurations for Backup Exec and Microsoft Cluster Servers ........... 843
Two-node cluster with locally attached storage devices ............... 844
Two-node cluster with tape devices on a shared SCSI bus ............. 844
Configuring a shared SCSI bus for tape devices .......................... 845
Multi-node clusters on a fibre channel SAN with the SAN
SSO .............................................................................. 848
Using the Central Admin Server Option with Microsoft clusters and
SAN SSO ............................................................................. 851
About backing up Microsoft Cluster Servers .................................... 852
Backing up local disks in a Microsoft cluster .............................. 853
Backing up shared disks in a Microsoft cluster ........................... 854
Backing up database files in a Microsoft cluster ......................... 854
Backing up Windows 2008 R2 cluster shared volumes ................. 855
About restoring data to a Microsoft cluster ..................................... 856
Restoring the cluster quorum for Windows Server 2003/2008
computers to a Microsoft cluster ....................................... 856
Specifying a new drive letter for the cluster quorum disk ............. 857
Using Backup Exec with Veritas Cluster Server ................................ 858
Requirements for installing Backup Exec with the CASO option on a
Veritas Cluster Server ........................................................... 859
Installing Backup Exec with the CASO option on a Veritas Cluster
Server ................................................................................ 860
 Contents 27

Requirements for clustering Backup Exec using Veritas Cluster

Server ................................................................................ 860
Clustering Backup Exec using Veritas Cluster Server ......................... 861
About backing up Veritas Cluster Servers ....................................... 862
About backing up Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003/2008
features in a Veritas cluster .............................................. 863
Backing up local disks in a Veritas cluster ................................. 864
Backing up shared disks in a Veritas cluster .............................. 864
Backing up database files in a Veritas cluster ............................. 865
About restoring data to Veritas Cluster Servers ................................ 865
About backup job failover with Veritas Cluster Servers ...................... 866
Disaster recovery of a cluster ........................................................ 866
Using IDR to prepare for disaster recovery of a cluster ................ 867
Recovering nodes on the cluster using IDR ................................ 867
Recovering Backup Exec on a Microsoft cluster using IDR ............ 868
Recovering the entire cluster using a manual disaster recovery
procedure ..................................................................... 869
Restoring the Microsoft Cluster Server data files ........................ 870
Recovering all shared disks in a Microsoft cluster ....................... 871
Recovering all shared disks in a Veritas cluster .......................... 872
Recovering Backup Exec in a Microsoft cluster ........................... 872
Troubleshooting clusters ............................................................. 873
Changing the Quorum disk signature ....................................... 875
Manually joining two cluster disk groups and resynchronizing
volumes ........................................................................ 876

Chapter 20 Using Backup Exec Retrieve ............................................ 877

About Backup Exec Retrieve ......................................................... 877
How Backup Exec Retrieve works .................................................. 878
What end users can do with Backup Exec Retrieve ............................ 880
Before you install Backup Exec Retrieve .......................................... 882
Requirements for installing Backup Exec Retrieve on a Web
server ................................................................................. 882
Requirements for using Backup Exec Retrieve on end users'
computers ........................................................................... 884
About deploying the Silverlight run time in your
organization .................................................................. 885
Upgrading from Backup Exec Retrieve that runs under Backup Exec
System Recovery Manager 8.5 ................................................ 885
Installing Backup Exec Retrieve .................................................... 885
About configuring Backup Exec Retrieve ......................................... 887
Adding a data source ............................................................. 887
28 Contents

Editing a data source ............................................................. 889

Deleting a data source ........................................................... 890
Editing application settings for Backup Exec Retrieve ....................... 890
Application settings for Backup Exec Retrieve ........................... 890
Uninstalling Backup Exec Retrieve ................................................ 892
Troubleshooting Backup Exec Retrieve ........................................... 892

Appendix A Symantec Backup Exec Active Directory Recovery

Agent .............................................................................. 895
About the Active Directory Recovery Agent ..................................... 896
Requirements for the Active Directory Recovery Agent ..................... 896
About installing the Active Directory Recovery Agent ...................... 897
How the Active Directory Recovery Agent works .............................. 898
How Granular Recovery Technology works with Active Directory and
ADAM/AD LDS backups ......................................................... 899
Editing defaults for Active Directory and ADAM/AD LDS backup and
restore jobs ......................................................................... 899
Microsoft Active Directory default options ................................ 900
Backing up Active Directory ......................................................... 901
Backing up ADAM/AD LDS ........................................................... 902
Active Directory Recovery Agent backup job options ......................... 903
About restoring individual Active Directory and ADAM/AD LDS
objects ................................................................................ 904
Restoring individual objects from an Active Directory
backup ......................................................................... 906
Restoring individual objects from an ADAM/AD LDS
backup ......................................................................... 907
About recreating purged Active Directory and ADAM/AD LDS
objects ................................................................................ 908
Recreating purged Active Directory objects ............................... 909
Recreating purged ADAM/AD LDS objects ................................. 910
Microsoft Active Directory Restore option ................................ 911
Resetting the Active Directory computer object and the computer
object account ...................................................................... 911

Appendix B Symantec Backup Exec Advanced Disk-based

Backup Option .............................................................. 913
About the Advanced Disk-based Backup Option ................................ 914
About installing the Advanced Disk-based Backup Option .................. 914
About the synthetic backup feature ............................................... 915
What you can back up with synthetic backup ................................... 917
Requirements for synthetic backup ................................................ 917
 Contents 29

Best practices for synthetic backup .......................................... 918

About collecting additional information for synthetic backup
and true image restore .................................................... 920
Methods for creating a synthetic backup ......................................... 920
Creating a synthetic backup by using the Policy Wizard ............... 921
About creating a synthetic backup by copying the example
policy ........................................................................... 922
Creating a synthetic backup by adding templates to a policy ......... 923
Creating template rules to run job templates for synthetic
backup ......................................................................... 926
General options for synthetic backup templates ......................... 927
Advanced options for synthetic backup templates ...................... 927
About true image restore ............................................................. 928
Requirements for true image restore ........................................ 931
Best practices for true image restore ........................................ 931
Enabling backups for true image restore ......................................... 932
About true image catalogs ............................................................ 932
About restoring a backup set enabled for true image restore ............... 933
Selecting backup sets that are enabled for true image restore ............. 934
Troubleshooting tips for true image restore .................................... 934
About offhost backup .................................................................. 935
Requirements for offhost backup ............................................ 937
Requirements for offhost backup when using the Veritas Storage
Foundation for Windows Provider ..................................... 938
Best practices for offhost backup ............................................. 939
Browsing remote computers for installed snapshot
providers ...................................................................... 941
Setting offhost backup options for a backup job ......................... 941
Backup options for the Advanced Disk-based Backup
Option .......................................................................... 942
Setting default options for offhost backup jobs .......................... 944
Configuring a GRT-enabled offhost backup for Exchange
resources ............................................................................ 944
About restoring offhost backup data .............................................. 945
Troubleshooting the offhost backup ............................................... 945
Offhost backup failures when using VSFW as a provider .............. 949
Offhost backup issues when using a hardware provider ............... 951

Appendix C Symantec Backup Exec Advanced Open File

Option ............................................................................ 953

About the Advanced Open File Option ............................................ 953

About supported snapshot technologies ................................... 956
30 Contents

Requirements for using Advanced Open File Option .................... 957

How to install the Advanced Open File Option ................................. 958
Installing the Advanced Open File Option to remote Windows
computers using the command line .................................... 958
Setting default options for the Advanced Open File Option ................. 959
About Snap Start on a Veritas Storage Foundation volume ........... 960
Using Snap Start on a Veritas Storage Foundation volume ........... 961
Best practices for using the Symantec Volume Snapshot
Provider ....................................................................... 961
About the Symantec Volume Snapshot Provider cache file
location ....................................................................... 962
How to adjust the Symantec Volume Snapshot Provider cache
file size ......................................................................... 963
Configuring the Advanced Open File Option for backup jobs ............... 964
Advanced Open File options ................................................... 965
Advanced Open File Option wizard ................................................ 967
Advanced Open File Configuration options ................................ 967
About the job log and the Advanced Open File Option ........................ 970

Appendix D Symantec Backup Exec Agent for DB2 on Windows

Servers ........................................................................... 973
About the Backup Exec DB2 Agent ................................................. 973
Requirements for the DB2 Agent ................................................... 974
Configuring the DB2 Agent on Windows computers .......................... 975
Adding information about DB2 servers to the media server's
authentication credentials list .......................................... 975
Configuring database access for DB2 operations on Windows
computers ..................................................................... 979
Adding a DB2 instance to the DB2 Agent on Windows computers
that run the Remote Agent Utility ..................................... 983
Editing a DB2 instance by using the Remote Agent Utility ............ 983
Deleting a DB2 instance by using the Remote Agent Utility .......... 983
Backing up DB2 resources ............................................................ 984
DB2 backup options .............................................................. 986
Restoring DB2 data ..................................................................... 987
DB2 restore options .............................................................. 988
Redirecting a restore of DB2 data ............................................ 990
About using DB2 to run DBA-initiated jobs ...................................... 992
About using the DB2 database archive logging methods ............... 994
About the db2.conf file .......................................................... 995
Editing a db2.conf file ........................................................... 995
Example db2.conf file ............................................................ 996
 Contents 31

Troubleshooting DB2 .................................................................. 998

Appendix E Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Enterprise

Vault ............................................................................. 1001

About the Enterprise Vault Agent ................................................ 1002

Requirements for the Enterprise Vault Agent ................................. 1007
About installing the Enterprise Vault Agent .................................. 1008
About backup methods for Enterprise Vault backup jobs .................. 1008
Enterprise Vault backup options ............................................ 1012
Setting a default backup method for Enterprise Vault backup
jobs ........................................................................... 1013
About consistency checks for Enterprise Vault databases and
Compliance and Discovery Accelerator databases ..................... 1013
Backing up an Enterprise Vault open partition ............................... 1014
Backing up Enterprise Vault closed partitions ................................ 1015
Backing up Enterprise Vault 8.x ready partitions ............................ 1017
Backing up the Enterprise Vault Directory database ........................ 1018
Backing up the Enterprise Vault Monitoring database ..................... 1019
Backing up an Enterprise Vault vault store database ....................... 1020
Backing up the Enterprise Vault 8.x Audit database ........................ 1021
Backing up the Enterprise Vault 8.x FSA Reporting database ............ 1022
Backing up the Enterprise Vault 8.x Fingerprint database ................ 1023
Backing up the Enterprise Vault 8.x Compliance Accelerator
Configuration database and Compliance Accelerator customer
databases .......................................................................... 1024
Backing up the Enterprise Vault 8.x Discovery Accelerator
Configuration database and Discovery Accelerator customer
databases .......................................................................... 1025
Backing up the Discovery Accelerator Custodian database ................ 1026
Backing up an Enterprise Vault vault store .................................... 1027
About backing up an Enterprise Vault 7.x server and an Enterprise
8.x site .............................................................................. 1029
Backing up an Enterprise Vault 7.x server ............................... 1029
Backing up an Enterprise Vault site ........................................ 1030
Backing up Enterprise Vault index locations ............................ 1031
About restoring Enterprise Vault ................................................. 1032
About automatic redirection of Enterprise Vault components
under an Enterprise Vault server ..................................... 1034
Restoring the Enterprise Vault Directory database .................... 1035
Restoring the Enterprise Vault Monitoring database ................. 1036
Restoring Enterprise Vault partitions ..................................... 1037
Restoring an Enterprise Vault vault store database ................... 1039
32 Contents

Restoring an Enterprise Vault 8.x Audit database ..................... 1041

Restoring the Enterprise Vault 8.x FSA Reporting database ........ 1042
Restoring the Enterprise Vault 8.x Fingerprint database ............ 1043
Restoring the Compliance Accelerator Configuration
database ..................................................................... 1044
Restoring the Compliance Accelerator Customer database .......... 1045
Restoring the Discovery Accelerator Configuration
database ..................................................................... 1046
Restoring the Discovery Accelerator Custodian database ............ 1047
Restoring the Discovery Accelerator Customer database ............ 1048
About restoring individual files and folders with the Enterprise
Vault Agent ................................................................. 1049
Restoring individual files from partitions by using the Enterprise
Vault Agent ................................................................. 1050
Restoring individual folders from an Enterprise Vault index
backup ........................................................................ 1052
Restoring an Enterprise Vault 7.x server to its original
location ...................................................................... 1053
Enterprise Vault restore options ............................................ 1054
Redirecting an Enterprise Vault restore job ............................. 1056
Redirecting the restore of Enterprise Vault databases to a
different Microsoft SQL Server computer .......................... 1059
Best practices for the Enterprise Vault Agent ................................. 1061
About the Backup Exec Migrator for Enterprise Vault ...................... 1061
Backup Exec Migrator for Enterprise Vault requirements ........... 1061
How the Backup Exec Migrator works ..................................... 1062
Configuring the Backup Exec Migrator .................................... 1069
About the Restore view of migrated Enterprise Vault data .......... 1077
About retrieving migrated Enterprise Vault data ...................... 1078
About the Partition Recovery Utility ...................................... 1079
Best practices for using the Backup Exec Migrator .................... 1081
Troubleshooting Backup Exec Migrator and Partition Recovery
Utility issues ................................................................ 1082

Appendix F Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Lotus Domino

Server ........................................................................... 1083

About the Agent for Lotus Domino Server ..................................... 1084

Lotus Domino Agent requirements ............................................... 1084
About installing the Lotus Domino Agent on the media server .......... 1086
About the Lotus Domino Agent and the Domino Attachment and
Object Service (DAOS) .......................................................... 1086
Best practices for restoring the missing .nlo files ...................... 1087
 Contents 33

Viewing Lotus Domino databases that are created while Backup Exec
is running ......................................................................... 1088
Viewing Lotus Domino databases that are on the local server ............ 1088
Viewing Lotus Domino databases that are on remote computers ........ 1089
Configuring default Lotus Domino options .................................... 1089
Lotus Domino default options ............................................... 1090
About backing up Lotus Domino databases .................................... 1091
About automatic exclusion of Lotus Domino files during
volume-level backups .................................................... 1093
About supported Lotus Domino database configurations ............ 1093
About Lotus Domino transaction logs ..................................... 1094
About selecting Lotus Domino databases for backup ........................ 1095
Selecting Lotus Domino databases for backup .......................... 1096
Selecting backup options for Lotus Domino databases ..................... 1096
Lotus Domino backup job options .......................................... 1096
Restoring Lotus Domino databases ............................................... 1098
About selecting Lotus Domino databases for restore ........................ 1099
Selecting restore options for Lotus Domino databases ..................... 1102
Lotus Domino restore options ............................................... 1102
Redirecting restore jobs for Lotus Domino databases ....................... 1103
Redirecting the restore of DAOS NLO files ..................................... 1104
How to prepare for disaster recovery on a Lotus Domino server ......... 1106
Recovering a Lotus Domino server from a disaster .................... 1107
About disaster recovery of a Lotus Domino server using archive
logging ....................................................................... 1110
Recovering a Lotus Domino server that uses circular
logging ....................................................................... 1110
Recovering the Lotus Domino server, databases, and transaction
logs when archive logging is enabled ................................ 1111

Appendix G Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft

Exchange Server ......................................................... 1113
About the Backup Exec Exchange Agent ........................................ 1114
Requirements for using the Exchange Agent ................................. 1115
About installing the Exchange Agent ............................................ 1119
Recommended configurations for Exchange .................................. 1120
Requirements for accessing Exchange mailboxes ........................... 1121
Backup strategies for Exchange ................................................... 1122
Automatic exclusion of Exchange data during volume-level
backups ...................................................................... 1125
About the circular logging setting for Exchange ....................... 1126
34 Contents

How Granular Recovery Technology works with the Exchange

Information Store .............................................................. 1126
About Backup Exec and Microsoft Exchange Web Services ......... 1127
Snapshot and offhost backups with the Exchange Agent .................. 1128
Troubleshooting Exchange Agent snapshot and offhost
jobs ............................................................................ 1129
Configuring a snapshot backup for Exchange resources ............. 1130
Configuring an offhost backup with the Exchange Agent ............ 1131
About continuous protection for Exchange data ............................. 1132
Requirements for installing components for CPS Exchange
backup jobs .................................................................. 1133
Requirements for configuring continuous protection for
Exchange data .............................................................. 1135
Best practices for continuous protection of Exchange ...................... 1137
About managing the CPS Exchange backup job for Exchange
data ............................................................................ 1138
About reviewing disk space availability for CPS Exchange backup
jobs ............................................................................ 1139
Stopping CPS Exchange backup jobs temporarily ...................... 1140
Viewing the CPS console from Backup Exec ............................. 1141
About using recovery points to restore individual Exchange items
to a point in time .......................................................... 1142
Troubleshooting CPS Exchange backup jobs ............................ 1143
Setting default backup and restore options for Exchange data ........... 1143
Default backup and restore options for Exchange ..................... 1143
About backing up Exchange 2003/2007 ......................................... 1149
About backing up Exchange Server 2010 Databases ......................... 1150
Adding an Exchange Server 2010 forest to backup
selections .................................................................... 1150
Managing an Exchange Server 2010 forest .............................. 1151
Backing up Exchange ................................................................. 1152
Microsoft Exchange backup options ....................................... 1154
About selecting individual Exchange mailboxes for backup ......... 1160
Backing up individual Exchange mailboxes .............................. 1163
About restoring Exchange data .................................................... 1164
Requirements for restoring Exchange 2000 or later ................... 1165
Configuring a database in Exchange ....................................... 1166
Dismounting Exchange databases that are being restored .......... 1166
About restoring data using the Exchange 2003/2007 recovery
storage group or Exchange Server 2010 recovery
database ..................................................................... 1167
Restoring a database to an Exchange 2007 recovery storage
group ......................................................................... 1168
 Contents 35

About restoring Exchange data from snapshot backups ............. 1169

About restoring Exchange data from continuous protection
backups ...................................................................... 1170
About restoring Exchange mailboxes and public folders from
mailbox backups ........................................................... 1172
Restoring individual Exchange public folder messages from tape
by duplicating backup sets to disk .................................... 1173
Restoring Exchange data ...................................................... 1174
About redirecting Exchange restore data ....................................... 1179
About redirecting Exchange storage group and database
restores ...................................................................... 1180
About redirecting restores of mailboxes or public folders that
were backed up separately from the Exchange Information
Store .......................................................................... 1180
Redirecting Exchange restore data ......................................... 1182
How to prepare for disaster recovery of Exchange Server ................. 1185
Recovering from a disaster for Exchange 2000 or later .................... 1186

Appendix H Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft

Hyper-V ........................................................................ 1189
About the Agent for Microsoft Hyper-V ........................................ 1189
About installing the Agent for Microsoft Hyper-V ........................... 1190
Requirements for using the Agent for Microsoft Hyper-V ................. 1191
About upgrading from the Agent for Microsoft Virtual Servers ......... 1193
About backup selections for Microsoft Hyper-V .............................. 1193
How Backup Exec automatically protects new virtual machines
during a backup job ....................................................... 1194
Backing up data by using the Agent for Microsoft Hyper-V ............... 1195
Microsoft Hyper-V backup options ......................................... 1195
Virtual Machine Application Granular Recovery Technology
Settings ...................................................................... 1196
How Granular Recovery Technology works with the Agent for
Microsoft Hyper-V .............................................................. 1197
How Backup Exec protects Microsoft Exchange, SQL, and Active
Directory data on virtual machines .................................. 1198
Requirements for protecting Microsoft Exchange, SQL, and Active
Directory data on virtual machines .................................. 1199
About restore selections for Microsoft Hyper-V .............................. 1200
Restoring data to the Hyper-V host .............................................. 1202
Microsoft Hyper-V restore options ......................................... 1203
Restoring a virtual machine to a different host ............................... 1204
Microsoft Hyper-V Redirection options ................................... 1204
36 Contents

Setting default backup and restore options for the Agent for Microsoft
Hyper-V ............................................................................ 1206
Microsoft Hyper-V default options ......................................... 1206
About backing up and restoring highly available virtual
machines .......................................................................... 1208

Appendix I Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft

SharePoint .................................................................. 1209
About the SharePoint Agent ....................................................... 1210
Requirements for the SharePoint Agent ........................................ 1210
About installing the SharePoint Agent .......................................... 1211
Adding a SharePoint server farm to the backup selections list ........... 1211
Add Server Farm options ...................................................... 1213
Manage SharePoint Server Farms options ............................... 1213
Server Farm Properties ....................................................... 1214
How Backup Exec automatically protects new SharePoint resources
during a backup job ............................................................. 1214
Changing the name of a SharePoint server farm ............................. 1215
Deleting a farm from the Microsoft SharePoint Server Farms
node ................................................................................. 1215
Disabling or enabling communication between a SharePoint Web
server and Backup Exec ....................................................... 1216
Setting default options for SharePoint Server 2003 and later ............ 1216
Microsoft SharePoint default options ..................................... 1217
About using the SharePoint Agent with SharePoint Server 2010 and
Windows SharePoint Foundation 2010 ................................... 1220
Backing up a farm for Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2010
or Windows SharePoint Foundation 2010 .......................... 1222
Backing up individual SharePoint 2010 Web applications in a
Microsoft SharePoint server farm .................................... 1223
About restoring resources for SharePoint Server 2010 and
SharePoint Foundation 2010 ........................................... 1223
Restoring resources for SharePoint Server 2010 and SharePoint
Foundation 2010 ........................................................... 1224
Restoring individual SharePoint 2010 objects from full database
backups to their original locations ................................... 1225
Restoring a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2010 Web
application to its original location .................................... 1227
Redirecting a restore job for SharePoint 2010 .......................... 1228
Redirecting the restore of individual SharePoint 2010 objects to
a file path .................................................................... 1230
 Contents 37

Redirecting the restore of a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server

2010 Web application .................................................... 1231
Redirecting the restore of a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server
2010 database to an alternate SQL instance ....................... 1233
Recovering SharePoint 2010 data after a disaster ..................... 1234
About using the SharePoint Agent with SharePoint Server 2007 and
Windows SharePoint Services 3.0 .......................................... 1238
About adding a SharePoint 2007 server farm to the backup
selections list ............................................................... 1239
Backing up a farm for Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2007
or a Windows SharePoint Services 3.0 .............................. 1239
Backing up individual SharePoint 2007 Web applications in a
Microsoft SharePoint server farm .................................... 1240
About restoring resources for SharePoint Server 2007 and
SharePoint Services 3.0 .................................................. 1241
Restoring resources for SharePoint Server 2007 and SharePoint
Services 3.0 ................................................................. 1242
Restoring individual SharePoint 2007 objects from full database
backups to their original locations ................................... 1243
Restoring a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2007 Shared
Services Provider .......................................................... 1244
Restoring a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2007 Web
application to its original location .................................... 1245
Redirecting a restore job for SharePoint 2007 .......................... 1247
Redirecting the restore of individual SharePoint 2007 objects to
a file path .................................................................... 1248
Redirecting the restore of a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server
2007 Web application .................................................... 1249
Redirecting the restore of a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server
2007 database to an alternate SQL instance ....................... 1250
Recovering SharePoint 2007 data after a disaster ..................... 1251
About using the SharePoint Agent with SharePoint Portal Server
2003 and Windows SharePoint Services 2.0 ............................. 1255
About selecting SharePoint Server 2003 resources for
backup ........................................................................ 1256
Backing up resources from SharePoint 2003 ............................ 1256
About selecting SharePoint 2003 resources for restore .............. 1257
Restoring SharePoint 2003 resources ..................................... 1258
Restoring individual SharePoint 2003 objects (Microsoft SQL
Server-based) from full database backups .......................... 1258
Restoring SharePoint 2003 document libraries (Web storage
system-based) .............................................................. 1260
38 Contents

Restoring previous versions of SharePoint 2003 documents from

document library (Web storage system-based) backups ........ 1261
Redirecting a restore job for SharePoint 2003 .......................... 1261
Redirecting the restore of SharePoint 2003 document library
(Web storage system-based) data to another document
library ........................................................................ 1262
Redirecting the restore of individual SharePoint 2003 objects to
a file path .................................................................... 1263
Redirecting the restore of a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server
2003 database to an alternate SQL instance ....................... 1264
Microsoft SharePoint backup options .......................................... 1266
Microsoft SharePoint restore options ........................................... 1267
Microsoft SharePoint redirection options ...................................... 1270

Appendix J Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft SQL

Server ........................................................................... 1273

About the Agent for Microsoft SQL Server ..................................... 1274

Requirements for using the SQL Agent ......................................... 1275
About installing the SQL Agent ................................................... 1276
How to use Backup Exec logon accounts for SQL resources ............... 1276
About backup strategies for SQL .................................................. 1278
SQL backup strategy recommendations .................................. 1279
About consistency checks for SQL ................................................ 1281
How to use snapshot technology with the SQL Agent ....................... 1282
How to use AOFO with the SQL Agent ..................................... 1283
How to use ADBO with the SQL Agent ..................................... 1284
Setting default backup and restore options for SQL ......................... 1285
Microsoft SQL default options ............................................... 1285
Setting backup options for SQL ................................................... 1293
SQL backup options ............................................................. 1293
About automatic exclusion of SQL data during volume level
backup ........................................................................ 1300
About backing up SQL databases ........................................... 1301
About backing up SQL filegroups ........................................... 1302
Displaying SQL filegroups on the backup selections pane ........... 1304
Backing up SQL filegroups .................................................... 1304
How to back up SQL transaction logs ...................................... 1305
About SQL 2005 or later database snapshots ............................ 1306
Creating SQL database snapshots .......................................... 1308
Setting restore options for SQL ................................................... 1309
SQL restore options ............................................................. 1309
About restoring SQL databases and file groups ............................... 1313
 Contents 39

About restoring encrypted SQL databases ............................... 1315

Restoring from SQL database backups .................................... 1315
How to restore from SQL transaction logs up to a point in
time ........................................................................... 1316
How to restore from SQL transaction logs up to a named
transaction .................................................................. 1317
About restoring from SQL filegroup backups ........................... 1318
Restoring an entire SQL database, a missing primary filegroup,
or a filegroup containing a deleted or changed table ............ 1319
Restoring a missing or corrupted SQL nonprimary
filegroup ..................................................................... 1320
About restoring the SQL master database ................................ 1321
Restarting SQL using database copies ..................................... 1322
Restoring the master database .............................................. 1324
About redirecting restores for SQL ......................................... 1325
Redirecting restores for SQL ................................................. 1325
About reverting SQL 2005 or later databases using database
snapshots ................................................................... 1329
About disaster recovery of a SQL Server ........................................ 1330
How to prepare for disaster recovery of SQL ............................ 1331
Requirements for SQL disaster recovery ................................. 1331
Disaster recovery of SQL ...................................................... 1332

Appendix K Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Oracle on

Windows or Linux Servers ........................................ 1335
About the Backup Exec Oracle Agent ............................................ 1335
About installing the Oracle Agent ................................................ 1336
Upgrading the Backup Exec Oracle Agent ...................................... 1337
Configuring the Oracle Agent on Windows computers and Linux
servers .............................................................................. 1338
Configuring an Oracle instance on Windows computers ............. 1339
Viewing an Oracle instance on Windows computers .................. 1341
Editing an Oracle instance on Windows computers ................... 1342
Deleting an Oracle instance on Windows computers .................. 1343
Enabling database access for Oracle operations on Windows
computers ................................................................... 1343
Configuring an Oracle instance on Linux servers ...................... 1344
Viewing an Oracle instance on Linux servers ........................... 1346
Editing an Oracle instance on Linux servers ............................. 1346
Deleting an Oracle instance on Linux servers ........................... 1347
Enabling database access for Oracle operations on Linux
servers ........................................................................ 1347
40 Contents

About authentication credentials on the media server ..................... 1349

Setting authentication credentials on the media server for Oracle
operations ................................................................... 1350
Editing authentication credentials on the media server for Oracle
operations ................................................................... 1352
Deleting an Oracle server from the media server’s list of
authentication credentials .............................................. 1353
About Oracle instance information changes .................................. 1353
Setting application defaults for Oracle .......................................... 1354
Oracle default options ......................................................... 1354
About backing up Oracle resources .............................................. 1355
About backing up Oracle RAC resources .................................. 1357
Backing up Oracle resources ................................................. 1357
About performing a DBA-initiated backup job for Oracle ............ 1360
About restoring and recovering Oracle resources ............................ 1361
About DBA-initiated restore and recovery for Oracle ................. 1363
Restoring Oracle data .......................................................... 1363
About redirecting a restore of Oracle data ............................... 1367
Restoring from a legacy GRFS Oracle Agent database
backup ........................................................................ 1368
Requirements for recovering the complete Oracle instance and
database using the original Oracle server .......................... 1369
Recovering the complete Oracle instance and database using the
original Oracle server .................................................... 1370
Requirements for recovering the complete Oracle instance or
database to a computer other than the original Oracle
server ......................................................................... 1371
Recovering the complete Oracle instance or database to a
computer other than the original Oracle server .................. 1372
Troubleshooting the Oracle Agent ............................................... 1373
Changing the SqlplusTimeout for Oracle instances on Windows
computers ................................................................... 1376
Changing the SqlplusTimeout for Oracle instances on Linux
computers ................................................................... 1377
Changing the time-out for an automatic RMAN channel for Oracle
instances on Windows computers .................................... 1377
Changing the time-out for an automatic RMAN channel for Oracle
instances on Linux computers ......................................... 1378
Updating the online redo log file path ..................................... 1378
 Contents 41

Appendix L Symantec Backup Exec Agent for SAP

Applications ................................................................ 1381

About the SAP Agent ................................................................. 1382

How the SAP Agent works .................................................... 1382
About using the SAP Agent with RMAN .................................. 1383
Requirements for using the SAP Agent ......................................... 1384
About installing the SAP Agent ................................................... 1385
About SAP Agent security and privileges ...................................... 1385
About encrypting SAP data ................................................... 1386
About generating SAP Agent alerts ........................................ 1386
About preserving the integrity of the SAP Agent catalog ............ 1386
Before backing up SAP data ........................................................ 1387
Configuring biparam.ini for the SAP Agent .............................. 1388
Configuring DBA-initiated job settings for SAP ........................ 1389
About system level SAP backup jobs ............................................. 1391
About backing up and restoring with the SAP Agent ........................ 1391
Requirements for submitting jobs from remote computers by
using the SAP Agent ...................................................... 1392
Restoring data with BRRESTORE and the SAP Agent ................. 1392
About redirecting SAP restore jobs ......................................... 1393
Backing up SAP data with RMAN ................................................. 1393
Restoring SAP data with RMAN ................................................... 1395
Migrating the SAP Agent catalog from _backint.mdb to
_backint.xml ...................................................................... 1396
About backing up a clustered SAP database on Microsoft Cluster
Server ............................................................................... 1397
About backing up MaxDB databases by using the SAP Agent ............. 1398
Preparing MaxDB databases for backup .................................. 1399
Backing up MaxDB databases ................................................ 1399
Restoring MaxDB databases by using the SAP Agent ....................... 1400
About performing disaster recovery using the SAP Agent ................. 1400
SAP disaster recovery prerequisites ....................................... 1401
Recovering a remote SAP database server from a disaster .......... 1401
Recovering a combination SAP database server and media
server ......................................................................... 1402

Appendix M Symantec Backup Exec Agent for VMware Virtual

Infrastructure ............................................................. 1405

About the Agent for VMware ...................................................... 1406

Requirements for using the Agent for VMware ............................... 1406
About installing the Agent for VMware ......................................... 1407
42 Contents

Adding VMware vCenter and ESX servers ...................................... 1407

Deleting VMware vCenter and ESX servers .................................... 1408
About backing up VMware resources ............................................ 1408
How Backup Exec automatically protects new virtual machines
during a backup job ...................................................... 1410
Creating a full backup of VMware resources .................................. 1410
VMware backup options ....................................................... 1411
Virtual Machine Application Granular Recovery Technology
Settings ...................................................................... 1414
Creating an incremental or a differential backup of VMware
resources .......................................................................... 1415
How Granular Recovery Technology works with the Agent for
VMware ............................................................................ 1416
How Backup Exec protects Exchange, SQL, and Active Directory
data on virtual machines ................................................ 1417
Requirements for protecting Exchange, SQL, and Active Directory
data on virtual machines ................................................ 1418
About protecting databases and applications with the Symantec VSS
Provider ............................................................................ 1418
Changing the log truncation setting of the Symantec VSS
Provider ...................................................................... 1419
About restoring VMware resources .............................................. 1420
About selecting VMware resources for restore ......................... 1420
Restoring VMware resources ................................................ 1421
Redirecting the restore of a VMware virtual machine ...................... 1424
VMware Redirection options ................................................. 1424
Setting default backup and restore options for the Agent for
VMware ............................................................................ 1426
VMware default options ....................................................... 1427

Appendix N Symantec Backup Exec Archiving Option ................... 1433

About the Archiving Option ........................................................ 1434
Requirements for both the Exchange Mailbox Archiving Option and
the File System Archiving Option .......................................... 1435
Requirements for the Backup Exec Exchange Mailbox Archiving
Option ........................................................................ 1436
Requirements for the Backup Exec File System Archiving
Option ........................................................................ 1438
About granting permissions on the Exchange Server for the
Backup Exec service account in the Archiving Option ......... 1439
About Enterprise Vault services for the Archiving Option .......... 1442
 Contents 43

How to calculate disk space requirements for the Exchange

Mailbox Archiving Option .............................................. 1443
How to calculate disk space requirements for the File System
Archiving Option .......................................................... 1445
Installing the Backup Exec Archiving Option ................................. 1448
About uninstalling or reinstalling the Archiving Option ............. 1448
About installing Enterprise Vault on a media server on which
the Archiving Option is installed ..................................... 1449
How the Archiving Option works ................................................. 1449
Types of data not included in Archiving Option archive jobs ....... 1451
About Archiving Option operation entries in the audit log .......... 1452
How Archiving Option end users retrieve archived data by using
Backup Exec Retrieve .................................................... 1452
Best practices for the Archiving Option ......................................... 1453
About creating an Archiving Option archive job ............................. 1454
Creating an Archiving Option archive job by setting job
properties ................................................................... 1455
About vault stores in the Archiving Option .................................... 1465
Creating a vault store in the Archiving Option .......................... 1466
New vault store options ....................................................... 1466
Editing or viewing vault store properties ................................. 1467
Vault store properties .......................................................... 1468
Vault store selections .......................................................... 1469
About deleting an Archiving Option vault store ........................ 1470
About vault store partitions in the Archiving Option ....................... 1471
Creating a vault store partition .............................................. 1471
Editing vault store partition properties ................................... 1472
Vault store partition properties ............................................. 1472
About archives in the Archiving Option ........................................ 1473
Editing archive properties .................................................... 1474
Archive properties .............................................................. 1474
Deleting an archive ............................................................. 1475
About archive settings in the Archiving Option .............................. 1475
Archive settings options ...................................................... 1476
About retention categories for archived items .......................... 1477
Applying different archive settings to file system share and folder
selections for archive jobs .............................................. 1479
Include/Exclude Selections options for archive jobs .................. 1480
About Exchange mailbox groups in archive jobs ............................. 1481
Mailbox group options ......................................................... 1482
Managing Exchange mailbox groups ...................................... 1483
About searching for data in the archives ....................................... 1484
Searching for data in the archives .......................................... 1485
44 Contents

Search Archives options ....................................................... 1485

Search Archives options for file system selections .................... 1486
Search archives options for Exchange selections ...................... 1487
About restoring items from the archives ....................................... 1488
Restoring items from archives .............................................. 1488
Selections options for restoring items from archives ................ 1490
General options to restore items from archives ........................ 1490
Microsoft Exchange options to restore items from archives ....... 1491
File redirection options to restore items from archives .............. 1492
Microsoft Exchange redirection options to restore items from
archives ..................................................................... 1493
About deleting items from the archives ......................................... 1494
Deleting items from the archives ........................................... 1495
About deleting archived data from its original location .............. 1497
About backing up Archiving Option components ............................ 1497
About consistency checks for Archiving Option databases .......... 1500
About disabling backup mode for Archiving Option
components ................................................................. 1500
Backing up Archiving Option components ............................... 1501
Backup job properties for archive jobs .................................... 1502
About restoring an Archiving Option component ............................ 1503
Restoring an Archiving Option component .............................. 1503
About backing up and restoring the Archiving Option components
from a remote media server .................................................. 1511
Editing backup job default settings for Archiving Option
components from a remote media server ........................... 1512
Backup job default settings for the Archiving Option ................. 1512
Preventing the deletion of expired archived items from an
archive ............................................................................. 1513
About synchronizing archive permissions and settings .................... 1513
About single instance storage of archived items ............................. 1514
Enabling single instance storage of archived items .................... 1514
Editing default settings for archive jobs ........................................ 1514
Archive job default settings ................................................. 1515
About moving Archiving Option components to a new location ......... 1518
Troubleshooting archive jobs ...................................................... 1519
Viewing the Enterprise Vault event log for Archiving Option
events ......................................................................... 1520
Reports for the Archiving Option ................................................. 1520
 Contents 45

Appendix O Symantec Backup Exec Central Admin Server

Option ........................................................................... 1523
How CASO works ...................................................................... 1524
How CASO and the Shared Storage Option work together ................. 1528
Requirements for installing CASO ................................................ 1528
How to choose the location for CASO device and media data ............ 1529
Installing the CASO central administration server .......................... 1532
Installing a managed media server from the central administration
server in CASO .................................................................. 1533
About installing a CASO managed media server across a firewall
................................................................................. 1538
Changing the dynamic port on the SQL Express instance in CASO
to a static port .............................................................. 1538
Creating an alias for a managed media server when a SQL Express
instance is used ............................................................ 1539
Opening a SQL port in CASO for a SQL 2005 or 2008
instance ...................................................................... 1540
Creating an alias for a managed media server when a SQL 2005
or SQL 2008 instance is used ........................................... 1541
About upgrading an existing CASO installation .............................. 1541
Upgrading an existing CASO central administration server ........ 1542
Upgrading an existing CASO managed media server .................. 1543
Changing a Backup Exec media server to a central administration
server ............................................................................... 1545
Changing a media server to a managed media server ....................... 1546
Set Central Administration Server options .............................. 1547
Changing a managed media server to a stand-alone media
server ............................................................................... 1547
Running the Backup Exec Utility for CASO operations ..................... 1547
Uninstalling Backup Exec from the central administration server in
CASO ................................................................................ 1548
Uninstalling Backup Exec from a managed media server .................. 1548
About configuring CASO ............................................................ 1549
About reducing network traffic in CASO ................................. 1550
Setting defaults for managed media servers ............................. 1551
Setting communication thresholds and active job status updates
for CASO .................................................................... 1553
What happens when CASO communication thresholds are
reached ....................................................................... 1556
Copying logs and histories to the central administration
server ......................................................................... 1556
How alerts work in CASO ..................................................... 1558
46 Contents

About alerts and notification in CASO .................................... 1560

Enabling managed media servers to use any available network
interface card .............................................................. 1560
About CASO catalog locations ............................................... 1561
Changing the CASO catalog location ....................................... 1562
About job delegation in CASO ................................................ 1564
How to use media server pools in CASO ........................................ 1565
Restricting the backup of a selection list to specific devices in
CASO .......................................................................... 1566
Creating a media server pool in CASO ..................................... 1567
Adding managed media servers to a media server pool in
CASO .......................................................................... 1568
Renaming a media server pool in CASO ................................... 1568
Deleting a media server pool in CASO ..................................... 1568
Removing a managed media server from a media server pool in
CASO .......................................................................... 1569
Viewing general properties for a media server pool in CASO ....... 1569
Viewing active job and alert statistics for a media server pool in
CASO .......................................................................... 1570
Applying settings to all managed media servers in a pool in
CASO .......................................................................... 1571
About copying jobs instead of delegating jobs in CASO ..................... 1572
Requirements for duplicate backup data and synthetic backup jobs
in CASO ............................................................................ 1572
How centralized restore works in CASO ........................................ 1573
How CASO restores data that resides on multiple devices ........... 1574
Best practices for centralized restore in CASO .......................... 1576
Restoring from the CASO central administration server ............. 1576
Media Servers view in CASO ....................................................... 1578
About managing jobs in CASO ............................................... 1580
About recovering failed jobs in CASO ...................................... 1581
Pausing a managed media server in CASO ..................................... 1582
Resuming a paused managed media server in CASO .................. 1583
How paused storage devices appear on the Devices view in
CASO .......................................................................... 1583
Disabling communications in CASO ....................................... 1583
Enabling communications in CASO ........................................ 1584
Stopping Backup Exec services for CASO ................................. 1584
Starting Backup Exec services for CASO .................................. 1584
Connecting to a remote managed media server ......................... 1585
Viewing managed media server properties .............................. 1585
Disaster Recovery in CASO ................................................... 1586
 Contents 47

Appendix P Symantec Backup Exec Deduplication Option ........... 1587

About the Deduplication Option .................................................. 1588
Deduplication methods for Backup Exec agents ........................ 1590
Requirements for the Deduplication Option ................................... 1592
About installing the Deduplication Option ..................................... 1593
About OpenStorage devices ........................................................ 1594
Adding an OpenStorage device .............................................. 1594
Viewing properties for OpenStorage devices ............................ 1598
About deduplication storage folders ............................................. 1599
Adding a deduplication storage folder ..................................... 1600
Deleting a deduplication storage folder ................................... 1604
Viewing properties of a deduplication storage folder ................. 1604
Changing the password for the logon account for a deduplication
storage folder ............................................................... 1608
Sharing a deduplication device between multiple media servers ........ 1609
About client-side deduplication ................................................... 1610
Configuring client-side deduplication .................................... 1611
Configuring a Remote Agent for Deduplication ......................... 1612
Viewing properties of a Remote Agent for Deduplication ............ 1614
About backup jobs for deduplication ............................................. 1615
About optimized duplication ....................................................... 1615
Setting up optimized duplication ........................................... 1616
About copying deduplicated data to tapes ...................................... 1617
About using deduplication with encryption ................................... 1617
About restoring deduplicated data ............................................... 1617
About disaster recovery of a deduplication storage folder ................. 1617
Preparing for disaster recovery of a deduplication storage
folder ......................................................................... 1618
Performing disaster recovery of a deduplication storage
folder ......................................................................... 1618
About disaster recovery of OpenStorage devices ............................. 1619

Appendix Q Symantec Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop

Option ........................................................................... 1621
About the Desktop and Laptop Option .......................................... 1623
About the components of DLO ..................................................... 1624
Before you install DLO ............................................................... 1625
System requirements for the DLO Administration Console ............... 1629
About installing the Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option ........... 1630
How to deploy the Desktop Agent .......................................... 1631
Customizing the Desktop Agent installation ............................ 1632
48 Contents

Preparing for a manual push-deployment of the Desktop

Agent ......................................................................... 1634
About setting a recovery password ............................................... 1636
Checking data integrity .............................................................. 1636
Data Integrity Scanner Options ............................................. 1637
Changing DLO service credentials ................................................ 1638
Service Account Information options ..................................... 1638
About administrator accounts in DLO ........................................... 1638
Administrator Account Management options ........................... 1639
Adding an administrator account ........................................... 1640
Editing an administrator account ........................................... 1641
Removing an administrator account ....................................... 1641
About automated permissions management in DLO ........................ 1642
About limited restore in DLO ...................................................... 1642
Using a list of individual accounts to manage DLO permissions ......... 1643
Using domain groups to manage DLO permissions .......................... 1643
Permissions options ............................................................ 1644
About default DLO settings ......................................................... 1645
Changing default DLO profile settings .......................................... 1645
Changing default DLO backup selection settings ............................. 1646
Changing default DLO global settings ........................................... 1646
Global Settings options ........................................................ 1647
Desktop Agent Interval options ............................................. 1648
User Activity Settings options ............................................... 1650
LiveUpdate options ............................................................. 1650
Configuring DLO to use a specific port for database access ............... 1651
About using Backup Exec Retrieve with DLO .................................. 1652
About updating DLO .................................................................. 1652
Updating the DLO Administration Console .............................. 1653
Updating the Desktop Agent ................................................. 1653
Performing a silent upgrade of the Desktop Agent .................... 1655
About upgrading DLO to Windows Vista ................................. 1656
Upgrading From NetBackup Professional to DLO ...................... 1656
Starting the DLO Administration Console from Backup Exec ............. 1658
About the DLO Overview view ..................................................... 1658
Connecting to DLO on a different Backup Exec Media Server ............. 1659
Connect to Media Server options for DLO ................................ 1660
How to configure DLO ............................................................... 1660
Starting the Configuration Wizard ......................................... 1661
About DLO profiles ................................................................... 1661
Creating a new DLO profile ................................................... 1662
Copying a DLO profile .......................................................... 1677
Modifying a DLO profile ....................................................... 1678
 Contents 49

About backup selections in DLO ................................................... 1678

About default backup selections in DLO .................................. 1679
Removing default DLO backup selections from a profile ............. 1680
Adding a DLO backup selection to a profile .............................. 1681
General options for DLO backup selections .............................. 1682
Including and excluding files or folders from a DLO backup
selection ..................................................................... 1683
About revision control in DLO ............................................... 1684
About file grooming in DLO .................................................. 1685
Revision Control options for DLO backup selections .................. 1685
Setting options for a DLO backup selection .............................. 1686
How to use DLO macros in backup selections ........................... 1688
Modifying a DLO backup selection ......................................... 1690
Deleting DLO backup selections ............................................. 1691
About Delta File Transfer ........................................................... 1691
Requirements for Delta File Transfer ..................................... 1692
Maintenance Server technical information and tips .................. 1692
How to enable Delta File Transfer for a backup selection ............ 1693
Adding a new Maintenance Server ......................................... 1693
Configuring a maintenance server for delegation ...................... 1694
Confirming that the desktop user's account is configured for
delegation ................................................................... 1695
Confirming that the server process account is trusted for
delegation ................................................................... 1695
Changing the default maintenance server ............................... 1696
Reassigning a file server ...................................................... 1696
About DLO Storage Locations ...................................................... 1697
Supported Storage Location configurations ............................. 1698
How to use hidden shares as Storage Locations ........................ 1698
Creating DLO Storage Locations ............................................ 1700
Configuring a remote Windows share or NAS device for DLO
Storage Locations ......................................................... 1701
Configuring a remote Windows share or NAS device for DLO
Storage Locations using non-administrator case ................. 1702
Deleting DLO Storage Locations from a remote Windows share
or NAS device ............................................................... 1703
Deleting DLO Storage Locations ............................................ 1704
About Automated User Assignments ............................................ 1704
Creating Automated User Assignments ................................... 1705
Modifying Automated User Assignments ................................ 1707
Changing the priority of Automated User Assignments .............. 1708
Viewing Automated User Assignment properties ...................... 1708
Deleting Automated User Assignments ................................... 1708
50 Contents

About configuring global exclude filters in DLO .............................. 1709

Specifying files and folders to exclude from all DLO
backups ...................................................................... 1710
Excluding email from all DLO backups .................................... 1711
Excluding files and folders from compression .......................... 1714
Excluding files and folders from encryption ............................. 1714
Excluding files and folders from Delta File Transfer .................. 1715
About excluding files that are always open .............................. 1716
About using DLO macros to define global excludes .................... 1717
About managing Desktop Agent users .......................................... 1717
Manually creating new network user data folders ..................... 1718
Adding a single desktop user to DLO ....................................... 1719
Importing multiple desktop users who have existing network
storage ....................................................................... 1720
Changing the profile for a Desktop Agent user ......................... 1720
Enabling or disabling DLO access for a desktop user .................. 1721
Deleting a user from DLO ..................................................... 1722
Moving Desktop Agent users to a new network user data
folder ......................................................................... 1722
Migrating a desktop user to a new computer ............................ 1723
Viewing a list of Desktop Agent users ..................................... 1724
Modifying computer properties ................................................... 1724
Backup Folders options ........................................................ 1725
Synchronized Selections options ........................................... 1725
Enabling or disabling a desktop computer ..................................... 1726
Deleting a desktop computer from DLO ......................................... 1726
Backing up a desktop from the DLO Administration Console ............. 1726
Setting blackout windows ..................................................... 1727
Deleting a blackout window schedule ...................................... 1728
Restoring files and folders from the DLO Administration
Console ............................................................................. 1729
Restore options .................................................................. 1730
Restore Summary options .................................................... 1732
Searching for files and folders to restore with DLO ......................... 1732
Restore search options ......................................................... 1733
About DLO emergency restore and recovery passwords ................... 1733
About changing recovery passwords ....................................... 1734
What happens when a user is deleted by the DLO Administration
Console ....................................................................... 1734
Recovering data for a single user by using DLO Emergency
Restore ....................................................................... 1735
Recovering data for a single user without using DLO Emergency
Restore ....................................................................... 1735
 Contents 51

Recovering a media server or a file server if a non-system disk

fails or is otherwise corrupted ......................................... 1736
Recovering a media server if the hard drive fails or the computer
needs to be replaced ...................................................... 1736
Recovering a file server if the hard drive fails or the computer
needs to be replaced ...................................................... 1736
Computer History pane options and Job History pane options .......... 1737
Viewing history logs ............................................................ 1739
Setting filters for the job history view ..................................... 1740
Searching history logs ......................................................... 1741
About monitoring alerts on the DLO Administration Console ............ 1742
Alert categories .................................................................. 1743
DLO informational alerts ..................................................... 1743
DLO warnings .................................................................... 1744
DLO alerts ......................................................................... 1745
Configuring alerts ............................................................... 1746
Managing DLO alerts ........................................................... 1747
Clearing DLO alerts ............................................................. 1748
About configuring notification methods for DLO alerts .................... 1749
Configuring notification methods for DLO alerts ...................... 1750
About configuring recipients for notification in DLO ....................... 1750
Enabling a person to receive DLO alert notifications by SMTP
mail ........................................................................... 1751
Enabling a person to receive DLO alert notifications by MAPI
mail ........................................................................... 1751
Enabling a person to receive DLO alert notifications by VIM
mail ........................................................................... 1752
Enabling a person to receive DLO alert notifications by
pager .......................................................................... 1752
Enabling SNMP Trap to receive DLO alert notifications .............. 1752
Enabling Net Send to receive DLO alert notifications ................. 1753
Enabling a printer to receive DLO alert notifications ................. 1753
Enabling a group to receive DLO alert notifications ................... 1754
Scheduling notification for recipients in DLO ........................... 1754
Changing information about a recipient in DLO ........................ 1755
Changing the notification method for a recipient in DLO ............ 1755
Removing recipients for DLO alerts ........................................ 1756
About DLO reports .................................................................... 1756
Running a DLO report .......................................................... 1758
Viewing DLO report properties .............................................. 1759
About maintaining the DLO database ........................................... 1760
About clustering the Desktop and Laptop Option ............................ 1760
52 Contents

Installing Backup Exec and the Desktop and Laptop Option to an

existing cluster ............................................................. 1760
Upgrading an existing Backup Exec 9.x or 10.x cluster that
includes DLO ............................................................... 1761
Upgrading an existing Backup Exec 9.x or 10.x cluster and adding
DLO to the cluster ......................................................... 1761
Reconnecting a Desktop Agent to a cluster node after you
uncluster DLO .............................................................. 1762
Moving a Storage Location in a DLO cluster environment before
taking DLO out of the cluster .......................................... 1762
About the DLO command syntax .................................................. 1763
About remote server options for the command line ................... 1763
DLO commands in detail ...................................................... 1764
About the -AssignSL Command ............................................. 1765
About the -EnableUser Command .......................................... 1766
About the -ChangeServer Command ....................................... 1767
About the -KeyTest Command ............................................... 1768
About the -ListProfile Command ............................................ 1769
About the -ListSL Command ................................................. 1770
About the -ListUser Command .............................................. 1770
About the -LogFile Command ................................................ 1771
About the -Update Command ................................................ 1772
About the -EmergencyRestore Command ................................ 1774
About the -SetRecoveryPwd Command ................................... 1775
About the -NotifyClients Command ........................................ 1775
About the -InactiveAccounts Command .................................. 1776
About the -RenameDomain Command .................................... 1776
About the -RenameMS Command .......................................... 1776
About the -LimitAdminTo Command ...................................... 1777
About the -IOProfile Command .............................................. 1777
About the Desktop Agent ........................................................... 1778
Desktop Agent terminology ........................................................ 1779
Features and benefits of the Desktop Agent ................................... 1779
System requirements for the Desktop Agent .................................. 1780
Installing the Desktop Agent ....................................................... 1781
How to configure the Desktop Agent ............................................ 1782
About connecting from the Desktop Agent to the media
server ......................................................................... 1782
Alternate Credentials options ................................................ 1783
About using local accounts on desktop computers ..................... 1784
Resetting dialog boxes and account information in DLO ............. 1785
Changing your connection status ........................................... 1785
Enabling the Desktop Agent .................................................. 1786
 Contents 53

Disabling the Desktop Agent ................................................. 1786

About the Desktop Agent Console ................................................ 1786
About using the Desktop Agent to back up your data ....................... 1788
About revisions .................................................................. 1789
Modifying backup selections in the Desktop Agent's standard
view ........................................................................... 1790
Adding backup selections in the Desktop Agent's advanced
view ........................................................................... 1791
Modifying backup selections in the Desktop Agent's advanced
view ........................................................................... 1792
Deleting backup selections in the Desktop Agent's advanced
view ........................................................................... 1792
About using DLO to back up Outlook PST files
incrementally .............................................................. 1793
About backing up Lotus Notes NSF files incrementally ............... 1794
Configuring the Desktop Agent for incremental backup of Lotus
Notes files ................................................................... 1795
About using the Desktop Agent when Lotus Notes is not
configured for the current user ....................................... 1795
About modifying Desktop Agent settings ...................................... 1795
Changing schedule options for a DLO backup job ...................... 1796
Setting customized options on the Desktop Agent ..................... 1798
Moving the desktop user data folder ....................................... 1800
Customizing connection policies ............................................ 1801
About synchronizing desktop user data ........................................ 1801
How synchronization works .................................................. 1802
Synchronizing a folder across multiple desktops ...................... 1803
Changing or viewing a synchronized folder ............................. 1804
Removing a synchronized folder ............................................ 1804
Resolving conflicts with synchronized files ............................. 1805
About the status of the Desktop Agent .......................................... 1805
Starting a pending job from the Status view ............................. 1806
About suspending or canceling a job ............................................. 1806
Viewing usage details ................................................................ 1807
Usage Details ..................................................................... 1808
Restoring files by using the ClientApplicationName ........................ 1809
Restore options .................................................................. 1810
Searching for desktop files and folders to restore ..................... 1811
About restoring Microsoft Outlook Personal Folder files ............ 1812
About restoring deleted email messages .................................. 1812
About restoring files with alternate stream data ....................... 1813
About using Backup Exec Retrieve to restore files ........................... 1813
About monitoring job history in the Desktop Agent ......................... 1813
54 Contents

Viewing log files ................................................................. 1814

Searching for log files .......................................................... 1816
About grooming log files ...................................................... 1818
About using DLO with other products ........................................... 1818
Troubleshooting the DLO Administration Console .......................... 1819
Troubleshooting the Desktop Agent ............................................. 1823
Accessibility and DLO ................................................................ 1825

Appendix R Symantec Backup Exec Intelligent Disaster

Recovery Option ......................................................... 1829
About the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option .............................. 1830
Requirements for using IDR ........................................................ 1831
About installing the IDR Option ................................................... 1831
About using a trial version of the IDR Option ........................... 1832
About preparing computers for IDR ............................................. 1832
About the the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Configuration
Wizard .............................................................................. 1834
About manually editing the default data paths for the *.dr
files ............................................................................ 1835
About creating and updating recovery media ................................. 1837
About requirements for running the Intelligent Disaster Recovery
Preparation Wizard ....................................................... 1838
About running the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Preparation
Wizard ........................................................................ 1839
About creating recovery media after a disaster ......................... 1840
Creating the Intelligent Disaster Recovery nonbootable CD image
only ........................................................................... 1846
Copying the disaster recovery files ............................................... 1848
Preparing IDR media by using other media servers ......................... 1849
Media server logon credential options .................................... 1850
About preparing to recover from a disaster by using IDR .................. 1851
About changing hardware in the computer to be recovered ......... 1853
About using IDR to recover IBM computers ............................. 1854
About the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Wizard ............................. 1854
About encrypted backup sets and the Intelligent Disaster
Recovery Wizard .......................................................... 1855
Recovering a computer by using the Intelligent Disaster Recovery
Wizard ........................................................................ 1855
Performing an automated restore by using the Intelligent Disaster
Recovery Wizard .......................................................... 1856
Restoring from a locally attached media device ........................ 1859
Restoring from remote backup-to-disk folders ......................... 1861
 Contents 55

Restoring from a remote media server .................................... 1863

Installing network drivers .................................................... 1864
About altering hard drive partition sizes ................................. 1865
Performing a manual restore by using the Intelligent Disaster
Recovery Wizard .......................................................... 1865
Microsoft SQL Server recovery notes ...................................... 1868
Microsoft Exchange recovery notes ........................................ 1868
SharePoint Portal Server recovery notes ................................. 1868
Citrix Metaframe recovery notes ........................................... 1868
About using IDR with the Central Admin Server Option ................... 1869
About using IDR with Veritas Storage Foundation for Windows ........ 1869
Best Practices for IDR ................................................................ 1870

Appendix S Symantec Backup Exec NDMP Option ......................... 1871

About the NDMP Option ............................................................. 1871
Requirements for using the NDMP Option ..................................... 1872
About installing the NDMP Option ............................................... 1873
Adding an NDMP server to Backup Exec ........................................ 1873
Add NDMP Server options .................................................... 1874
Sharing the devices on an NDMP server between multiple media
servers .............................................................................. 1874
Backing up NDMP resources ....................................................... 1875
NDMP backup options for NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu ........................ 1876
NDMP backup options for EMC .............................................. 1877
NDMP backup options for providers other than
NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu and EMC ......................................... 1878
About including and excluding directories and files for NDMP backup
selections .......................................................................... 1878
Including specific directories in an NDMP backup selection ........ 1880
How to use patterns to exclude files and directories from an
NDMP backup selection ................................................. 1881
Excluding directories and files from a NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu
backup selection ........................................................... 1883
Excluding directories and files from an EMC backup
selection ..................................................................... 1884
Excluding files and directories from backup selections for NDMP
providers other than NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu and EMC ............ 1885
How to duplicate backed up NDMP data ........................................ 1886
Restoring NDMP data ................................................................ 1887
NDMP restore options for NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu ........................ 1888
NDMP restore options for EMC .............................................. 1889
56 Contents

NDMP restore options for providers other than

NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu and EMC ......................................... 1890
About redirecting restored NDMP data ......................................... 1891
Setting the default backup and restore options for NDMP ................. 1891
NDMP default options for NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu backup and
restore ........................................................................ 1892
NDMP default options for EMC backup and restore ................... 1893
NDMP default backup and restore options for providers other
than NetApp/IBM/Fujitsu and EMC .................................. 1895
Viewing NDMP server properties ................................................. 1896
NDMP server properties ....................................................... 1896

Appendix T Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Linux or

UNIX Servers ............................................................... 1899
About the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers ........................ 1900
Requirements for the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers ......... 1900
About installing the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers ........... 1901
Installing the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers ............. 1901
About configuring the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers ........ 1905
About publishing Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh computers to media
servers .............................................................................. 1906
Adding media servers to which the Remote Agent for Linux,
UNIX, and Macintosh can publish information ................... 1907
About excluding files and directories from backup jobs for Linux,
UNIX, and Macintosh computers ........................................... 1908
Editing configuration options for Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh
computers ......................................................................... 1908
Configuration options for Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh
computers ................................................................... 1909
About backing up data by using the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX
Servers ............................................................................. 1915
Backing up Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh computers .................. 1916
Backup job options for Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh
computers ................................................................... 1942
Requirements for backing up Novell Open Enterprise Server on
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server ......................................... 1919
Novell Open Enterprise Server components that are supported
for backup .................................................................. 1920
Backing up Novell Open Enterprise Server (OES)
components ................................................................. 1920
Restoring data to Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh computers ................ 1921
About restoring Novell OES components ................................. 1922
 Contents 57

Restore job options for Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh

computers ................................................................... 1922
Edit the default backup and restore job options for Linux, UNIX, and
Macintosh computers .......................................................... 1923
Default backup and restore job options for Linux, UNIX, and
Macintosh computers .................................................... 1923
Uninstalling the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers ............... 1927
Manually uninstalling the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX
Servers ...................................................................... 1928
Runtime scripts to remove when manually uninstalling the
Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers .......................... 1929
Starting the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers daemon .......... 1931
Stopping the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers daemon ......... 1931
Troubleshooting the Remote Agent for Linux or UNIX Servers .......... 1932

Appendix U Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Macintosh

Systems ........................................................................ 1935
About the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems ............................ 1935
Requirements for the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems ............. 1936
About the Backup Exec admin group on Macintosh systems .............. 1936
Creating the Backup Exec admin group manually on Macintosh
systems ....................................................................... 1937
About installing the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems ............... 1938
Installing the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems .................. 1938
About configuring the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems ............ 1941
About backing up data by using the Remote Agent for Macintosh
Systems ............................................................................ 1941
Backing up Macintosh systems .............................................. 1942
Macintosh restore options .......................................................... 1942
Restoring Macintosh systems ................................................ 1943
Editing the default backup and restore options for Macintosh
systems ............................................................................. 1943
Default backup and restore job options for Macintosh
systems ....................................................................... 1943
Uninstalling the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems .................... 1947
Starting the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems ................... 1948
Stopping the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems .................. 1948
Manually uninstalling the Remote Agent for Macintosh
Systems ...................................................................... 1949
Troubleshooting the Remote Agent for Macintosh Systems .............. 1950
58 Contents

Appendix V Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for NetWare

Systems ........................................................................ 1953
About the Remote Agent for NetWare Systems ............................... 1953
Requirements for installing the Remote Agent for NetWare Systems
on a NetWare server ............................................................ 1954
About installing the Remote Agent for NetWare Systems ................ 1955
Installing the Remote Agent for NetWare Systems .................... 1955
About publishing NetWare servers to the NetWare agents
list ............................................................................. 1957
Adding BESTART to the Autoexec.ncf file on the NetWare
server ......................................................................... 1958
Unloading the Remote Agent for NetWare Systems ................... 1958
About backing up NetWare servers .............................................. 1958
About backing up the NetWare Directory Services (NDS) ............ 1960
Backing up NetWare servers ................................................. 1962
NetWare SMS backup options ............................................... 1963
About restoring NetWare servers ................................................. 1963
Restoring NetWare servers ................................................... 1963
About default options for the Remote Agent for NetWare
Systems ............................................................................ 1965
Setting default options for the Remote Agent for NetWare
Systems ..................................................................... 1965
Specifying TCP dynamic port ranges on the media server ........... 1967
Saving configuration information for the NetWare server ................ 1968

Appendix W Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows

Systems ........................................................................ 1969
About the Remote Agent for Windows Systems .............................. 1969
Requirements for the Remote Agent for Windows Systems ............... 1970
Stopping and starting the Remote Agent for Windows Systems ......... 1971
About the Remote Agent Utility for Windows Systems ..................... 1972
Starting the Remote Agent Utility .......................................... 1973
Viewing the activity status of the remote computer in the Remote
Agent Utility ................................................................ 1973
Status options for the Remote Agent Utility ............................ 1974
Viewing the activity status of the remote computer from the
system tray .................................................................. 1974
Starting the Remote Agent Utility automatically on the remote
computer .................................................................... 1975
Setting the refresh interval on the remote computer ................. 1975
 Contents 59

About publishing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems to

media servers ............................................................... 1975
Configuring database access ....................................................... 1979
Database access options for the Remote Agent Utility ............... 1980
About the Remote Agent Utility Command Line Applet .................... 1982
Using the Remote Agent Utility Command Line Applet .............. 1982
Remote Agent Utility Command Line Applet switches ............... 1983

Appendix X Symantec Backup Exec Remote Media Agent for

Linux Servers .............................................................. 1989
About the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers ........................... 1990
How the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers works .................... 1990
Requirements for the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers ........... 1991
About installing the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers ............. 1992
Installing the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers ................ 1992
About the Backup Exec operators group for the Remote Media
Agent for Linux Servers ................................................. 1995
Creating the Backup Exec operators group manually for the
Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers ............................. 1995
Adding a Linux server as a Remote Media Agent ............................ 1996
Add Remote Media Agent options .......................................... 1997
Changing the port for communications between the media server
and the Remote Media Agent .......................................... 1999
Editing properties for the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers
....................................................................................... 1999
Remote Media Agent properties ............................................. 2000
Sharing a Remote Media Agent between multiple media servers ........ 2001
About creating device pools for devices attached to the Remote Media
Agent for Linux Servers ...................................................... 2001
Deleting a Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers from a media
server ............................................................................... 2002
Backing up data by using the Remote Media Agent for Linux
Servers ............................................................................. 2002
Restoring data by using the Remote Media Agent for Linux
Servers ............................................................................. 2002
About the Tape Library Simulator Utility ...................................... 2003
Creating a simulated tape library ........................................... 2004
Viewing simulated tape libraries properties ............................. 2005
Deleting a simulated tape library ........................................... 2007
Managing simulated tape libraries from the command line ......... 2008
Uninstalling the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers .................. 2009
Finding simulated tape library files ........................................ 2010
60 Contents

Troubleshooting the Remote Media Agent for Linux Servers ............. 2011

Appendix Y Symantec Backup Exec SAN Shared Storage

Option ........................................................................... 2015
About the SAN Shared Storage Option .......................................... 2015
Requirements for the SAN Shared Storage Option .......................... 2017
About installing the SAN Shared Storage Option ............................ 2018
About devices in the SAN Shared Storage Option ............................ 2019
About media rotation in the SAN Shared Storage Option ............ 2020
How to catalog media in the SAN Shared Storage Option ............ 2021
About sharing media in the SAN Shared Storage Option ............ 2021
About scheduling and viewing jobs in the SAN Shared Storage
Option ........................................................................ 2021
About sharing robotic libraries between Backup Exec for NetWare
Servers and Backup Exec ................................................ 2022
About robotic library sharing prerequisites ............................. 2023
Configuring partitions on Windows media servers for robotic
library sharing ............................................................. 2024
Configuring partitions on NetWare media servers for robotic
library sharing ............................................................. 2024
About device operations with the SAN Shared Storage Option
................................................................................. 2027
About renaming robotic libraries and drives in the SAN Shared
Storage Option ............................................................. 2027
How to use drive pools with the SAN Shared Storage
Option ........................................................................ 2028
About viewing media in the SAN Shared Storage Option ............ 2029
How to monitor drives in the SAN Shared Storage Option .......... 2029
About designating a new primary database server and setting up
servers in the SAN Shared Storage Option ............................... 2029
Tips for maintaining the Backup Exec database servers and the
shared ADAMM database in the SAN Shared Storage
Option ........................................................................ 2030
Creating a standby primary database server in the SAN Shared
Storage Option ............................................................. 2031
About starting and stopping Backup Exec Services on multiple
servers in the SAN Shared Storage Option ......................... 2033
About reconfiguration of the SAN Shared Storage Option
environment ................................................................ 2033
Troubleshooting failed components in the SAN Shared Storage
Option .............................................................................. 2034
 Contents 61

Troubleshooting offline devices in the SAN Shared Storage

Option ........................................................................ 2034
Finding hardware errors for the SAN Shared Storage
Option ........................................................................ 2036
Resetting the SAN in the SAN Shared Storage Option ................ 2037
Bringing devices online after an unsafe device removal event in
the SAN Shared Storage Option ....................................... 2038
Best practices for the SAN Shared Storage Option ........................... 2038

Appendix Z Symantec Backup Exec Storage Provisioning

Option ........................................................................... 2041
About the Storage Provisioning Option ......................................... 2042
Requirements for the Storage Provisioning Option ......................... 2043
Requirements for the Storage Provisioning Option in a CASO
environment ...................................................................... 2043
About installing the Storage Provisioning Option ........................... 2044
Viewing storage array components in Backup Exec ......................... 2044
About using the Storage Array Configuration Wizard ...................... 2045
Configuring a storage array by using the Storage Array Configuration
Wizard .............................................................................. 2046
Viewing properties for storage arrays .......................................... 2047
General properties for storage arrays ..................................... 2047
Properties of physical disks on storage arrays ............................... 2050
About the All Virtual Disks device pool in the Storage Provisioning
Option .............................................................................. 2053
About virtual disks in the Storage Provisioning Option .................... 2053
Editing default options for a virtual disk on a storage array ........ 2054
Advanced properties for storage arrays .................................. 2055
Editing the default options for all virtual disks on storage arrays
................................................................................. 2056
Default options for all virtual disks on storage arrays ................ 2057
Configuring a virtual disk on a storage array ........................... 2058
Viewing properties for unconfigured virtual disks on a storage
array .......................................................................... 2059
Properties for unconfigured virtual disks on storage arrays ........ 2059
Editing general properties of virtual disks on storage
arrays ......................................................................... 2061
General properties for virtual disks on storage arrays ............... 2062
About hot spares in the Storage Provisioning Option ....................... 2066
Adding a hot spare by using the Storage Array Configuration
Wizard ........................................................................ 2066
62 Contents

Changing a hot spare by using the Storage Array Configuration

Wizard ........................................................................ 2067
Detecting a new storage array ..................................................... 2068
Renaming a virtual disk or storage array ....................................... 2068
About identifying the physical disks of a virtual disk ....................... 2069
Identifying the physical disks of a virtual disk .......................... 2070
About predicting disk usage in the Storage Provisioning Option ........ 2070
Configuring an alert for low disk space on storage arrays ................. 2071
Default options for Storage Provisioning Alert ............................... 2071
Troubleshooting the Storage Provisioning Option ........................... 2072

Appendix AA Symantec Online Storage for Backup Exec ................ 2075

About Symantec Online Storage for Backup Exec ............................ 2075
Best practices for using Symantec Online Storage for Backup
Exec ................................................................................. 2076
Setting up Symantec Online Storage for Backup Exec ...................... 2077
About signing up for Symantec Online Storage for Backup
Exec ........................................................................... 2077
About downloading the Symantec Online Storage for Backup
Exec Protection Agent ................................................... 2078
About Symantec Online Storage folders ........................................ 2078
Creating a Symantec Online Storage folder .............................. 2078
Pausing a Symantec Online Storage folder ............................... 2080
Resuming a Symantec Online Storage folder ............................ 2080
Sharing an existing Symantec Online Storage folder ................. 2081
About creating duplicate backup jobs for Symantec Online Storage
for Backup Exec .................................................................. 2081
Creating duplicate backup jobs for Symantec Online Storage for
Backup Exec ................................................................ 2082
About managing Symantec Online Storage for Backup Exec jobs ....... 2084
Erasing Symantec Online Storage for Backup Exec files ................... 2084
Deleting Symantec Online Storage folders ..................................... 2085
About restoring Symantec Online Storage for Backup Exec jobs ........ 2086

Appendix AB Accessibility and Backup Exec ...................................... 2087

About accessibility and Backup Exec ............................................ 2087
About keyboard shortcuts in Backup Exec ..................................... 2088
Keyboard shortcuts unique to Backup Exec .............................. 2088
Keyboard shortcuts unique to Backup Exec Utility .................... 2090
Keyboard shortcuts unique to Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop
Option Administration Console ....................................... 2091
 Contents 63

Keyboard shortcuts unique to Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop

Option Desktop Agent ................................................... 2093
General keyboard navigation within the Backup Exec user
interface ..................................................................... 2094
Keyboard navigation within dialog boxes in Backup Exec ........... 2095
List box navigation in Backup Exec .............................................. 2096
Tabbed dialog box navigation in Backup Exec ................................. 2096
About setting accessibility options ............................................... 2096

Glossary ........................................................................................................... 2099

Index ................................................................................................................. 2107

Chapter 21 Backup Wizard ................................................................. 2151

Available backup methods for resources ....................................... 2151

Chapter 22 Context-sensitive help .................................................... 2159

File menu ................................................................................ 2159
Edit menu ................................................................................ 2160
View menu .............................................................................. 2161
View menu from Job Setup ......................................................... 2162
View menu from Job Monitor ...................................................... 2163
View menu from Alerts .............................................................. 2164
View menu from Devices, Media, and Media Servers ........................ 2165
Network menu ......................................................................... 2166
Window menu .......................................................................... 2166
Help menu ............................................................................... 2167
Tools menu .............................................................................. 2169
Media server general tab ............................................................ 2173
Media server system tab ............................................................. 2175
Media server statistics tab .......................................................... 2175
64 Contents
 Chapter 1
Introducing Backup Exec
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About Backup Exec

■ How Backup Exec works

■ What’s new in Backup Exec

■ What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options

■ Backup Exec agents and options

■ About the Administration Console

■ About the Home view

About Backup Exec

Symantec Backup Exec 2010 is a high-performance data management solution
for Windows® servers networks. With its client/server design, Backup Exec
provides fast, reliable backup and restore capabilities for servers and workstations
across the network.
Backup Exec is available in the following configurations that can accommodate
multi-platform networks of all sizes.
66 Introducing Backup Exec
About Backup Exec

Table 1-1 Backup Exec configurations for multiple platforms

Backup Exec Edition Description

Symantec Backup Exec™

2010
 Introducing Backup Exec 67
About Backup Exec

Table 1-1 Backup Exec configurations for multiple platforms (continued)

Backup Exec Edition Description

Supports a wide variety of both tape and disk devices in

almost any type of storage configuration such as the
following:

■ Fiber Channel
■ iSCSI
■ NAS
■ SAN, LAN, and WAN
■ Disk-based deduplication appliances

Backup Exec 2010 protects physical and virtual

environments such as Windows, Linux, Solaris, MAC OS,
VMware, and NetWare systems. Optional Backup Exec
agents are available to protect remote systems, applications,
and databases. You can add separate Backup Exec options
to provide advanced features such as data deduplication,
archiving, and centralized management.
Each license of Backup Exec 2010 includes the following
options:

■ Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option

This option provides disaster recovery capabilities for
systems without having to reinstall the operating system.
Backup Exec System Recovery 2010 is sold separately
for faster and advanced system recovery capabilities.
These capabilities include dissimilar hardware recovery
support and recovery to a virtual environment such as
VMware, Microsoft Hyper-V, and Citrix Xen.
See the following URL:
www.backupexec.com/besr
■ Advanced Open File Option
This option is now included and enabled by default to
provide automatic open file protection using the
Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Services (VSS) snapshot
infrastructures.
■ Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option
This option provides continuous protection of the user
data files that are sent to a file share on your network
that Backup Exec 2010 can protect. Licenses for five
desktop and laptop computers are included in the Backup
Exec 2010 license.
■ Support for stand-alone tape drives and backup-to-disk
folders
68 Introducing Backup Exec
About Backup Exec

Table 1-1 Backup Exec configurations for multiple platforms (continued)

Backup Exec Edition Description

Backup Exec 2010 provides support for a large number

of tape and disk-based backup devices.
You can find a list of compatible devices at the following
URL:
http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-2
■ Support for one drive in every physical robotic library
and support for every single-drive virtual tape library
To enable support for each additional drive in a physical
robotic library, you can purchase the Library Expansion
Option. You can also purchase the Virtual Tape Library
Unlimited Drive Option to enable unlimited drive support
in a virtual tape library.
■ Backup Exec Remote Agents for Windows XP
Professional OS workstations.

See “Backup Exec agents and options” on page 82.

 Introducing Backup Exec 69
About Backup Exec

Table 1-1 Backup Exec configurations for multiple platforms (continued)

Backup Exec Edition Description

Small Business Server Installs on and protects supported versions of Microsoft

Edition (SBSE) Small Business Server for Windows.

You can find a list of supported operating systems,

platforms, and applications at the following URL:

http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-1
The Small Business Server Edition includes the following
features:

■ Exchange Agent.
■ SQL Agent to protect Microsoft SQL on Small Business
Server Premium Editions.
■ SharePoint Agent to protect Windows SharePoint
Services.
■ Remote Agent for Windows Systems to protect a second
server with the Small Business Server Premium Edition.
■ Desktop and Laptop Option to protect supported versions
of Windows desktops and laptops.
■ Backup Exec System Recovery 2010 Small Business
Server Edition to take a disk-based snapshot backup of
a complete system while Windows is running. Ensures
a complete system recovery for the entire Small Business
Server system to one of the following:
■ The original hardware.
■ To different hardware.
■ To a VMware or Hyper-V virtual environment.
The Granular Recovery Option is also included.
■ Backup Exec System Recovery 2010 Server Edition (when
used on Microsoft SBS Premium Edition only). Included
to provide complete system recovery for the additional
Windows server that is included with Microsoft Windows
Small Business Server (SBS) Premium Edition. Includes
the Granular Recovery Option.
■ Backup Exec System Recovery 2010 Desktop Edition.
Required to use the Granular Recovery Option to
facilitate the restore of individual Exchange mail
messages and SharePoint documents.

With the exceptions of the Central Admin Server Option

and SAN Shared Storage Option, you can purchase
additional Backup Exec agents and options for use with
SBSE.
70 Introducing Backup Exec
How Backup Exec works

Table 1-1 Backup Exec configurations for multiple platforms (continued)

Backup Exec Edition Description

QuickStart Edition (QSE) Installs on and protects any supported version of Microsoft
Windows Server.
(OEM release only)
You can find a list of supported operating systems,
platforms, and applications at the following URL:

http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-1
QuickStart Edition supports the following:

■ Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option.

This option provides continuous protection of user data
files for five desktop and laptop computers.
■ Single-drive robotic library or virtual tape library.
To enable support for each additional drive in a physical
robotic library, you can purchase the Library Expansion
Option. You can also purchase the Virtual Tape Library
Unlimited Drive Option to enable unlimited drive support
in a virtual tape library.
■ Stand-alone tape drives and backup-to-disk drives.

You must purchase an upgrade to Symantec Backup Exec

2010 or the Small Business Server Edition of Backup Exec
to use additional Backup Exec agents and options.
OEM-specific versions of QuickStart may support additional
options.

See “What’s new in Backup Exec” on page 72.

See “What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options” on page 77.
See “Backup Exec agents and options” on page 82.
See “How Backup Exec works” on page 70.

How Backup Exec works

You use the Backup Exec Administration Console to submit backup, restore, and
utility operations. Administrators can run the Administration Console from the
media server (a Windows server on which Backup Exec is installed) or from a
remote computer. After jobs are created, the Backup Exec media server processes
the jobs or delegates the jobs for processing, depending on your environment.
Most interaction with Backup Exec, such as submitting jobs, viewing results, and
performing device and media operations, is done through the Administration
Console.
 Introducing Backup Exec 71
How Backup Exec works

Figure 1-1 Backup and restore functionality for the entire network

Through the Administration Console, you configure the job defaults that you want
Backup Exec to use for most jobs. However, you can override these default options
while setting up a specific job such as a weekly backup of selected workstations,
called resources. You can create a once-only job, such as the restore of a file to a
server. Or, you can schedule recurring jobs, such as daily backup jobs. You can
use policies to manage the recurring jobs that make up your backup strategy.
Wizards guide you through most Backup Exec operations, including the creation
of a backup or restore job, setting up media rotation jobs, and setting media
overwrite protection.
72 Introducing Backup Exec
What’s new in Backup Exec

You can monitor a job’s progress through the Job Monitor, or use Backup Exec’s
Calendar to quickly view all jobs scheduled to run for the day, week, or month.
The media server contains the media and device databases that organize and
allocate the storage devices that are accessible to the media server. These databases
also help prevent media from being accidentally overwritten. Through Backup
Exec’s device management functions, you can logically group storage devices
together in device pools to share the backup workload. Through the media
management function, you can organize, track, and troubleshoot all of the media
in your library.
After a job has been processed, the job’s results are stored in a job history database.
A record of the data that was backed up is kept in Backup Exec’s catalog. The job
history is a report of what happened during the processing of the job (statistics,
errors, and so on), and the catalog file is the record from which restore selections
are made.

What’s new in Backup Exec

This release of Backup Exec includes the following new features and capabilities:

Table 1-2 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec

New feature Description

Support for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Lets you do the following:

■ Back up and restore data

using the new Express
(system state) writers
■ Back up and restore
operating system boot files
from unnamed partitions
■ Back up and restore Cluster
Shared Volumes (CSV)
■ Back up from and restore to
native VHD files
 Introducing Backup Exec 73
What’s new in Backup Exec

Table 1-2 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec (continued)

New feature Description

Support for the Server Core installation option of Lets you install the Backup Exec
Windows Server 2008 R2 Remote Agent for Windows
Systems on the Server Core for
backup and restore operations.
The Remote Agent also installs
the Remote Agent Utility
Command Line Applet. This
applet lets you monitor Backup
Exec operations on the remote
computer.

Support for Microsoft Windows 7 Lets you install the Backup Exec
Remote Agent for Microsoft
Windows 7 computers for backup
and restore operations. The
Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop
Option provides automated file
protection for Windows 7
computers. Backup Exec also
supports BitLocker drive
encryption.

Enhanced Backup Exec License Assessment Tool Supports the license key scans
on all installations of Backup
Exec System Recovery and
Backup Exec 2010 on your
network.
The License Assessment Tool
report now provides the
following new information:

■ The versions of Backup Exec

that are installed so that you
can plan to upgrade your
environment.
■ A web link on the report that
provides upgrade assistance
so that you can read about
the new features in current
releases.
74 Introducing Backup Exec
What’s new in Backup Exec

Table 1-2 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec (continued)

New feature Description

Support for new platforms for the Remote Agent for Supports the following
Linux or UNIX Servers platforms:

■ Oracle Enterprise Linux 5.2

■ Ubuntu 8.10
■ XenServer 5
■ Debian 4.0, 5.0
■ SUSE Linux Enterprise 11

Support for a new platform for the Remote Media Agent Supports SUSE Linux Enterprise
for Linux 11.

Enhancement for Library Expansion Option Supports each additional drive

that you add after the first drive
that you add in each robotic
library. When you install Backup
Exec, support for the first drive
in every robotic library is
included. The Library Expansion
Option enables support for each
additional drive in a robotic
library.

Home view on the Backup Exec Administration Console Lets you add or delete items to
customize the display of your
important Backup Exec features.
In one view, you can display
summaries of jobs, alerts, and
devices, and the technical
support sites that you want fast
access to. You can add as many
or as few items as you want.

Installation DVD Provides all of the Backup Exec

installation files on a single DVD.
 Introducing Backup Exec 75
What’s new in Backup Exec

Table 1-2 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec (continued)

New feature Description

Share Your Ideas web link Lets you suggest new ideas for
Symantec Backup Exec by
clicking this link that is located
at the top of the Backup Exec
Administration Console . After
you have submitted your
suggestions, other community
members can vote or comment
on the idea. The ideas with the
most votes move to the top of the
list. Symantec product managers
review these ideas for possible
features in future releases.

DirectCopy Enables data to be copied from a

virtual device directly to a
physical device. The Backup Exec
media server records
information about the data in the
catalog. Because the information
about the copied data is in the
catalog, you can restore data
from either the virtual device or
the physical device.
76 Introducing Backup Exec
What’s new in Backup Exec

Table 1-2 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec (continued)

New feature Description

Verify backup sets template Lets you run verify operations

independent of backup and
duplicate backup jobs. The verify
backup sets template lets you
schedule a verify operation to
run at any time after a backup.
For example, you can schedule
the verify operation to run
outside of your backup window
if your network resources are
scarce. The verify backup sets
template also greatly enhances
the benefits you receive from
Backup Exec's Deduplication
Option by letting you verify
backup sets locally.

Backup Exec includes an example

policy that is preconfigured with
a verify backup sets template.

Typical installation Provides a new, simpler wizard

for installation. This installation
method is designed for small or
uncomplicated environments.
Backup Exec makes many of the
installation decisions for you,
based on common installation
scenarios. If you prefer to set all
of your installation options, you
can use the Custom installation
option, which provides the same
installation wizard that was
available in Backup Exec 2010.
 Introducing Backup Exec 77
What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-2 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec (continued)

New feature Description

Backup Exec Renewal Assistant Lets you access maintenance

contract expiration information
from within Backup Exec.

The Renewal Assistant uses the

contract expiration information
to automatically set the Backup
Exec alerts that remind you to
renew the maintenance contracts
before they expire. Reminder
alerts are set at 30-day, 60-day,
and 90-day intervals, based on
the expiration date of the
maintenance contract.

Symantec RSS Reader Lets you view and add Backup

Exec and Symantec RSS feeds in
the Home view on the Backup
Exec Administration Console.

Enhanced Backup Wizard Provides a more efficient design

that makes it easier for you to
back up your computers. The
wizard helps you create a backup
job that uses the recommended
best practices.

See “What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options” on page 77.
See “Backup Exec agents and options” on page 82.

What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options

This release of Backup Exec includes the following new features and capabilities
in the agents and options:
78 Introducing Backup Exec
What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-3 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec agents and options

Agent or option New feature

Agent for VMware Includes support for the following:

Virtual Infrastructure
■ VMware vSphere v4.1, which includes ESX/ESXi 4.1, vCenter
4.1, and vStorage APIs for Data Protection
■ Differential and incremental backups of virtual machines that
are configured with hardware version 7
■ Non-staged backups, which provide improved performance
without the need for VCB proxy servers
■ SAN-based restores of virtual machines

Also, includes the following new features:

■ Single-pass backups of VSS-aware applications that are

installed on virtual machines, with the ability to recover
individual application items
■ Dynamic inclusion, which automatically protects any virtual
machines that you added since the last backup
■ Ability to automatically exclude from jobs any virtual machines
that are turned off
■ Ability to redirect a virtual machine to a different virtual
machine folder or resource pool
■ Expanded Job History now lists the total number of virtual
machines in each backup
■ Multiple alternate backup transport types to ensure that
backups complete successfully

Agent for Microsoft Includes support for the following:

Hyper-V
■ Hyper-V 2008 R2
■ Clustered Hyper-V virtual machines, with automatic discovery
of Highly Available virtual machines
■ Cluster shared volumes
■ Live Migration
■ Single-pass backups of VSS-aware applications that are
installed on virtual machines, with the ability to recover
individual application items

This agent was formerly known as the Agent for Microsoft Virtual
Servers.
 Introducing Backup Exec 79
What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-3 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec agents and options
(continued)

Agent or option New feature

Agent for Microsoft Includes the following new features:

Exchange Server
■ Support for Exchange Server 2010
■ Support for Exchange Server 2010 Database Availability
Groups
■ Support for Exchange Server 2010 in Hyper-V and ESX 4.0
environments through the Remote Agent for Windows Systems
■ CPS support Exchange Server 2010 stand-alone servers

Agent for Enterprise Includes the following new features:

Vault
■ Support for Enterprise Vault 8.0
■ Support for Enterprise Vault Compliance Accelerator and
Discovery Accelerator
■ Supports Backup Exec Migrator for Enterprise Vault.
Backup Exec Migrator enables the migration of archived
Enterprise Vault data from Enterprise Vault servers to the
tertiary storage systems that Backup Exec media servers
manage.

Exchange Mailbox Lets you archive Microsoft Exchange Server emails that have been
Archiving Option backed up. After data is archived, it is deleted from its source
location, which reduces the amount of data on the Exchange
Server.

The Archiving Option uses Enterprise Vault technology to move

archive data to disk-based vault stores. Only data that is already
backed up is archived so that there is little affect on the Exchange
server. End users can retrieve current and previous versions of
files by browsing a web interface called Backup Exec Retrieve.

See “About the Archiving Option” on page 1434.

File System Archiving Lets you archive Windows NTFS data that has been backed up.
Option After data is archived, it is deleted from its source location, which
reduces the amount of data on the file server.

The Archiving Option uses Enterprise Vault technology to move

archive data to disk-based vault stores. Only data that is already
backed up is archived so that there is little affect on the file system
server. End users can retrieve current and previous versions of
files by browsing a web interface called Backup Exec Retrieve.

See “About the Archiving Option” on page 1434.

80 Introducing Backup Exec
What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-3 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec agents and options
(continued)

Agent or option New feature

Virtual Tape Library Supports all additional drives after you add the first drive in each
Unlimited Drive virtual tape library (VTL). You can purchase the Virtual Tape
Option Library Unlimited Drive Option to support all of the additional
drives in each virtual tape library. You do not have to purchase
separate instances of the Virtual Tape Library Unlimited Drive
Option for each virtual drive.
Additional VTL enhancements include the following:

■ VTL recognition capabilities

■ VTL device-specific menus to ensure proper operation
■ Support for synthetic full backups when used with the
Advanced Disk-based Backup Option.

Deduplication Option Includes the following new features:

■ Ability to reduce the amount of disk storage that is required

for backups by storing only unique data.
■ Ability to reduce backup network usage by sending only unique
data across the network.
■ Support for non-staged restores of granular data from a
duplicate backup set that is copied between deduplication
devices that support non-staged granular restores.
Also, includes the following revised terminology:

■ Direct Access is replaced with client-side deduplication

■ Remote Agent for Direct Access is replaced with Remote Agent
deduplication
■ Server-side deduplication is replaced with media server
deduplication
■ Source-side deduplication is replaced with client-side
deduplication
■ Target-side deduplication is replaced with appliance
deduplication

Active Directory Supports Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Active Directory Domain
Recovery Agent Services objects.

Agent for Lotus Supports Lotus Domino version 8.5, including support for the
Domino Server Domino Attachment and Object Service (DAOS).
 Introducing Backup Exec 81
What’s new in Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-3 New features and capabilities in Backup Exec agents and options
(continued)

Agent or option New feature

Symantec Online Provides more efficient online backups. Symantec Online Storage
Storage for Backup for Backup Exec now compares your backup selections to any
Exec existing backup data from previous duplicate backup jobs. Any
data that is unchanged from previous duplicate backup jobs is
skipped. If only a portion of a file has changed, only that portion
is backed up. This enhancement can reduce the amount of time
and bandwidth that is required to run recurring backup jobs.

NDMP Option Enables you to add new NDMP providers from multiple companies.

Agent for Microsoft Includes the following:

SharePoint
■ Support for SharePoint 2010.
■ Support for SharePoint Foundation 2010.
■ Support for Backup Exec Granular Recovery Technology (GRT)
to the same extent as SharePoint Server 2007.
■ Support for Backup Exec Granular Recovery Technology (GRT)
of new SharePoint 2010 content types, including external lists
and document sets.
Also, includes the following new features:

■ Redirection of SharePoint databases to alternate SQL instances.

■ Ability to overwrite existing databases.
■ Dynamic inclusion of components such as Web applications
and service applications that are added to existing SharePoint
farms.

Desktop and Laptop Supports Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 on the following
Option components:

■ DLO Administration Console

■ DLO Administration service
■ Maintenance service
Supports Microsoft Windows 7 on the following components:

■ Desktop Agent
■ Change Log Service
■ DLO Administration Console (to support remote
administration)
82 Introducing Backup Exec
Backup Exec agents and options

Backup Exec agents and options

Several Backup Exec options are available to provide protection for your network.
Options are categorized as follows:
■ Media server components
See “About Backup Exec media server components” on page 82.
■ Server protection agents
See “About Backup Exec server protection agents” on page 83.
■ Application protection agents
See “About Backup Exec application protection agents” on page 84.
■ Virtual machine agents
See “About Backup Exec's virtual machine agents” on page 87.
■ Client protection agents
See “About Backup Exec client protection agents” on page 88.
■ Media server storage options
See “About Backup Exec media server storage options” on page 89.

About Backup Exec media server components

The following media server components allow greater control of backups and
disaster recovery:

Table 1-4 Backup Exec media server components

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Advanced Open File Ensures that all files on your network are
Option protected even if they are being used.
Whether used alone or in combination with
specific database agents, this option handles
open files at the volume level and is
seamlessly integrated with Backup Exec. You
do not need to know which files are open
ahead of time; just set a scheduled backup
to use this option.

See “About the Advanced Open File Option”

on page 953.
 Introducing Backup Exec 83
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-4 Backup Exec media server components (continued)

Item Description

Intelligent Disaster Recovery (IDR) Provides a recovery solution for both local
and remote Windows computers. This option
eliminates the need to manually re-install
the entire operating system after a computer
failure. IDR lets you use diskettes,
CD-R/CD-RW, or bootable tape to restore
from your last complete backup set to get
back online fast.

See “About the the Intelligent Disaster

Recovery Configuration Wizard” on page 1834.

About Backup Exec server protection agents

The following options provide protection for remote Microsoft Windows servers,
Novell NetWare servers, Linux and UNIX servers, and Macintosh systems on the
network:

Table 1-5 Backup Exec server protection agents

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Provides backup and restore of remote
Windows Windows computers.

See “About the Remote Agent for Windows

Systems” on page 1969.

Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Lets Windows Server network
Linux or UNIX Servers administrators perform backup and restore
operations on Linux and UNIX servers that
are connected to the network. This agent
must be running on these servers before
backup or restore operations can be
performed.

See “Backing up Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh

computers” on page 1916.
84 Introducing Backup Exec
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-5 Backup Exec server protection agents (continued)

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Remote Media Agent Lets you back up data to and restore data
for Linux Servers from the following devices:

■ Storage devices that are directly attached

to a Linux server.
■ A folder on a hard disk on the Linux
server.

See “About the Remote Media Agent for

Linux Servers” on page 1990.

Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Enables Windows Server network
Macintosh Systems administrators to perform backup and
restore operations on Macintosh systems
that are connected to the network.

See “Backing up Macintosh systems”

on page 1942.

Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Provides backup and restore of remote
NetWare Systems NetWare resources.

See “About backing up NetWare servers”

on page 1958.

About Backup Exec application protection agents

The following application protection agents provide non-disruptive protection
for corporate email messaging, knowledge base, and mission-critical database
applications:
 Introducing Backup Exec 85
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-6 Backup Exec application protection agents

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Active Directory Lets you restore the objects and attributes
Recovery Agent from the following Microsoft applications
without having to perform an authoritative
or non-authoritative full restore:

■ Active Directory
■ Active Directory Application Mode
■ Active Directory Lightweight Directory
Services

See “How the Active Directory Recovery

Agent works” on page 898.

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft Provides backups for your Exchange Server
Exchange Server data. You can restore individual mailboxes,
mail messages, and public folders from the
Information Store backups that have Backup
Exec’s Granular Recovery Technology (GRT)
option enabled. Use Backup Exec Continuous
Protection Server (CPS) to provide complete
recovery to any point in time of the
Information Store, including the latest
complete transaction log.

See “About the Backup Exec Exchange

Agent” on page 1114.

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft Protects active databases and verifies all of
SQL Server your SQL data automatically. You can
customize your data protection needs down
to the filegroup level. For fast point-in-time
backups, you can use this option to run
transaction log backups with truncation.
Redirected restores allow you to easily
restore SQL data to other SQL servers on the
network.

See “About backup strategies for SQL”

on page 1278.
86 Introducing Backup Exec
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-6 Backup Exec application protection agents (continued)

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft Protects all of the files and attributes
SharePoint associated with a SharePoint installation.
You can use the GRT option to restore
individual workspaces and documents from
a backup of the entire farm. You can restore
data to the original Information Store or
redirect it to another Information Store
without affecting other workspaces.

See “About using the SharePoint Agent with

SharePoint Portal Server 2003 and Windows
SharePoint Services 2.0” on page 1255.

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Oracle® on Provides the ability to initiate backup and
Windows and Linux Servers restore operations from Backup Exec or from
the RMAN console as a Database
Administrator (DBA). Provides data
protection of both individual table spaces as
well as complete Oracle databases. You can
also include archived redo files and control
files without taking them offline.

See “About the Backup Exec Oracle Agent”

on page 1335.

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Lotus Provides seamless online backup protection
Domino Server for Lotus Domino servers. The Lotus Agent
uses Lotus Domino APIs to support
transactional logging, which protects the
entire Lotus Domino server.

See “About the Agent for Lotus Domino

Server” on page 1084.

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for Enterprise Provides a disaster recovery solution for
Vault Enterprise Vault archived data. Recovery of
the archived data is not dependent on the
archive source, such as Exchange Server or
a specific file system.
 Introducing Backup Exec 87
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-6 Backup Exec application protection agents (continued)

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for DB2 on Allows backup and restore on Microsoft
Windows Servers Windows servers. Backup and restore jobs
can be started from the Backup Exec
Administration Console or from a DB2
command line processor.

See “About the Backup Exec DB2 Agent”

on page 973.

Symantec Backup Exec Agent for SAP Provides superior data protection by
Applications allowing backups of critical data while the
application is still online and in use. The SAP
Agent, certified by SAP, is a reliable solution
that provides both local and remote
protection of the latest versions of SAP™
databases using the SAP (BC-BRI BACKINT)
interface while enabling you to efficiently
manage your data.

See “About backing up and restoring with

the SAP Agent” on page 1391.

About Backup Exec's virtual machine agents

The following agents allow for protection and recovery of virtual machines:

Table 1-7 Backup Exec virtual machine agents

Agent Description

Symantec Backup Exec Lets you back up and restore the online virtual machines that use
Agent for VMware VMware ESX Server or vCenter Server (formerly VirtualCenter).
Virtual Infrastructure You can restore a virtual machine to its original location, or
redirect it to another virtual server.

See “About the Agent for VMware” on page 1406.

88 Introducing Backup Exec
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-7 Backup Exec virtual machine agents (continued)

Agent Description

Symantec Backup Exec Lets you do the following:

Agent for Microsoft
■ Back up and restore the configuration settings for the virtual
Hyper-V
server host, which is the physical computer that runs the
virtual server software.
■ Back up and restore all virtual machines, which are the virtual
computers that reside on the virtual server host.
■ Back up and restore selected online and offline virtual
machines.
■ Redirect restores of the virtual machines to a different virtual
server host or virtual machine.

See “About the Agent for Microsoft Hyper-V” on page 1189.

About Backup Exec client protection agents

The following options provide protection for remote Microsoft Windows servers
and Macintosh systems on the network, as well as automated protection of desktop
and laptop systems.

Table 1-8 Backup Exec client protection agents

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Lets you protect all business data. It provides
Option continuous backup protection whether users
are in the office or on the road. Users can
synchronize files between their desktop and
laptop.

Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Provides backup and restore of remote
Windows Systems Windows systems.

See “About the Remote Agent for Windows

Systems” on page 1969.

Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Enables Windows Server network
Macintosh Systems administrators to perform backup and
restore operations on Macintosh systems
that are connected to the network.

See “Backing up Macintosh systems”

on page 1942.
 Introducing Backup Exec 89
Backup Exec agents and options

About Backup Exec media server storage options

The following options let you extend Backup Exec’s capabilities to use larger or
more efficient media storage devices or share storage resources over a SAN.

Table 1-9 Backup Exec media server storage options

Item Description

Deduplication Option Provides the following features to support a

data reduction strategy:

■ Reduces the amount of disk storage that

is required for backups by storing only
unique data.
■ Reduces backup network usage by
sending only unique data across the
network.

See “About the Deduplication Option”

on page 1588.

Microsoft Exchange Mailbox Archiving Lets you archive Microsoft Exchange Server
Option emails that have been backed up. After data
is archived, it is deleted from its source
location, which reduces the amount of data
on the Exchange Server.

The Archiving Option uses Enterprise Vault

technology to move archive data to
disk-based vault stores. Only data that is
already backed up is archived so that there
is little affect on the Exchange server. End
users can retrieve current and previous
version of files by browsing a web interface
called Backup Exec Retrieve.

See “About the Archiving Option”

on page 1434.
90 Introducing Backup Exec
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-9 Backup Exec media server storage options (continued)

Item Description

File System Archiving Option Lets you archive Windows NTFS data that
has been backed up. After data is archived,
it is deleted from its source location, which
reduces the amount of data on the file server.

The Archiving Option uses Enterprise Vault

technology to move archive data to
disk-based vault stores. Only data that is
already backed up is archived so that there
is little affect on the file system server. End
users can retrieve current and previous
versions of files by browsing a web interface
called Backup Exec Retrieve.

See “About the Archiving Option”

on page 1434.

Symantec Backup Exec NDMP Option Enables Backup Exec to use the Network
Data Management Protocol (NDMP) to
initialize and control backups and restores
on supported devices.

See “About installing the NDMP Option”

on page 1873.

Symantec Backup Exec Library Expansion Enables support for each additional drive in
Option a robotic library. When you install Backup
Exec, support for the first drive in every
robotic library is included.

See “About the Library Expansion Option ”

on page 463.

Symantec Backup Exec Virtual Tape Library Enables support for all additional drives
Unlimited Drive Option after the first drive in each virtual tape
library. When you install Backup Exec,
support for every single-drive virtual tape
library is included.

See “About the Virtual Tape Library

Unlimited Drive Option ” on page 462.
 Introducing Backup Exec 91
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-9 Backup Exec media server storage options (continued)

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Central Admin Server Maximizes your Backup Exec investment by
Option providing centralized administration and
load balanced job processing functionality
for existing or newly configured media
servers.

See “How CASO works” on page 1524.

Symantec Backup Exec SAN Shared Storage Lets Backup Exec operate in a Storage Area
Option Network (SAN), providing a high
performance LAN-free backup solution. SAN
Shared Storage Option lets multiple
distributed media servers share common,
centralized storage devices connected over
a SAN. This configuration provides greater
efficiency and fault tolerance. In addition to
increasing performance and backup speeds
in the SAN environment, the SAN Shared
Storage Option load balances backup activity
across multiple Backup Exec media servers
and centralizes management tasks while
lowering the total cost of hardware
ownership.

See “About installing the SAN Shared

Storage Option” on page 2018.
92 Introducing Backup Exec
Backup Exec agents and options

Table 1-9 Backup Exec media server storage options (continued)

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Advanced Disk-based Provides the following features:

Backup Option (ADBO)
■ Synthetic backup assembles, or
synthesizes, data from one previous full
or incremental backup and subsequent
incremental backups. This feature
eliminates the need to run full backups.
The synthesis is performed on the Backup
Exec media server without accessing the
remote computer. The overall backup
window and the network bandwidth
requirements are reduced.
■ True image restore enables Backup Exec
to restore the contents of directories to
what they were at the time of a full
backup or incremental backup.
You choose restore selections from a view
of the directories as they existed at the
time of the backup. Files that were
deleted before then are not restored. Only
the correct versions of files are restored
from the appropriate full or incremental
backups. Previous versions are not
restored and then overwritten.
■ Offhost backup moves the backup
operation away from the remote
computer to a Backup Exec media server
in a fiber-connected SAN environment.
When the backup is moved to the media
server, the remote computer is free for
other operations. Offhost backup for
Exchange Server backups that have the
Granular Recovery Technology (GRT)
option enabled are also supported.

See “What’s new in Backup Exec agents and

options” on page 77.

See “About the synthetic backup feature”

on page 915.

See “About true image restore” on page 928.

See “About offhost backup” on page 935.

 Introducing Backup Exec 93
About the Administration Console

Table 1-9 Backup Exec media server storage options (continued)

Item Description

Symantec Backup Exec Storage Provisioning Lets you configure, manage, and monitor a
Option storage array that is attached to the media
server. A wizard guides you through the
configuration of the storage array. The
wizard creates the virtual disks that Backup
Exec uses as job destination devices on the
storage array. The Storage Provisioning
Option monitors disk usage trends to send
alerts when low disk space occurs on the
storage arrays. Disk usage trends also
provide information about whether the
current disk space is sufficient, and when
you should add disk space.

See “About the Storage Provisioning Option”

on page 2042.

About the Administration Console

From the Administration Console, you can access the Backup Exec features.
94 Introducing Backup Exec
About the Administration Console

Figure 1-2 Administration Console

Menu bar

Navigation bar

Columns

Task pane

Status bar

Selection pane Preview pane Results pane

The Administration Console screen includes the following components:

Table 1-10 Administration Console components

Item Description

Menu bar Backup Exec’s menu bar appears across the top of your screen. To
display a menu, click the menu name or use the keyboard shortcut.
You can launch Backup Exec operations by clicking options from a
menu. Some options may be unavailable until you select an item from
the console screen. For example, you cannot select Rename from the
Edit menu unless you have first selected an item to rename from either
the Devices view or the Media view.
 Introducing Backup Exec 95
About the Administration Console

Table 1-10 Administration Console components (continued)

Item Description

Navigation bar The navigation bar appears under the menu bar and enables you to
navigate to Backup Exec’s views.
Views that can be accessed through the navigation bar include the
following:

■ Home. Use this view to quickly access the Backup Exec features
that you use frequently. You can customize the Home view by
adding or deleting items.
■ Media Servers. This view displays only if you have installed the
Central Admin Server Option (CASO). Use this view to monitor and
manage media servers in a CASO-enabled Backup Exec
environment.
■ Job Setup. Use this view to perform tasks for new backup, restore,
and media rotation jobs, as well as to launch some utility jobs.
■ Job Monitor. Use this view to monitor jobs and job history. Through
this view, you can also access the Outlook-like job calendar.
■ Alerts. Use this to view and respond to alerts, view alert history,
apply alert filters, and set up notification recipients to receive
e-mail or pager communications when alerts occur.
■ Reports. Use this to view, print, save, and schedule reports about
your media server, its operations, and its device and media usage.
Also, you can use this to create a custom report. You can view a
report in Backup Exec in a PDF or HTML format. You can also save
and print reports in PDF, XML, HTML, Microsoft Excel (XLS), and
Comma Separated Value (CSV) formats.
■ Devices. Use this view to configure devices and to perform device
operations and access device properties pages.
■ Media. Use this view to manage your media, create media sets,
and create media locations.
■ Backup. Click Backup or click the arrow next to Backup to create
a backup job.
■ Restore. Click Restore or click the arrow next to Restore to create
a restore job.

Share Your Ideas Share Your Ideas is a link that you can use to suggest new ideas for
Symantec Backup Exec. After you have submitted your suggestions,
other community members can vote or comment on the idea. The
ideas that get the most votes move to the top of the list. Symantec
product managers review these ideas for possible features in future
releases.
96 Introducing Backup Exec
About the Administration Console

Table 1-10 Administration Console components (continued)

Item Description

Search Knowledge Type your question or keywords in the Search Knowledge Base search
Base box, and then click the magnifying glass icon. A browser window
displays the results of the knowledge base search. You must have an
active Internet connection to access the Symantec Knowledge Base.

Task pane The task pane displays on the left side of the Administration Console
by default, but can be hidden by selecting View, and then selecting
Task Pane. Through the task pane, you can initiate actions such as
creating a new backup job or responding to an alert. The contents of
the task pane are dynamic, changing according to the view selected
from the navigation bar. Some options may be unavailable until an
item is selected from the console screen or a prerequisite task is
performed. For example, you cannot select Rename from the Devices
task pane unless you have first selected an item that can be renamed,
such as a user-created drive pool.

Selection pane The Selection pane is where you select items to work with, such as
files to back up or restore.

Results pane The Results pane is the large pane on the right side of the screen that
usually contains a list or tree view of items that correspond to items
that are selected in the Selection pane. For example, if you select a
Backup-to-Disk folder in the Selection pane, the Backup-to-Disk files
that are contained in the folder display in the Results pane. This pane
can be divided to display a preview pane.

Preview pane The preview pane displays on the bottom right of the Administration
Console. It displays information about the item selected in the list or
tree view. This pane can be hidden by selecting View, and then
selecting Preview Pane.

Status bar The status bar appears on the bottom of the Administration Console
and provides information about the media server, jobs running or
scheduled to run on the server, alerts, and services running.

Columns You can change the location of columns by dragging and dropping
them. In addition, you can right-click a column to select the columns
you would like to make visible, configure column settings, or sort the
columns. You can also change the order of the entries in a column by
clicking the column heading. For example, names of reports display
in alphabetical order by default. To display report names in reverse
alphabetical order, click the Name column heading on the Reports
view.
 Introducing Backup Exec 97
About the Home view

About the Backup Exec version

Displays the information about the version of Backup Exec that you have installed.

About the Home view

The Home view on the Backup Exec Administration Console is a central place
from which you can quickly access the Backup Exec features you use frequently.
You can customize the Home view by adding or deleting items. Home view items
contain Backup Exec data and links to features. You can hide or display Help and
Technical Support, Summary, and Detail items.
See “Configuring the Home view” on page 97.
See “Restoring the Home view's default configuration” on page 98.
See “Editing items on the Home view” on page 98.
See “Help and Technical Support items” on page 98.
See “Summary items” on page 100.
See “Detail items” on page 101.

Configuring the Home view

You can customize the Home view by adding or deleting items. Home view items
contain Backup Exec data and links to features. You can select to hide or display
items to create shortcuts for the Backup Exec features that you use frequently.
See “About the Home view” on page 97.
You can quickly restore the Home view to its default configuration at any time.
See “Restoring the Home view's default configuration” on page 98.
To configure the Home view
1 On the navigation bar, click Home.
2 In the task pane, under Layout, select the number and type of columns that
you want to display on the Home view.
3 In the task pane, under Help and Technical Support Items, Summary Items,
and Detail Items, select the items that you want to display on the Home view.
4 Drag the items to the column and position in which you want them to display
to further customize the Home view.
98 Introducing Backup Exec
About the Home view

Restoring the Home view's default configuration

You can customize the Home view by adding or deleting items to create shortcuts
for the Backup Exec features that you use frequently.
See “Configuring the Home view” on page 97.
You can quickly restore the Home view to its default configuration at any time.
To restore the Home view's default configuration
1 On the navigation bar, click Home.
2 In the task pane, under Layout, select Default Layout and Content.

Editing items on the Home view

You can edit Detail items to control what information displays on them. Home
view items that are editable have a pencil icon in their title bar.
See “About the Home view” on page 97.
See “Detail items” on page 101.
To edit items on the Home view
1 On the navigation bar, click Home.
2 Click the pencil icon to edit the item.
3 Complete the appropriate options.
See “Column Settings options” on page 222.
4 Click OK.

Help and Technical Support items

You can customize the Backup Exec Home view by selecting the items that display.
See “About the Home view” on page 97.
The Help and Technical Support items help you configure Backup Exec and resolve
usage issues.
 Introducing Backup Exec 99
About the Home view

Table 1-11 Help and Technical Support items

Item Description

Getting Started Provides a series of steps that you can follow

to configure logon accounts, devices, media
sets, and the Intelligent Disaster Recovery
Option. The steps to configure the Intelligent
Disaster Recovery Option display only if you
have a license for it.

Technical Support Provides the following support options to

help you understand product features and
functionality or troubleshoot issues:

■ Backup Exec Tech Center

■ Backup Exec Technical Support
■ Use MySupport to manage new or
existing support cases
■ Symantec Remote Assistance
■ Best Practices
■ Register for software alerts
■ Get software patches and updates

Documentation Provides the following documentation

options to help you understand product
features and functionality or troubleshoot
issues:
■ View Readme
■ View Administrator's Guide (PDF)
■ View Administrator's Guide Addendum
(PDF)

Installation Tasks Lets you access the Installation Wizard,

which you can use to install additional
agents and options to other servers.

Job Creation Tasks Lets you create backup jobs, policies, and
restore jobs by using wizards.
100 Introducing Backup Exec
About the Home view

Table 1-11 Help and Technical Support items (continued)

Item Description

Advanced Configuration Tasks Lets you perform the following advanced

configuration tasks:

■ Set job defaults and preferences

■ Configure alerts and notifications
■ IDR Preparation Wizard (if installed)
■ Configure the Symantec Volume
Snapshot Provider

Device and Media Tasks Lets you perform the following device and
media tasks:

■ Configure media sets

■ Configure devices
■ Configure device pools

Symantec RSS Reader Lets you view and add Backup Exec and
Symantec RSS feeds.

Licensing and Maintenance Contract Lets you enter serial numbers so that Backup
Information Exec can search for expiration dates for your
maintenance contracts. After you enter the
serial numbers, you can set alerts to remind
you to renew each contract before the
maintenance contract expires.

Entering the serial numbers also ensures

your access to the latest upgrades and to
technical support for your products.

Summary items
You can customize the Backup Exec Home view by selecting the items that display.
See “About the Home view” on page 97.
The Summary items provide concise overviews on the status of your alerts, jobs,
devices, and media.

Table 1-12 Summary items

Item Description

Active Alert Summary Provides a summary view of any active

alerts.
 Introducing Backup Exec 101
About the Home view

Table 1-12 Summary items (continued)

Item Description

Job History Summary Provides a summary view of job history. You

can customize the amount of time for which
you display information about completed
jobs. The job information includes the
number of jobs completed, the amount of
data that was backed up, and the number of
media that was used. It also details the job
statuses.

Current Job Summary Provides a summary view of current jobs.

The summary displays the number of active,
scheduled, and on-hold jobs.

Device Summary Provides a summary view of device

information. The device information
includes the number of devices and their
current statuses.

Media Summary Provides a summary view of media

information. The media information displays
the number of overwritable and appendable
media that are available. You can also view
or change the default media overwrite
protection level.

Detail items
You can customize the Backup Exec Home view by selecting the items that display.
See “About the Home view” on page 97.
Additionally, you can edit the information that displays on Detail items.
See “Editing items on the Home view” on page 98.
The Detail items provide itemized overviews on the status of your alerts and jobs.
102 Introducing Backup Exec
About the Home view

Table 1-13 Detail items

Item Description

Active Alerts Lets you view all active alerts.

You can display any or all of the following
types of alerts:

■ Attention Required
■ Error
■ Warning
■ Information

Job History Lets you view job history for the specified
period of time. You can select the window of
time for which you want to view completed
jobs.

Current Jobs Lets you view all current jobs.

You can choose to display any or all of the
following types of current jobs:

■ Active Jobs
■ Scheduled Jobs
■ Jobs On Hold
 Chapter 2
Installing Backup Exec
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About installing Backup Exec

■ Before you install

■ System requirements

■ About the differences between a typical installation and a custom installation

■ Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec

■ Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec

■ Installing additional Backup Exec options to the local media server

■ Special considerations for installing Backup Exec to remote computers

■ Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers

■ About installing Backup Exec options to remote computers

■ Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to remote
computers

■ Push-installing the Desktop Agent and DLO Maintenance Service from the
media server to remote computers

■ About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

■ Installing the Remote Administrator

■ Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

■ Installing a trial version of Backup Exec agents and options

■ About the installation log

104 Installing Backup Exec
About installing Backup Exec

■ Repairing Backup Exec

■ Starting and stopping Backup Exec services

■ Uninstalling Backup Exec

■ Uninstalling Backup Exec options from the local media server

■ About updating Backup Exec with LiveUpdate

■ Viewing license information

■ Adding licenses

■ Finding installed licenses in your environment

■ About Backup Exec maintenance contract information

■ About upgrading from previous versions of Backup Exec

■ Post-installation tasks

About installing Backup Exec

Several methods are available for installing Backup Exec.
You can do the following:
■ Use the installation wizard, which guides you through the installation process.
■ Use the command line, which is called silent mode installation. The silent
mode installation uses the Setup.exe program on the Backup Exec installation
media.
You can install Backup Exec and its options on a local computer, a remote
computer, or both. Additionally, you can install the Remote Administrator , which
lets you administrate the media server from a remote Windows server or
workstation.
Backup Exec may install the additional products:
■ Symantec LiveUpdate
■ Microsoft XML Core Services (MSXML) 6.0
■ Microsoft Report Viewer Redistributable 2005
■ Microsoft.NET Framework 3.5 SP1
■ Microsoft Windows Imaging Component
■ Microsoft SQL Express 2005 SP3
 Installing Backup Exec 105
Before you install

See “Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec” on page 121.

See “Installing additional Backup Exec options to the local media server”
on page 125.
See “Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers” on page 128.
See “Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to remote
computers” on page 136.
See “Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)” on page 155.

Before you install

Before you install Backup Exec, you should do the following:
■ Run the Backup Exec Environment Check on the computer on which you want
to install Backup Exec. The Environment Check analyzes the computer to make
sure that the installation process can complete. If Backup Exec finds
configuration issues that can be fixed during the installation, or that may
prevent the installation, warnings appear. Although the Environment Check
runs automatically during installation, you may want to run it manually before
you install Backup Exec or before you back up data with Backup Exec.
See “Checking your environment before installing” on page 107.
■ Install the storage device hardware (controller, drives, robotic libraries) on
the media server. Refer to the documentation that is included with your storage
device hardware for installation instructions. Use the appropriate Windows
hardware setup functions to configure your controller and storage devices.
Refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation for more information.
■ Check your Windows security settings to make sure that they work properly
with the Backup Exec service account.
See “About the Backup Exec service account” on page 108.
■ If the drive on which you want to install Backup Exec is encrypted or
compressed, and you would like to use a default SQL Express database, verify
that an unencrypted and uncompressed drive is available for SQL Express
installation.
■ Check the computer name of the computer on which you want to install Backup
Exec. It should only use standard ANSI characters. You may receive errors if
you install Backup Exec on a computer with a name that uses non-standard
characters.
■ If you want to install Backup Exec to a non-English version of Windows,
download the SQL Express SP3 setup file from the Microsoft Web site before
you install Backup Exec if all of the following are true:
106 Installing Backup Exec
Before you install

■ You want to use a local Backup Exec SQL Express instance.

■ You have non-English SQL Server instances on the computer on which you
want to install Backup Exec.
■ Exit all other programs.

About the Environment Check

The Symantec Backup Exec Environment Check is a utility that runs on a computer
automatically during installation and that reports the following:
■ If the computer meets the minimum requirements for installation, such as the
operating system, disk and physical memory, sufficient logon account
privileges.
See “System requirements” on page 116.
■ If third-party software that uses Backup Exec ports is configured correctly.
■ If required components are installed, and if they are versions that are
compatible with Backup Exec.
■ If previous versions of Backup Exec and Backup Exec options are installed.
■ If storage device hardware and associated drivers are properly installed and
recognized by the Windows operating system.
■ If the computer meets the minimum requirements for installation of the
Desktop and Laptop Option.
One of the following results are reported for each item:

Table 2-1 Environment Check results

Result Description

Passed There are no incompatibilities to prevent the Backup Exec installation.

For hardware, this result indicates that the hardware configuration
is recognized by Backup Exec.

Warning An incompatibility with Backup Exec exists, but can be resolved during
the Backup Exec installation.

Failed An incompatibility with Backup Exec exists, and it will cause the
installation to fail. Action is required before you can successfully
install Backup Exec.

Although the Environment Check runs automatically during installation, you may
want to run it manually before installing Backup Exec or before backing up data
with Backup Exec.
 Installing Backup Exec 107
Before you install

See “Checking your environment before installing” on page 107.

Checking your environment before installing

Although the Environment Check runs automatically during installation, you may
want to run it manually before installing Backup Exec or before backing up data
with Backup Exec.
See “About the Environment Check” on page 106.
To check your environment before installing
1 From the installation media browser, click Pre-installation, and then click
Backup Exec.
2 Click Next.
3 Do any of the following:

To check the configuration of the Check Local Environment Check.

local computer

To check the configuration of a Check Remote Environment Check.

remote computer

4 Click Next.
5 If you checked Remote Environment Check in step 3, do one of the following,
and then click Next.:

To select the name of a computer ■ Click Add Server From List.

from a list ■ Select the computer from the list, and then click
Next.

To add the name of a computer ■ Click Add Server Manually.

manually ■ In the Domain field, type the name of the
domain.
■ In the Computer Name field, type the name of
the computer.
■ Click OK.
■ Type the user name and password for this
computer.
■ Click OK.
108 Installing Backup Exec
Before you install

To remove the name of a ■ Select the computer from the list.

computer from the list of ■ Click Remove.
computers on which the
Environment Check runs

6 If you want to save the results of the Environment Check, check Save Results
To.
To change the location where the Environment Check results are saved, click
Change Path to browse to a new location.
7 Click Finish.

About the Backup Exec service account

All Backup Exec services on the media server run in the context of a user account
that is configured for the Backup Exec system services. You can create this account
during the Backup Exec installation, or you can use an existing user account. To
create a service account for Backup Exec during installation, enter the name and
password of an Administrator account for the Backup Exec services to use.

Note: The Backup Exec service account and the Backup Exec System Logon Account
are set to the same user name when Backup Exec is installed. If you need to change
the user name for the service account is no longer used, then you should also
change the Backup Exec System Logon Account to use new credentials.

See “Changing service account information” on page 109.

If this computer is in a domain, enter a Domain Administrators account, or an
equivalent account that is part of the Domain Admins group. In the Domain list,
select or enter the Domain name.
If this computer is in a workgroup, enter an Administrators account, or an
equivalent account that is part of the Administrators group on the computer. In
the Domain list, select or enter the computer name.
The account that you designate for Backup Exec services, whether it is a new
account or an existing user account, is assigned the following rights:
■ Authenticate as any user and gain access to resources under any user identity.
■ Create a token object, which can then be used to access any local resources.
■ Log on as a service.
■ Administrative rights (provides complete and unrestricted rights to the
computer).
 Installing Backup Exec 109
Before you install

■ Backup operator rights (provides rights to restore files and directories).

■ Manage auditing and security log.
See “Required user rights for backup jobs” on page 337.
Due to security implementations in Microsoft Small Business Server, the service
account must be Administrator.
You cannot install Backup Exec with an account that has a blank password on
Windows Server 2003/2008 or XP computers unless Windows is configured to
allow it. If you try to do so, the following error message appears when Backup
Exec services are created:
The given password is not correct for account [server]\[username].
You can, however, configure Windows to allow for blank passwords. For more
information, see your Windows documentation.

Changing service account information

On the media server, all Backup Exec services run in the context of a user account
that is configured for the Backup Exec system services.

Note: The Backup Exec service account and the Backup Exec System Logon Account
are set to the same user name when Backup Exec is installed. If you need to change
the user name for the service account is no longer used, then you should also
change the Backup Exec System Logon Account to use new credentials.

See “About the Backup Exec service account” on page 108.

To change service account information
1 On the Toolsmenu, click Backup Exec Services.
2 Click Services credentials.
3 Click Change service account information.
4 Enter the user name, domain, and password for the new service account.
See “Service Account Information options” on page 109.

Service Account Information options

On the media server, all Backup Exec services run in the context of a user account
that is configured for the Backup Exec system services.
See “Changing service account information” on page 109.
110 Installing Backup Exec
Before you install

Table 2-2 Service Account Information options

Item Description

Change service account information Enables you to change the user name,
domain, and password for the service
account.

User name Indicates the user name for the service

account.

Domain name Indicates the name of the domain for the

service account.

New password Indicates the password for the service

account.

Confirm password Confirms the password that you typed in the

New password field.

Change startup options Lets you change the startup options for the
service account.

Automatic Indicates that the service account starts

automatically at system startup.

Manual Indicates that the service account does not

start automatically at system startup. You
must start it manually.

Disabled Indicates that the service account is disabled

at system startup.

Grant Backup Exec system service rights Lets the service account have the system
to the service account service rights.

About changing Windows security

You can set up Windows security with the Backup Exec service account to protect
your data.
Depending on how the Windows network is configured, change security properties
for the following scenarios:
■ Servers in one domain.
■ Servers and selected workstations in one domain.
■ Servers in more than one domain.
■ Servers and workstations in more than one domain.
 Installing Backup Exec 111
Before you install

You can change Windows security to give the Backup Exec service account
administrative rights in the appropriate domains and workstations. You must
grant the Backup Exec service account administrative rights to give Backup Exec
access to the administrative shares (for example, C$) and the ability to protect
the Windows registry.
Use the Active Directory Users and Computers tool and Domain and Trusts tool
in the Active Directory administrative tools group to change Windows security
properties.
See “Changing Windows security to back up servers (only) in one domain”
on page 111.
See “Changing Windows security to back up servers and selected workstations in
one domain” on page 111.
See “Changing Windows security to back up servers in more than one domain”
on page 112.
See “Changing Windows security to back up servers and workstations in more
than one domain” on page 113.

Changing Windows security to back up servers (only) in one domain

You can change Windows security to give the Backup Exec service account
administrative rights in the appropriate domains and workstations. You must
grant the Backup Exec service account administrative rights to give Backup Exec
access to the administrative shares (for example, C$) and the ability to protect
the Windows registry.
To change Windows security to back up servers (only) in one domain
◆ When prompted for a user name, add the name of an existing or new service
account (for example, Administrator) as a member of the local Administrators
group for the Domain. It is highly recommended that you also enter a
password.
See “About changing Windows security” on page 110.

Changing Windows security to back up servers and selected

workstations in one domain
You can change Windows security to give the Backup Exec service account
administrative rights in the appropriate domains and workstations. You must
grant the Backup Exec service account administrative rights to give Backup Exec
access to the administrative shares (for example, C$) and the ability to protect
the Windows registry.
112 Installing Backup Exec
Before you install

Table 2-3 How to change Windows security to back up servers and selected
workstations in one domain

Step Description

Step 1 Add the name of an existing or new service

account (for example, Administrator) as a
member of the Global Domain Admins group.

Step 2 Ensure that on each workstation in the

domain you want to back up, the Global
Domain Admins group is a member of the
workstation’s local Administrators group.

See “About changing Windows security” on page 110.

Changing Windows security to back up servers in more than one domain

You can change Windows security to give the Backup Exec service account
administrative rights in the appropriate domains and workstations. You must
grant the Backup Exec service account administrative rights to give Backup Exec
access to the administrative shares (for example, C$) and the ability to protect
the Windows registry.

Table 2-4 How to change Windows security to back up servers in more than
one domain

Step Description

Step 1 Establish a One Way Trust Relationship

between the Host Domain (the domain in
which the media server resides) and the
Target Domains (the domains that are to be
backed up).
Do the following in the order listed:

■ In the Host Domain, permit the Target

Domains to trust the Host Domain.
■ In each Target Domain, trust the Host
Domain.

Step 2 In each Target Domain, add the Host

Domain’s name of an existing or new service
account (for example, Administrator) in the
local Administrators group.

See “About changing Windows security” on page 110.

 Installing Backup Exec 113
Before you install

Changing Windows security to back up servers and workstations in

more than one domain
You can change Windows security to give the Backup Exec service account
administrative rights in the appropriate domains and workstations. You must
grant the Backup Exec service account administrative rights to give Backup Exec
access to the administrative shares (for example, C$) and the ability to protect
the Windows registry.

Table 2-5 How to change Windows security to back up servers and

workstations in more than one domain

Step Description

Step 1 Establish a One Way Trust Relationship

between the Host Domain (the domain in
which the media server resides) and the
Target Domains (the domains that are to be
backed up).
Do the following in the order listed:

■ In the Host Domain, permit the Target

Domains to trust the Host Domain.
■ In each Target Domain, trust the Host
Domain.

Step 2 In each Target Domain, add the Host

Domain’s name of an existing or new service
account (for example, Administrator) in the
local Administrators group.

Step 3 On each workstation to back up, add the Host

Domain’s name of an existing or new service
account (for example, Administrator) in the
Local Administrators group.

See “About changing Windows security” on page 110.

About Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition components installed

with Backup Exec
The Backup Exec installation program installs Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express
Edition components that are required to run Backup Exec.
Backup Exec prompts you to do one of the following:
114 Installing Backup Exec
Before you install

■ Install the required Microsoft SQL Express components with Backup Exec and
create a default Backup Exec instance.
■ Select a Microsoft SQL Server 2005 (SP3) or SQL Server 2008 instance that
already exists on the network on which you want to run Backup Exec.
During the installation process and upgrade process, Backup Exec stops and starts
the SQL service several times. Other user-created databases that use the SQL
Server instance are unavailable during the process. To avoid such conflicts, you
should install Backup Exec into its own SQL instance.
If you choose to install Backup Exec into an existing SQL 2005 instance, make
sure that SQL 2005 Service Pack 3 or later is installed before you continue with
the installation.

Caution: Backup Exec may not function properly if you install it into an existing
SQL instance that uses case-sensitive collation. Symantec recommends that you
avoid installing Backup Exec to a SQL instance that uses case-sensitive collation.

When Backup Exec is installed into an existing instance, the automated master
database restore feature is not available. To recover the Master database, you
must replace it with the Master database copy that Backup Exec automatically
creates and updates when the Master database is backed up.
You cannot install multiple Backup Exec databases on the same SQL Server
instance.

Note: If you are installing a managed media server, it is recommended that you
select a local Microsoft SQL Server 2005 (SP3) instance or later on which to install
the Backup Exec database for this managed media server. Do not select the same
SQL Server instance that is used by the central administration server.

See “System requirements” on page 116.

About Backup Exec’s standard features

When you enter a Backup Exec license key, you can select any of the following
additional features that are available for installation.
 Installing Backup Exec 115
Before you install

Table 2-6 Backup Exec’s standard features

Feature Description

Tape Device Drivers Installs the Symantec tape device drivers for all supported
tape devices that are attached to the server. If there are
no tape devices attached to your media server, uncheck
this option.

Online Documentation Installs the Backup Exec Administrator’s Guide in a pdf

file format.

Enable Robotic Library Enables support for tape libraries, or optical robotic
Support libraries and library storage systems. Backup Exec includes
support for one drive in every robotic library. Each
additional drive in a library requires a Library Expansion
Option license.

Copy Server Configurations Enables you to copy jobs, selection lists, and job templates
between media servers. This option is recommended for
environments that contain multiple Backup Exec media
servers. This option is required for the Central Admin
Server Option.

Managed Media Server Installs the managed media server component of the
Central Admin Server Option. You can install managed
media servers after you install a central administration
server.

Advanced Open File Option Ensures that all files on a Windows computer are backed
up even if they are open and in use. This option is free
with each license of Backup Exec, Backup Exec Remote
Agent for Windows Systems, and Backup Exec application
agents and options. To control specific snapshot settings,
install the Advanced Open File Option along with the
Advanced Disk-based Backup Option.

Intelligent Disaster Recovery Provides a recovery solution for both local and remote
Windows computers.

Virtual Tape Library Support Provides support for every single-drive Virtual Tape
Library (VTL). You must purchase the Virtual Tape Library
Unlimited Drive Option to support additional drives in
each VTL.

If you select this option, the Enable Robotic Library

Support option is selected automatically. You cannot
uncheck Enable Robotic Library Support unless you
uncheck Virtual Tape Library Support.
116 Installing Backup Exec
System requirements

All other options and agents require the purchase of additional licenses. Installing
a trial version enables many options that must be purchased separately and are
not included as part of Backup Exec.
If you have a licensed version of Backup Exec, you can use a trial version of most
options and agents for a specified period of time.
See “Installing a trial version of Backup Exec agents and options” on page 168.

System requirements
The following are the minimum system requirements to run this version of Backup
Exec:

Table 2-7 Minimum system requirements

Item Requirements

Operating system You can find a list of compatible operating systems, platforms, and
applications at the following URL:

http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-1

You cannot install a Backup Exec media server on a computer that

runs the Windows Server Core installation option of Windows Server
2008. You can only install the Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows
Systems on Server Core computers.

You cannot install SQL Express or SQL Server 2005 on a Windows

Server 2008 computer that is configured in a Read Only Domain
Controller (RODC) role. The Read Only Domain Controller role does
not let you use the local accounts which are required for SQL Express
and SQL Server 2005. When you install Backup Exec on an RODC
computer you must select a remote SQL instance for the Backup Exec
Database.

Additional You can use Backup Exec with Microsoft Windows Microsoft
application Operations Manager (MOM) 2005.
support

Internet browser Internet Explorer 6.0 or later. Service Pack 1 is required for SQL Server
2005 Express.

Processor Intel Pentium, Xeon, AMD, or compatible.

 Installing Backup Exec 117
System requirements

Table 2-7 Minimum system requirements (continued)

Item Requirements

Memory Required: 512 MB RAM

Recommended: 1 GB RAM (or more for better performance)

Note: RAM requirements may vary depending on the operations
performed, the options installed, and the specific computer
configuration.

For the Central Admin Server Option: 512 MB RAM required, 1 GB

recommended.

Virtual Memory Recommendations: 20 MB above the Windows

recommended size for total paging file size (total for all disk volumes).
Refer to your Microsoft Windows help documentation for instructions
on how to view or set the paging file size.

Installation disk 1.44 GB (Typical installation)

space
2.32 GB (Includes all options)
Note: Disk space requirements may vary depending on the operations
performed, the options installed, and the specific system configuration.
Backup Exec database and catalogs require additional space. An
additional 330 MB is required for SQL Express.

Other Hardware The following hardware is recommended:

■ Network interface card or a virtual network adapter card.

■ CD/DVD drive.
■ (Recommended) A mouse.
■ (Optional for pager notification) Modem that Microsoft Windows
supports.
■ (Optional for printer notification) Printer that Microsoft Windows
supports.

Storage Hardware You can use storage media drives, robotic libraries, removable storage
devices, and non-removable hard drives.

You can find a list of compatible devices at the following URL:

http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-2

Support is available for the first drive in each robotic library when
you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for each additional
robotic library drive, you must purchase the Backup Exec Library
Expansion Option.

See “Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec” on page 118.

118 Installing Backup Exec
About the differences between a typical installation and a custom installation

See “Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec” on page 121.

About the differences between a typical installation

and a custom installation
The Backup Exec installation program provides two methods of installation: typical
and custom. A typical installation is a simpler installation method than a custom
installation and is designed for small or uncomplicated environments. For example,
if you use a local media server and a few Backup Exec agents or options, then a
typical installation may be best for you. A custom installation is designed for large
or complex environments. You can also use the custom installation method if you
prefer to set all of your options. For example, if you use a remote media server or
use the Central Admin Server Option or the SAN Shared Storage Option, you
should perform a custom installation.
With a typical installation, Backup Exec makes the following decisions for you,
based on common installation scenarios:
■ Backup Exec is installed to a local media server.
■ SQL Express is installed with the default instance.
■ Agents and options are installed if you enter the license keys for them. If you
do not enter any license keys, a trial version of Backup Exec is installed.

Note: If you enter a license key for an agent or option that is not compatible
with the typical installation method, such as the Central Admin Server Option,
then the installation program automatically switches to the custom installation
method.

■ LiveUpdate runs automatically.

See “Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec” on page 118.
See “Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec” on page 121.

Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec

A typical installation is designed for small or uncomplicated environments. In a
typical installation, Backup Exec makes many decisions for you, based on common
installation scenarios. If you prefer to set all of your options, you should use the
custom installation option.
See “Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec” on page 121.
 Installing Backup Exec 119
Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec

See “About the differences between a typical installation and a custom installation”
on page 118.

Note: Before you install, make sure that your license keys for Backup Exec and
any agents or options are available. If you do not have license keys, go to the
following URL to activate the product:
https://licensing.symantec.com
License keys are required to install Backup Exec and its agents and options.
However, you can install a trial version of Backup Exec without a license key.

To install a typical installation of Backup Exec

1 From the installation media browser, click Install Products, and then select
Backup Exec.
If the Microsoft.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is not already installed on this
computer, Backup Exec installs it. The installation of the Microsoft.NET
Framework may take some time.
2 On the Welcome panel, read the license agreement, and then click I accept
the terms of the license agreement.
3 Click Next.
4 On the Installation Type panel, click Typical Installation, and then click
Next.
For first-time installations and upgrade installations, the Backup Exec
Environment Check runs automatically after you click Next.
5 Review the results of the Environment Check.
6 Do one of the following:
■ If the Environment Check does not reveal any issues that may prevent a
successful installation of Backup Exec, click Next.
■ If the Environment Check reveals any issues that may prevent a successful
installation of Backup Exec, click Cancel to exit the wizard. Correct the
issues before you attempt to install Backup Exec again.

7 Select one of the following methods to enter license keys:

120 Installing Backup Exec
Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec

To enter license keys manually Do the following in the order listed:

■ Type the Backup Exec license key into

the license key field.
■ Click Add.
■ Repeat for each license key for each
option or agent that you want to
install.

To import license keys from a file Do the following in the order listed:

■ Click Import from file.

■ Select the besernum.xml file.

The default location for the besernum.xml

file is %allusersprofile%\Application
Data\Symantec\Backup Exec.

To install a trial version Leave the license key field blank.

8 Click Next.
9 On the Service Account panel, provide a user name, password, and domain
for an Administrator account that the Backup Exec system services can use.
10 If you want to change the directory where Backup Exec files are installed,
click Change, and then select a new location.
11 Click Next.
12 On the Remote Computers panel, do one of the following:

To push-install the Remote Agent for Do the following in the order listed:
Windows Systems to a single remote
■ Click Add, and then select Add a
computer
Single Computer.
■ Enter the name of the remote
computer, and then enter the
credentials for the remote computer.
■ Click Next.
 Installing Backup Exec 121
Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec

To push-install the Remote Agent for Do the following in the order listed:
Windows Systems to multiple remote
■ Click Add, and then select Add
computers
Multiple Computers with the Same
Settings.
■ Enter the name of a remote computer,
and then click Add to List. Repeat this
step for each remote computer that
you want to install the Remote Agent
on.
■ Enter the credentials for the remote
computers.
■ Click Next.

To skip the installation of the Remote Go to step 13.

Agent for Windows Systems

13 Click Next.
14 Review the installation summary, and then click Install.
The installation process creates an installation log named Bkupinst.htm on the
computer where Backup Exec is installed.

Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec

A custom installation is designed for large or complex environments or for
customers who prefer to set all of their options. For example, if you use a remote
media server or use the Central Admin Server Option or the SAN SSO Option, you
should perform a custom installation. If you prefer to have Backup Exec set default
options or if you have a small, uncomplicated environment, you can use the typical
installation.
See “Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec” on page 118.

Note: If you install Backup Exec through terminal services and the installation
media is on a shared drive (network share), you must install it using a UNC path.
Installation by mapped drives is not supported in this situation.
122 Installing Backup Exec
Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec

Note: Before you install, make sure that your license keys for Backup Exec and
any agents or options are available. If you don't have license keys, go to the
following URL to activate the product:
http://licensing.symantec.com
License keys are required to install Backup Exec and its agents and options.
However, you can install a trial version of Backup Exec without a license key.

To install a custom installation of Backup Exec

1 From the installation media browser, click Install Products, and then select
Backup Exec.
If the Microsoft.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is not already installed on this
computer, Backup Exec installs it. The installation of the Microsoft.NET
Framework may take some time.
2 On the Welcome panel, read the license agreement, and then click I accept
the terms of the license agreement.
3 Click Next.
4 On the Install Type panel, click Custom Installation, and then click Next.
5 On the Menu panel, check Local Install, and then click Install Backup Exec
software and options.
6 Click Next.
For first-time installations and upgrade installations, the Backup Exec
Environment Check runs automatically after you click Next.
7 Review the results of the Environment Check.
8 Do one of the following:
■ If the Environment Check does not reveal any issues that may prevent a
successful installation of Backup Exec, click Next.
■ If the Environment Check reveals any issues that may prevent a successful
installation of Backup Exec, click Cancel to exit the wizard. Correct the
issues before you attempt to install Backup Exec again.

9 Select one of the following methods to enter license keys:

 Installing Backup Exec 123
Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec

To enter license keys manually Do the following in the order listed:

■ Type the Backup Exec license key into the

license key field.
■ Click Add.
■ Repeat for each license key for each option or
agent that you want to install.

To import license keys from a file Do the following in the order listed:

■ Click Import from file.

■ Select the besernum.xml file.

The default location for the besernum.xml file is

%allusersprofile%\Application
Data\Symantec\Backup Exec.

To install a trial version Leave the license key field blank.

10 Click Next.
The license keys that you entered are saved to the besernum.xml file, which
is located in the %allusersprofile%\Application Data\Symantec\Backup Exec
directory.
11 Select any additional options or agents that you want to install.
12 Click Next.
If you selected the File System Archiving Option or the Microsoft Exchange
Mailbox Archiving Option, the Archiving Option Environment Check runs.
The Archiving Option Environment Check verifies that the computer meets
the minimum requirements for installing and configuring Enterprise Vault.
If the computer does not meet the minimum requirements, you must uncheck
the archiving options or fix the errors before you can continue with the
installation.
13 Do one of the following:

To change the directory where Click Change to select a new directory.

the Backup Exec files are
installed

To accept the default directory Proceed to step 14.

(recommended)

Symantec recommends that you do not select a mount point as the destination
directory because if you delete the mount point, Backup Exec is uninstalled.
124 Installing Backup Exec
Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec

14 Click Next.
15 Provide a user name, password, and domain for an Administrator account
that the Backup Exec system services can use, and then click Next.
See “About the Backup Exec service account” on page 108.
16 On the Choose SQL Server panel, do one of the following to select a location
to store the Backup Exec Database .
The Choose SQL Server panel does not appear for upgrades. You cannot
change the database location during the upgrade process. If you want to
change the database location after the upgrade, use BE Utility.

To create a local Backup Exec Do the following in the order listed:

SQL Express instance
■ Click Create a local Backup Exec SQL Express
instance to store the database on.
■ To change the location of the Backup Exec SQL
Express instance, click Browse.
■ Select the location, and then click OK.

To use an existing SQL Server Do the following in the order listed:

2005 or SQL Server 2008 instance
■ Click Use an existing instance of SQL Server
2005 (SP3a or later) or SQL Server 2008 on the
network to store the database on.
■ Select the instance.

When Backup Exec is installed into an existing

instance, the automated master database restore
feature is not available. To recover the Master
database, replace it with the Master database copy
that Backup Exec automatically creates and
updates when the Master database is backed up.
Caution: During the installation process and
upgrade process, Backup Exec stops and starts the
SQL service several times. Other user-created
databases that use the SQL Server instance are
unavailable during the process. To avoid such
conflicts, you should install Backup Exec into its
own SQL instance.

17 Click Next.
Backup Exec attempts to connect to the instance.
18 If the Symantec Backup Exec Database panel appears, perform the following
steps to identify the location of the SQL Express SP3 setup file:
 Installing Backup Exec 125
Installing additional Backup Exec options to the local media server

■ Click Browse.
■ Navigate to the location where you downloaded the SQL Express SP3 setup
file.
■ Click OK.
■ Click Next.

19 If you are prompted, select how the Symantec Device Driver Installer should
install device drivers for the tape storage devices that are connected to the
server, and then click Next.
Symantec recommends that you select Use Symantec device drivers for all
tape devices.
20 If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for the additional
options that you want to install, and then click Next after each selection.
21 Read the Backup Exec installation summary, and then click Install.
The installation process takes several minutes to complete. During the process,
the progress bar may not move for several minutes.
22 When the installation is complete, you can run LiveUpdate, view the readme,
and create a shortcut to Backup Exec on the desktop.
23 Click Finish to close the installation wizard.
24 If Restart System appears, restart the computer in order for the configuration
to take effect.
The installation process creates an installation log named Bkupinst.htm on the
computer where Backup Exec is installed.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
See “Post-installation tasks” on page 184.
See “About Backup Exec’s standard features” on page 114.
See “About upgrading from previous versions of Backup Exec” on page 182.

Installing additional Backup Exec options to the local

media server
You can install agents and options when you install Backup Exec. However, if you
have already installed Backup Exec and want to install additional options, review
the documentation for those options to ensure that your system meets all minimum
requirements. The Backup Exec services may be stopped while the additional
126 Installing Backup Exec
Installing additional Backup Exec options to the local media server

options are installed. If any active jobs are running, you are prompted to stop
them, or to wait for the jobs to finish.
See “Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec” on page 121.

Note: If you install Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation
media is on a shared drive (network share) you must install using a UNC path.
Installation by mapped drives is not supported.

If you installed the trial version or the Not For Resale (NFR) edition of Backup
Exec, you can install trial versions of the additional options. If you have a licensed
version of Backup Exec, you can use a trial version of most options and agents for
a specified period of time.
See “Installing a trial version of Backup Exec agents and options” on page 168.

Note: If the Central Admin Server Option is installed, and you want to install
additional options on a managed media server, you can pause the managed media
server. When a managed media server is paused, the central administration server
does not delegate jobs to it. When the installation is complete, un-pause, or resume,
the managed media server.

See “Pausing a managed media server in CASO” on page 1582.

To install additional Backup Exec options to the local media server
1 On the Tools menu, click Install Options and License Keys on this Media
Server.
2 Select one of the following methods to enter license keys:

To manually enter license Do the following in the order listed:

keys
■ Type a license key into the license key field.
■ Click Add.
■ Repeat for each license key for each option or agent
that you want to install.

To import license keys from Do the following in the order listed:

a file
■ Click Import from file.
■ Select the besernum.xml file.

To install a trial version Leave the license key field blank.

3 Click Next.
 Installing Backup Exec 127
Special considerations for installing Backup Exec to remote computers

4 Select the additional options that you want to install, and then click Next.
5 If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for the additional
options that you want to install. Click Next after each selection.
6 Read the Backup Exec installation summary, and then click Install.
The Backup Exec services are stopped while the additional options are
installed. If any active jobs are running, you are prompted to stop them, or
to wait for the jobs to finish.
When the installation is complete, the services are restarted.
7 Click Finish.

Special considerations for installing Backup Exec to

remote computers
There are special considerations that you should be familiar with before you install
Backup Exec to remote computers.

Table 2-8 Special considerations for installing Backup Exec to remote

computers

Item Consideration

Windows XP To push-install Backup Exec to a Windows XP SP2/Server 2003

SP2/Server 2003 SP1 computer, you must enable File and Printer Sharing on the
Windows Firewall Exceptions list for the following ports:

■ 135 (RPC)
■ 445 (TCP)
■ 103X (mostly 1037)
■ 441 (RPC)

For more information about the Windows Firewall Exceptions list,

refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation.

During the installation process, Backup Exec sets the Remote

Launch and Remote Access security permissions for the
Administrator’s group.

You should enable the "Allow remote administration exception"

group policy for the computer to which you push the installation.
128 Installing Backup Exec
Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers

Table 2-8 Special considerations for installing Backup Exec to remote

computers (continued)

Item Consideration

Windows Server 2008 To push-install Backup Exec to a computer that runs Windows
Server 2008, you must enable certain items on the destination
computer’s Windows Firewall Exceptions list. You must enable
the following items:

■ File and Printer Sharing

■ Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI)

For more information refer to your Microsoft Windows

documentation.

Symantec Endpoint To push-install Backup Exec to a computer that runs Symantec

Protection (SEP) 11.0 Endpoint Protection (SEP) version 11.0 or later, you must configure
or later SEP to share files and printers. The file and printer sharing feature
is turned off by default.

See “Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers” on page 128.

Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers

If you install Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation media
is on a shared drive (network share) you must use a UNC path. Installation by
mapped drives is not supported.
You can set up multiple server installations. Backup Exec processes up to five
remote computer installations concurrently.
Before, you install Backup Exec to remote computers, you should review the special
considerations.
See “Special considerations for installing Backup Exec to remote computers”
on page 127.

Note: You can also use Microsoft’s Add or Remove Programs utility to install
Backup Exec to a remote computer. See your Microsoft documentation for more
information.

The installation process creates an installation log named Bkupinst.htm on the

computer where Backup Exec is installed.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
 Installing Backup Exec 129
Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers

To push-install Backup Exec to remote computers

1 Do one of the following:

To push-install Backup Exec to remote Do the following steps in the order listed:
computers from the installation media
■ From the installation media browser,
click Installation, and then click
Backup Exec.
■ On the Welcome panel, click Next.
■ Select I accept the terms of the license
agreement, and the click Next.
■ Select Custom installation.
■ UncheckLocal Installation, and then
check Remote Installation.
■ Click Next.
■ On the Remote Computers panel, click
Add.
■ To install Backup Exec on one remote
computer, select Add a Single
Computer, or to install Backup Exec
on multiple computers using the same
settings, select Add Multiple
Computers with the Same Settings.

To push-install Backup Exec to remote On the Tools menu, click Install Agents
computers from the Backup Exec media and Media Servers on Other Servers.
server

2 Select Symantec Backup Exec, and then click Next.

3 Type the fully qualified name, IP address, or computer name of the remote
computer or click Browse Remote Computers to locate the remote computer.
4 Click Add to List, and then repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remote computer to
which you want to push-install the programs.
If you are push-installing from the installation media and you selected Add
a Single Computer in step 1, you can skip this step.
5 Under Remote computer credentials, type the credentials that Backup Exec
can use to connect to the remote servers.
You must use Administrator credentials. These remote computer logon
credentials are not the same as the Backup Exec service account credentials
in step 12.
6 Click Next.
130 Installing Backup Exec
Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers

7 Select one of the following methods to enter license keys:

To enter license Do the following in the order listed:

keys manually
■ Type a license key into the license key field.
■ Click Add.
■ Repeat for each license key for each option or agent that you
want to install.

To import license Do the following in the order listed:

keys from a file
■ Click Import from file.
■ Select the besernum.xml file.

To install a trial Leave the license key field blank.

version

8 Click Next.
9 Select the agents and options that you want to install, and then click Next.
10 In the Destination Folder field, enter the location where you want to install
Backup Exec.
11 Click Next.
12 Complete the service account credentials options as follows:

User Name Type the user name for an Administrator account that the Backup
Exec services can use.

If the remote computer is in a domain, use a domain administrators

account or an equivalent account that is part of the domain
administrators group.

If the remote computer is in a workgroup, use an Administrators

account or an equivalent account that is part of the Administrators
group on the computer.

Password Type the password for an Administrator account that the Backup
Exec services can use.

Domain If the computer is in a domain, select the domain in which the

computer is located.

If the computer is in a workgroup, select the computer name.

13 Click Next.
 Installing Backup Exec 131
Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers

14 Do one of the following to select a location on which to store the Backup Exec
Database , and then click Next.

To create a local Backup Exec Do the following in the order listed:

SQL Express instance
■ Click Create a local Backup Exec SQL Express
instance to store the database on.
■ To change the location of the database, type
the new location in the Destination Folder
field.

To use an existing SQL Server Do the following in the order listed:

2005 or SQL Server 2008 instance
■ Click Use an existing instance of SQL Server
2005 (SP3a or later) or SQL Server 2008 on the
network to store the database on.
■ Select the instance.

When Backup Exec is installed into an existing

instance, the automated master database restore
feature is not available. To recover the Master
database, you must replace it with the Master
database copy that Backup Exec automatically
creates and updates when the Master database is
backed up.
Caution: During the installation process and
upgrade process, Backup Exec stops and starts the
SQL service several times. Other user-created
databases that use the SQL Server instance are
unavailable during the process. To avoid such
conflicts, you should install Backup Exec into its
own SQL instance.

Backup Exec attempts to connect to the instance.

This step is skipped during upgrades.
15 Click Next.
16 Review the note about tape device drivers, and then click Next.
17 Click Next.
18 If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for additional
options being installed, and then click Next or OK after each selection.
19 After Backup Exec validates the remote computers, you can change the list
in any of the following ways:
132 Installing Backup Exec
Push-installing Backup Exec to remote computers

To manually add one remote computer Click Add, and then click Add a Single
Computer.

To manually add multiple remote Click Add, and then click Add Multiple
computers Computers with the Same Settings.

To add multiple remote computers by Click Import and Export, and then select
importing an existing list of computers one of the following options:

■ Select Import from File to enable

Backup Exec to add the names of the
remote computers from a selected list.
■ Select Import Servers Published to
this Media Server to enable Backup
Exec to add the names of all the remote
computers that are set up to publish
to this media server.

You must enter remote computer logon

credentials for the list of remote
computers.

To change the product that you selected Select the remote computer that you want
to install or to change other properties to change, and then click Edit.
you selected for this installation

To delete a remote computer from the list Select the remote computer that you want
to delete, and then click Delete.

To save this list of remote computers and Verify that Save the server list for future
the associated remote computer logon remote install sessions is checked.
credentials
This option enables the names and the
credentials of all of the remote computers
to be added automatically the next time
you install Backup Exec or options to these
remote computers.

To save the list of remote computers to Click Import and Export, and then click
an XML file Export to File.

You can select the location to save the

Push_Export.xml file. This option is useful
if you want to use the same list for
multiple media servers. When you import
the list, you must re-enter the remote
computer logon credentials.

To fix the errors that were located during Right-click the name of the computer, and
the validation then click Fix Errors.
 Installing Backup Exec 133
About installing Backup Exec options to remote computers

To enable Backup Exec to attempt to Right-click the name of the computer, and
re-validate an invalid remote computer then click Retry Validation.

20 After all of the computers in the list are validated and the list is complete,
click Next.
21 Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
22 Click Next, and then click Finish to exit the wizard.
If you did not restart the remote computer, you may need to do it now in order
for the configuration to take effect.

About installing Backup Exec options to remote

computers
You can install the following options to remote computers:
■ Remote Agent for Windows Systems
■ Advanced Open File Option (AOFO)
■ Desktop and Laptop Option (DLO) Desktop Agent
■ Desktop and Laptop Maintenance Service
See “Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to remote
computers” on page 136.
See “Push-installing the Desktop Agent and DLO Maintenance Service from the
media server to remote computers” on page 139.
These features are push-installed to remote computers from a media server. Push
installations save time by eliminating the need for local access at the target
computer for the installation to be successful. You can install Backup Exec to as
many as five remote computers concurrently.
There are special considerations that you should be familiar with before you install
Backup Exec options on remote computers.
134 Installing Backup Exec
About installing Backup Exec options to remote computers

Table 2-9 Special considerations for installing Backup Exec options to remote
computers

Item Consideration

32-bit and 64-bit computers If you try to push-install an option from a 32-bit computer
to a 64-bit computer, you may be prompted to insert the
64-bit installation media.

Remote Agent for Windows You cannot push-install the Remote Agent for Windows
Systems Systems when the remote computer is in the ForceGuest
configuration and it is not in a domain. ForceGuest is an
operating system configuration that limits incoming users
to Guest-level access. Instead, use the installation media
or the network to install the Remote Agent on the
Windows computer.

See “Installing Backup Exec using the command line

(silent mode)” on page 155.

You can also turn off ForceGuest. In Windows XP,

ForceGuest is configured by the Use simple file sharing
option. In Windows Vista, ForceGuest is configured by
the Network Access: Sharing and security model for local
accounts settings. Refer to your Microsoft Windows
documentation for more information.

Backup Exec installs a command line version of the

Remote Agent on the computers that run the Server Core
installation option of Windows Server 2008. The Remote
Agent Utility command line applet is installed with the
Remote Agent. This applet lets you monitor Backup Exec
operations on the remote computer.

See “Remote Agent Utility Command Line Applet

switches” on page 1983.

Terminal Services If you install Backup Exec agents and options through
Terminal Services and the installation media is on a
shared drive (network share) you must install using a UNC
path. Installation via mapped drives is not supported.
 Installing Backup Exec 135
About installing Backup Exec options to remote computers

Table 2-9 Special considerations for installing Backup Exec options to remote
computers (continued)

Item Consideration

Windows XP SP2/Server 2003 To push-install Backup Exec options to a Windows XP

SP1 SP2/Server 2003 SP1 computer, you must enable File and
Printer Sharing on the Windows Firewall Exceptions list
for the following ports:

■ 135 (RPC)
■ 445 (TCP)
■ 103X (mostly 1037)
■ 441 (RPC)

For more information about the Windows Firewall

Exceptions list, refer to your Microsoft Windows
documentation.

During the installation process, Backup Exec sets the

Remote Launch and Remote Access security permissions
for the Administrator’s group.

You should enable the "Allow remote administration

exception" group policy for the computer to which you
push the installation.

Windows Vista/Server 2008 To push-install Backup Exec options to a computer that

runs Windows Vista/Server 2008, you must enable certain
items on the destination computer’s Windows Firewall
Exceptions list. You must enable the following items:

■ File and Printer Sharing

■ Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI)

For more information refer to your Microsoft Windows

documentation.

To push-install to a Windows Vista computer, the

destination computer must be part of a domain.

For more information, refer to the Microsoft Knowledge

Base.

Symantec Endpoint Protection To push-install options to a computer that runs Symantec

11.0 or later Endpoint Protection (SEP) version 11.0 or later, you must
configure SEP to share files and printers. File and printer
sharing is turned off by default.
136 Installing Backup Exec
Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to remote computers

Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open

File Option to remote computers
You can install the following options to remote computers:
■ Remote Agent for Windows Systems
■ Advanced Open File Option (AOFO)
Before you install Backup Exec options on remote computers, review the special
considerations.
See “About installing Backup Exec options to remote computers” on page 133.
The installation process creates an installation log named Bkupinst.htm on the
computer where Backup Exec is installed .
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
If there are problems installing the Backup Exec Remote Agent using this method,
you can try to manually install the Remote Agent.
See “Using a command prompt to install the Remote Agent on a remote computer”
on page 147.
To push-install the Remote Agent and AOFO to remote computers
1 Do one of the following:

To push-install Backup Exec options to Do the following steps in the order listed:
remote computers from the installation
■ From the installation media browser,
media
click Installation, and then click
Backup Exec.
■ On the Welcome panel, select I accept
the terms of the license agreement,
and the click Next.
■ Click Custom installation.
■ Uncheck Local Installation, and then
check Remote Installation.
■ Click Next.
■ On the Remote Computers panel, click
Add.
■ To install Backup Exec on one remote
computer, select Add a Single
Computer, or to install Backup Exec
on multiple computers using the same
settings, select Add Multiple
Computers with the Same Settings.
 Installing Backup Exec 137
Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to remote computers

To push-install Backup Exec options to On the Tools menu, click Install Agents
remote computers from the Backup Exec and Media Servers on Other Servers.
media server

2 Select Remote Agent for Windows Systems, and then click Next.
3 Type the fully qualified name of the remote computer or click Browse to
locate the remote computer.
4 Click Add to List, and then repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remote computer to
which you want to push-install the options.
If you are push-installing from the installation media and you selected Add
a Single Computer in step 1, you can skip this step.
5 Under Remote computer credentials, type the credentials that Backup Exec
can use to connect to the remote servers.
You must use Administrator credentials.
6 Click Next.
7 Select Advanced Open File Option if you want to install it with the Remote
Agent for Windows Systems.
8 In the Destination Folder field, enter the path where you want to install the
files.
9 Click Next.
10 Verify that the option to enable the remote agent to publish information to
the media servers is selected.
11 Verify that the media servers to which you want to publish are listed. You
can add, edit, or remove media servers.
12 Click Next.
13 After Backup Exec validates the remote computers, you can change the list
in any of the following ways:

To manually add one remote computer Click Add, and then click Add a Single
Computer.

To manually add multiple remote Click Add, and then click Add Multiple
computers Computers with the Same Settings.
138 Installing Backup Exec
Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to remote computers

To add multiple remote computers by Click Import and Export, and then select
importing an existing list of computers one of the following options:

■ Select Import from File to enable

Backup Exec to add the names of the
remote computers from a selected list.
■ Select Import Servers Published to
this Media Server to enable Backup
Exec to add the names of all the remote
computers that are set up to publish
to this media server.

You must enter remote computer logon

credentials for the list of remote
computers.

To change the product that you selected Select the remote computer that you want
to install or to change other properties to change, and then click Edit.
you selected for this installation

To delete a remote computer from the list Select the remote computer that you want
to delete, and then click Delete.

To save this list of remote computers and Verify that Save the server list for future
the associated remote computer logon remote install sessions is checked.
credentials
This option enables the names of all of the
remote computers and their credentials
to be added automatically the next time
you want to install Backup Exec or options
to these remote computers.

To save the list of remote computers to Click Import and Export, and then click
an XML file Export to File.

You can select the location to save the

XML file. This option is useful if you want
to use the same list for multiple media
servers. When you import the list, you
must re-enter the remote computer logon
credentials.

To fix the errors that were located during Right-click the name of the computer, and
the validation then click Fix Errors.

To enable Backup Exec to attempt to Right-click the name of the computer, and
re-validate an invalid remote computer then click Retry Validation.

14 After all of the computers in the list are validated and the list is complete,
click Next.
 Installing Backup Exec 139
Push-installing the Desktop Agent and DLO Maintenance Service from the media server to remote computers

15 Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
16 Click Next, and then click Finish to exit the wizard.
If you did not restart the remote computer, you may need to do it now in order
for the configuration to take effect.

Push-installing the Desktop Agent and DLO

Maintenance Service from the media server to remote
computers
You can install the following options to remote computers:
■ Desktop Agent (This agent can be push-installed to a remote computer only
if the Desktop and Laptop Option is already installed on the Backup Exec media
server.
■ DLO Maintenance Service
To push-install the Desktop Agent and DLO Maintenance Service to remote
computers
1 On the Tools menu, click Install Agents and Media Servers on Other Servers.
2 On the Remote Computers panel, click Add.
3 To install on one remote computer, select Add a Single Computer, or to install
on multiple computers using the same settings, select Add Multiple
Computers with the Same Settings
4 Select Desktop and Laptop Agent or DLO Maintenance Service, and then
click Next.
5 Type the fully qualified name of the remote computer or click Browse Remote
Computers to locate the remote computer.
6 Click Add to List, and then repeat steps 5 and 6 for each remote computer to
which you want to push-install the options.
This step does not apply if you selected Add a Single Computer in step 4.
7 Under Remote computer credentials, type the credentials that Backup Exec
can use to connect to the remote servers.
You must use Administrator credentials.
8 Click Next.
140 Installing Backup Exec
Push-installing the Desktop Agent and DLO Maintenance Service from the media server to remote computers

9 After Backup Exec validates the remote computers, you can change the list
in any of the following ways:

To manually add one remote computer Click Add, and then click Add a Single
Computer.

To manually add multiple remote Click Add, and then click Add Multiple
computers Computers with the Same Settings.

To add multiple remote computers by Click Import and Export, and then select
importing an existing list of computers Import from File to enable Backup Exec
to add the names of the remote computers
from a selected list.

You must enter remote computer logon

credentials for the list of remote
computers.

To change the product that you selected Select the remote computer that you want
to install or to change other properties to change, and then click Edit.
you selected for this installation

To delete a remote computer from the list Select the remote computer that you want
to delete, and then click Delete.

To save this list of remote computers and Verify that Save the server list for future
the associated remote computer logon remote install sessions is checked.
credentials
This option enables the names of all of the
remote computers and their credentials
to be added automatically the next time
you want to install Backup Exec or options
to these remote computers.

To save the list of remote computers to Click Import and Export, and then click
an XML file Export to File.

You can select the location to save the

XML file. This option is useful if you want
to use the same list for multiple media
servers. When you import the list, you
must re-enter the remote computer logon
credentials.

To fix the errors that were located during Right-click the name of the computer, and
the validation then click Fix Errors.

To enable Backup Exec to attempt to Right-click the name of the computer, and
re-validate an invalid remote computer then click Retry Validation.
 Installing Backup Exec 141
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

10 After all of the computers in the list are validated and the list is complete,
click Next.
11 Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
12 Click Next, and then click Finish to exit the wizard.
If you did not restart the remote computer, you may need to do it now in order
for the configuration to take effect.

About installing the Remote Agent for Windows

Systems
You can install the Remote Agent for Windows Systems by using the following
methods, depending on your environment:
■ Install the Remote Agent from the Backup Exec installation media by taking
the media to the computer and running the Backup Exec installation program.
See “Installing additional Backup Exec options to the local media server”
on page 125.
■ Push-install the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option (AOFO) to
one or more remote computers from the media server.
See “Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to
remote computers” on page 136.
■ Push-install the Remote Agent and AOFO to a remote computer that is displayed
in the backup selections list.
See “Installing the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option to a
remote computer in the backup selections list” on page 142.
■ Use a Microsoft Active Directory network to centrally manage the installation
of the Remote Agent and the AOFO to computers in the network.
See “How to install the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option in an
Active Directory network” on page 142.
■ Install the Remote Agent and AOFO by using command script files.
See “Using a command script to install the Remote Agent and AOFO ”
on page 150.
There are special considerations for installing the Remote Agent.
See “About installing Backup Exec options to remote computers” on page 133.
142 Installing Backup Exec
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

Installing the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option to a
remote computer in the backup selections list
As you are making backup selections, you can install the Remote Agent and the
Advanced Open File Option (AOFO) on computers that you want to back up.

Note: AOFO can only be installed on 32-bit computers that run Windows 2000/XP.

To install the Backup Exec Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option to a
remote computer in the backup selections list
1 On the navigation bar, click the arrow next to Backup.
2 Click New Backup Job.
3 On the View by Resource tab, do one of the following:

If the remote computer has been Do the following in the order listed:
added to Favorite Resources
■ Expand Favorite Resources.
■ Expand Windows Systems.

If the remote computer has not Do the following in the order listed:
been added to Favorite Resources
■ Expand Domains.
■ Expand Microsoft Windows Network.
■ Expand the appropriate domain.

4 Right-click the computer that you want to install the Remote Agent and the
AOFO to, and then click Install Remote Agent/Advanced Open File Option.
5 Use the installation wizard to complete the insallation.
See “Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to
remote computers” on page 136.

How to install the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option in an
Active Directory network
You can centrally manage the installation of the Backup Exec Remote Agent for
Windows Systems and the Advanced Open File Option (AOFO) to computers in
an Active Directory network. You configure the installation once, and then use a
Group Policy Object to assign that installation to computers in an Organizational
Unit. The options are installed automatically whenever a computer in the
Organizational Unit is started.
 Installing Backup Exec 143
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

Note: Review your organization’s deployment plans before you implement a rollout
of the Backup Exec Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to client
computers. You should also review your Group Policy Desktop Management and
Active Directory documentation.

Note: AOFO can only be installed on 32-bit computers that run Windows 2000/XP.

Table 2-10 Installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option in an
Active Directory network

Action Description

Create a transform for the Remote Agent A transform contains changes that you want
and/or AOFO. to make to the Remote Agent’s Windows
Installer package when a computer starts,
See “Creating a transform” on page 144.
such as installation path, which computers
to publish to, and whether to install AOFO.
You must create separate transforms for
32-bit computers and 64-bit computers.
Requirements to create a transform are as
follows:

■ The computer on which you want to

create the transform must have Microsoft
Windows 2000 or later.
■ The computers on which you want to
install the Remote Agent must be
running MSI 3.1.
■ The computers on which you want to
install the Remote Agent must be
running MSXML 6.0.
■ Only assignment to computers is
supported. Assignment to users is not
supported.

Create a distribution point (share) that You must copy the transform that you
contains the source file of the Remote Agent create, and the Backup Exec RAWS32 or
that you want to install. RAWSX64 directory, to the distribution
point.
See “Creating a software distribution point
(share)” on page 145.
144 Installing Backup Exec
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

Table 2-10 Installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option in an
Active Directory network (continued)

Action Description

Configure a Group Policy Object to assign The software is installed automatically when
the transform and the RAWS32 or RAWSX64 the computers in the Organizational Unit
directory in the distribution point to are started.
computers in an Active Directory
Organizational Unit.

See “Configuring a Group Policy Object”

on page 146.

Creating a transform
To install the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option in an Active
Directory network, you must create a transform.
See “How to install the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option in an Active
Directory network” on page 142.
To create the transform
1 Do one of the following:
■ From the Backup Exec installation media browser, click Installation, and
then click Backup Exec Remote Agent.
■ From a media server on which Backup Exec is installed, go to \Program
Files\Symantec\Backup Exec\Agents\RAWS32 and double-click Setup.exe.

2 On the Welcome panel, click Next.

3 On the Install Type panel, click Create a Transform to use Active Directory
to install the Remote Agent, and then click Next.
4 On the Install Option panel, do the following:
■ Select the options that you want to include in the transform.
The configuration that you specify in the transform becomes the default
setting for a client computer in the Active Directory network when it
performs setup.
■ Enter the path where the Remote Agent will be installed on client
computers
To change the default path, click Change.
The path should not be a removable drive or a network drive.

5 Click Next.
 Installing Backup Exec 145
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

6 Do the following in the order listed:

■ Verify that the option Enable the Remote Agent to publish the IP address
and name of the remote computer and the version of the Remote Agent
to media servers is selected.
■ Click Add to enter the media server name or IP address of all of the media
servers that you want the Remote Agent to publish to after the transform
has been applied.

7 Click Next.
The computer that the Remote Agent is installed on is displayed in the media
server’s backup selection tree under Favorite Resources.
8 Enter a file name and a path where the transform will be created, and then
click Next.
To change the default path, click Change.
Use a meaningful file name for the transform. For example, the name could
include the names of the options in the transform and the platform you plan
to apply the transform to, such as RemoteAgentDefaultPathNoPublishing.
9 To create the transform, click Install.
10 After the transform is created, set up a distribution point for the source files.
See “Creating a software distribution point (share)” on page 145.

Creating a software distribution point (share)

To install the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option in an Active
Directory network, you must create a software distribution point after you create
a transform.
See “Creating a transform” on page 144.
See “How to install the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option in an Active
Directory network” on page 142.

Table 2-11 How to create a software distribution point (share)

Step Description

Step 1 Create a shared folder, and then set

permissions so that client computers that
will run the installation have access to the
shared folder.
146 Installing Backup Exec
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

Table 2-11 How to create a software distribution point (share) (continued)

Step Description

Step 2 Copy the following directories from the

media server to the shared folder:

■ RAWS32 or RAWSX64
■ MSXML

By default, these folders are located in

\Program Files\Symantec\Backup
Exec\Agents.

Step 3 Copy the transform from the path where it

was created to the RAWS32 or RAWSX64
directory on the shared folder.

Step 4 Configure a Group Policy Object to deploy

the source files.

See “Configuring a Group Policy Object”

on page 146.

Configuring a Group Policy Object

To install the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option in an Active
Directory network, you must configure a Group Policy Object after you create a
software distribution point and create a transform.
See “Creating a transform” on page 144.
See “Creating a software distribution point (share)” on page 145.
See “How to install the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option in an Active
Directory network” on page 142.
To configure a Group Policy Object to deploy the software
1 From the Active Directory snap-in that manages users and groups, click
Properties, and create a new Group Policy Object or edit an existing one.
Refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation for information on creating
a Group Policy Object.
2 Under Computer Configuration, expand Software Settings.
3 Right-click Software Installation, click New, and then click Package.
4 On the File Open dialog box, browse to the software distribution point by
using the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) name, for example, \\server
name\share name, select the package file, and then click Open.
 Installing Backup Exec 147
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

5 Select the package file Symantec Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows
Systems.msi, and then click Open.
6 When prompted, apply the Advanced Option.
7 After Active Directory checks the msi package, on the General Properties tab,
make sure the correct versions of the options are being installed.
8 On the Deployment tab, set up the configuration for your environment.
Make sure the option Make this 32-bit x86 application available to WIN64
machines is not selected.
If you want the Remote Agent to be uninstalled if the computer is removed
from the Organization Unit, select the option Uninstall this application when
it falls out of the scope of management.
9 On the Modifications tab, click Add, browse to the share, and select the
transform that you created.
10 Select Open, and make any other changes that are necessary, and then click
OK.
11 Close all of the dialog boxes.
When a computer in the Organizational Unit that you specified is started,
the transform is processed and the options that you specified are installed.
12 View the installation log that is created on the destination computers to verify
the installation of the Remote Agent and/or the AOFO.

Using a command prompt to install the Remote Agent on a remote

computer
You can install the Remote Agent by using a command prompt.
The installation process creates an installation log named RAWSinst.htm.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
148 Installing Backup Exec
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

To use a command prompt to install the Remote Agent on a remote computer

1 At a remote computer, map a drive letter to the Backup Exec media server
Agents directory. By default, the Agents directory is located at the following
path:
\Program Files\Symantec\Backup Exec\Agents
or you can copy the following folders to the same local directory:

To install to a 32-bit computer: RAWS32 and MSXML folders

To install to a 64-bit computer: RAWSX64 and MSXML folders

2 Open a command prompt and type the drive letter that you mapped in step
1 and the following path:

To install to a 32-bit computer: \RAWS32:

To install to a 64-bit computer: \RAWSX64:

 Installing Backup Exec 149
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

3 Do one of the following:

To install the Remote Agent to a 32-bit Run the following command:

computer without publishing enabled:
setup.exe /RANT32: /S: -boot

To install the Remote Agent to a 32-bit Run the following command:

computer with publishing enabled:
setup.exe /RANT32: /S: /ADVRT:
<media server name 1> <media
server name 2>

To install the Remote Agent to a 64-bit Run the following command:

computer without publishing enabled:
setup.exe /RAWSX64: /S: -boot

To install the Remote Agent to a 64-bit Run the following command:

computer with publishing enabled:
setup.exe /RAWSX64: /S: /ADVRT:
<media server name 1> <media
server name 2>

The Remote Agent is installed on the remote computer in the following

directory:

If you installed the Remote Agent to a \Program Files\Symantec\Backup

32-bit computer: Exec\RAWS

If you installed the Remote Agent to a \Program Files\Symantec\Backup

64-bit computer: Exec\RAWS

Using a command prompt to uninstall the Remote Agent from a remote

computer
You can uninstall the Remote Agent by using a command prompt.
150 Installing Backup Exec
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

To use a command prompt to uninstall the Remote Agent from a remote computer
1 At the remote computer, map a drive letter to the Backup Exec media server
Remote Agent directory using the following path:

To uninstall the Remote Agent from a \Program Files\Symantec\Backup

32-bit computer: Exec\Agents\RAWS32

To uninstall the Remote Agent from a \Program Files\Symantec\Backup

64-bit computer: Exec\Agents\RAWSX64

2 Open a command prompt, and then type the drive letter that you mapped in
step 1.
3 Run the following command:

To uninstall the Remote Agent from a setup.exe /RANT32: /S: -u

32-bit computer:
The /S: parameter is used to run the
operation in silent mode, without the
benefit of a user interface. The -u
parameter specifies an uninstall
operation.

To uninstall the Remote Agent from a setup.exe /RAWSX64: /S: -u

64-bit computer:

See “Using a command prompt to install the Remote Agent on a remote computer”
on page 147.

Using a command script to install the Remote Agent and AOFO

You can use command script files to install the Remote Agent and the Advanced
Open File Option (AOFO). The command script files are included in the Remote
Agent installation directory.
The installation process creates an installation log named RAWSinst.htm.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
 Installing Backup Exec 151
About installing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems

To use a command script to install the Remote Agent and AOFO

1 Map a drive letter to the Agents directory of a Backup Exec media server. By
default, the Agents directory is located at the following path:
\Program Files\Symantec\Backup Exec\Agents
2 Do one of the following:

To install the Remote Agent on a Double-click setupaa in the RAWS32 directory.

32-bit computer

To install the Advanced Open File Double-click setupaofo in the RAWS32 directory.
Option on a 32-bit computer
By default, the command script installs the option
automatically on the remote server in the following
directory:

\Program Files\Symantec\Backup Exec\RAWS

To install the Remote Agent on a Double-click setupaax64 in the RAWSX64

64-bit computer directory.

3 If you installed the Advanced Open File Option, you must restart the remote
computer.

Using a command script to uninstall the Remote Agent and AOFO

One command script file is available to uninstall both the Remote Agent and the
AOFO. The uninstall command script removes both options together. You cannot
remove the options separately using the command script.
152 Installing Backup Exec
Installing the Remote Administrator

To use a command script to uninstall the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File
Option
1 Map a drive letter to the Backup Exec media server by using one of the
following paths:

To a 32-bit computer \Program Files\Symantec\Backup

Exec\Agents\RAWS32

To a 64-bit computer \Program Files\Symantec\Backup

Exec\Agents\RAWSX64

2 Do one of the following:

For a 32-bit computer Double-click Removeaaofo.

For a 64-bit computer Double-click Uninstallaaofox64.

Note: This script applies only to the Remote Agent for
Windows Systems 12.5.

Both the Remote Agent and the Advanced Open File Option are removed from
the computer.
3 Restart the remote computer.
See “Using a command script to install the Remote Agent and AOFO ” on page 150.

Installing the Remote Administrator

The Remote Administrator lets you administer the media server from a remote
Windows server or workstation. To support the Remote Administrator, the Backup
Exec system services must be running on the media server that you want to
administer.
To install the Remote Administrator
1 From the installation media browser, click Installation.
2 Click Backup Exec.
3 On the Welcome panel, select I accept the terms of the license agreement,
and then click Next
4 On the Installation Type panel, select Custom installation, and then click
Next.
5 To install the Administration Console as a Remote Administrator, click Install
Remote Administration Console only, and then click Next.
 Installing Backup Exec 153
Installing the Remote Administrator

6 To change the location where the files are installed, click Change to select
another directory for the installation.
7 Click Next.
8 Review the installation summary, and then click Install.
9 Click Finish.
See “Running the Remote Administrator ” on page 153.

Running the Remote Administrator

The Remote Administrator lets you administer the media server from a remote
Windows server or workstation. To support the Remote Administrator, the media
server requires that the Backup Exec system services must be running.
You may be prompted for a user name and password to browse some network
shares even if you are logged into the Remote Administrator computer under an
account that is valid for those shares. Provide a domain-qualified user name and
password when prompted (for example, domain1\howard).
For workgroup accounts, when logging in between different workgroups, you can
provide only a user ID when prompted, and leave the workgroup line blank.
See “Installing the Remote Administrator ” on page 152.
To run the Remote Administrator
1 Click Start.
2 Point to Programs, and then click Symantec Backup Exec.
If you are connecting to a remote administration console from a media server,
on the Network menu, click Connect to Local Media Server to break the
connection. Click Connect to Media Server to connect to another media
server.
3 Select the appropriate options.
See “Connect to Media Server options” on page 153.
The status of the local services appears at the bottom of this dialog box. If
you try to connect to a server and the connection fails, this dialog box displays
the services status for the server you attempted to connect to.
4 Click OK.

Connect to Media Server options

On this dialog box, you can enter the credentials that are required to administer
a media server from a remote Windows server or workstation.
154 Installing Backup Exec
Installing the Remote Administrator

See “Running the Remote Administrator ” on page 153.

Table 2-12 Connect to Media Server options

Item Description

Server Indicates the name of the media server. You

can select the name from the list or type the
name of the server if you are running the
Remote Administrator from a media server.

Each server in the domain that has Backup

Exec installed automatically appears in the
list box.

Low speed connection (RAS) Minimizes the amount of information

initially retrieved from the media server to
which you are connected. When this option
is selected, views such as the device view and
the media view do not expand automatically
when the Administration Console is loaded.
This option reduces the time that is required
to connect to the remote media server.
Information for each view is updated when
the view is selected.

This option is useful if you connect to the

media server over a modem line.

User name Indicates an administrator user name for the

server to which you want to connect.

You cannot log on to the remote

administration console with a user name that
has a blank password on Windows Server
2003/2008 and XP/Vista computers. You
must configure Windows to allow blank
passwords. Otherwise, the error message
"Logon failure: user account restriction"
appears. For more information, see your
Windows documentation.

Password Indicates the password for the user.

Domain Indicates the domain to which the user

belongs. You can select the domain from the
list or type the domain name.
 Installing Backup Exec 155
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-12 Connect to Media Server options (continued)

Item Description

Services Lets you access the Backup Exec Services

Manager to stop and start services or to set
the logon credentials that are used to run the
services.

Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent

mode)
Installing Backup Exec using the command line is referred to as Silent Mode
Installation. This method of installation uses the setup.exe program on the Backup
Exec installation media, a series of command switches, and the /S: switch.
Requirements for Command Line Installation include the following:
■ Backup Exec installation media.
■ Administrator privileges on the computer where you want to install, configure,
or uninstall Backup Exec.
The installation process creates an installation log named Bkupinst.htm on the
computer where Backup Exec is installed.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.
To install Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)
1 Open a Windows command prompt.
2 Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec installation media.
3 Change directories to one of the following:

For 32-bit computers be\winnt\install\be32

For 64-bit computers \be\winnt\install\bex64

156 Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

4 Type setup /TS: and the appropriate switches. For example:

setup /TS: /USER:<user> /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:license

key /S:

See “Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec”
on page 156.
If you use the command line switches without the /S: switch, the Backup Exec
installation program launches with the command line parameters as defaults
for the installation options. For example, if /S: had been left in the above
example, the Backup Exec installation program launches with the user name,
domain, password, and license key appearing on the installation dialog boxes.
5 Press Enter.

Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec

The command line switches used for silent mode installation of Backup Exec are
described in the following table.
Note the following general rules for using these switches:
■ Substitute values appropriate for your environment for values shown in italics;
for example substitute your password for password.
■ Enclose the value in quotation marks if it contains spaces, such as "Operations
Weekly Backup".
See “Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)” on page 155.

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec

Switch Additional Switches Description

/TS: Installs Backup Exec

using the options
specified with the
additional switches.
The /USER:"user"
/DOM:"dm"
/PASS:"pw" is
required.
 Installing Backup Exec 157
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec
(continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/USER:"user" Required. Specifies

an existing user,
/DOM:"dm"
domain, and
/PASS:"pw" password for the
Backup Exec system
service account.
Silent mode
installation will not
create a user.
Note: When using
/PASS:, if a quote is
needed as part of the
password, specify it
as \". For example, if
the password is
pass"word, type it as
/PASS:pass\"word. If
the characters \" are
used as part of the
password, you must
precede each
character with a \.
For example, if the
password is
pass\"word, type it
as
/PASS:pass\\\"word.

/DEST:"path" Specifies the path

where Backup Exec
will be installed.
Otherwise, the
default path
Program
Files\Symantec\Backup
Exec is used.

/DOCS: Installs online

documentation.
158 Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec
(continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/NOINSTALL: Allows you to select

all install options
without actually
installing the Backup
Exec software. This
option can be used in
conjunction with the
/CPF: switch.

/SNO:license key Specifies one or

more license keys to
use for installing
Backup Exec and
additional options.
License keys are not
required to install
the Remote
Administrator. You
may specify up to 99
license keys. If none
are specified, then a
trial copy of Backup
Exec is installed.

The following
examples show how
the /SNO switch can
be used:

/SNO:s1

/SNO:s1 s2 s3 s4
Note: If you install
a license for an
option or agent, you
must also type a
switch that specifies
the option or agent.
The switches that
specify an option or
agent are included in
this table.
 Installing Backup Exec 159
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec
(continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/TD:NEW or ALL /TD:NEW installs

tape drivers only for
drives that do not
have drivers loaded.

/TD:ALL installs tape

drivers for all drives.
Note: To install the
Symantec tape
drivers, the Windows
driver signing policy
must be set to
Ignore. See your
Microsoft Windows
documentation for
instructions on
changing the driver
signing policy.

/CPF:"path\filename.cpf" Creates a file

containing all of the
installation
parameters
provided. Note that
the file is not
encrypted, which
exposes parameters.

/DBSERVER:<server\instance> Installs the Backup

Exec database to the
specified SQL server.

/DBINSTPATH: <SQL Express destination folder> Installs the default

instance of SQL
Express in the
specified folder.

/NOUPDATE: Skips the installation

of Symantec
LiveUpdate.
160 Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec
(continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/DISADVRT Installs the Remote

Agent without
publishing it.

/SQLXSETUP:<SQL Express Install Package> Specifies the

location of the
language-specific
install package for
Microsoft SQL
Server 2005 Express
Edition.

/LOADER: Installs the Library

Expansion Option.

/IDR: Installs the

Intelligent Disaster
Recovery Option.

/AOFO: Installs the

Advanced Open File
Option.

/DLO: Installs the Backup

Exec Desktop and
Laptop Option.

/DLO5: Installs the five-user

version of the
Backup Exec Desktop
and Laptop Option.

/MMS:<CAS server name> Creates a managed

media server for use
with the Central
Admin Server
Option.
 Installing Backup Exec 161
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec
(continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/CASOPVLLOCAL: <1 or 0> /CASOPVLLOCAL:<1>

indicates that device
and media data will
be stored locally on
the managed media
server. Use this
switch with /MMS:.

/CASOPVLLOCAL:<0>
indicates that device
and media data will
be stored on the
central
administration
server. Use this
switch with /MMS:.

/R3: Installs the Backup

Exec Agent for SAP
Applications (SAP
Agent).

/SSO: Installs the SAN

Shared Storage
Option with this
server as the
primary server.

/SSO:server name Installs the SAN

Shared Storage
Option with this
server as the
secondary and the
<server name> as
the primary.

/SHAREPT: Installs the Agent for

Microsoft
SharePoint.

/EXCH: Installs the Agent for

Microsoft Exchange
Server.
162 Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec
(continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/LOTUS: Installs the Agent for

Lotus Domino.

/ORACLE: Installs the Agent for

Oracle on Windows
or Linux Servers.

/SQL: Installs the Agent for

Microsoft SQL
Server.

/EV: Installs the Agent for

Enterprise Vault.

/NTA: Installs the Remote

Agent for Windows
Systems.

/ADBO: Installs the

Advanced
Disk-based Backup
Option.

/CASO: Installs the Central

Admin Server
Option.

/ADR: Installs the Active

Directory Recovery
Agent.

/NDMP: Installs the NDMP

Option.

/DB2: Installs the Agent for

DB2.

/MAC: Installs the Remote

Agent for Macintosh
Servers.

/RAULUS: Installs the Remote

Agent for Linux or
UNIX Servers.
 Installing Backup Exec 163
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-13 Command line switches for silent mode installation of Backup Exec
(continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/VRTSRV: Installs the Agent for

Microsoft Virtual
Server.

/VMWARE: Installs the Agent for

VMware Virtual
Infrastructure.

/STORPROV: Installs the Storage

Provisioning Option.

/DEDUPE: Installs the

Deduplication
Option.

/EXCHARCH: Installs the

Exchange Mailbox
Archiving Option.

/NTFS: Installs the File

System Archiving
Option.

/VTL: Installs the Virtual

Tape Library
Unlimited Drive
Option.

/FIXEDSPO: Installs the Storage

Provisioning Option
- Basic.

/RMAL: Installs the Remote

Media Agent for
Linux Servers.

/COPYCONFIG: Installs the Copy

Server Configuration
option.

-? Provides help on all

command line
operations, usage,
and special switches.
164 Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Installing the Remote Administrator using the command line

You can also use Silent Mode Installation to install the Remote Administrator.
Options for the Remote Administrator are specified with the use of additional
command switches.
To install the Remote Administrator using the command line
1 Open a Windows command prompt.
2 Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec installation media.
3 Change directories to one of the following:

For 32-bit computers \be\winnt\install\be32

For 64-bit computers \be\winnt\install\bex64

4 Type setup /RA: and the appropriate switches. For example:

setup /RA: /S:

The command line switches used for silent mode installation of the Remote
Administrator are described in the following table.
Remember the following general rules for using these switches:
■ Substitute values appropriate for your environment for values in italics;
for example, substitute your password for password.
■ Enclose the value in quotation marks if it contains spaces, such as
"Program Files\Symantec\Backup Exec".

Table 2-14 Command line switches for Remote Administrator silent mode
installation

Switch Additional Switches Description

/RA: Installs Remote

Administrator using
the options specified
with the additional
switches.
 Installing Backup Exec 165
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Table 2-14 Command line switches for Remote Administrator silent mode
installation (continued)

Switch Additional Switches Description

/DEST:"path" Specifies the path

where Remote
Administrator will
be installed.
Otherwise, the
default path
Program
Files\Symantec\Backup
Exec is used.

/DOCS: Installs online

documentation.

/NOINSTALL: Allows you to select

all install options
without actually
installing the Backup
Exec software. This
option can be used
with the /CPF:
switch.

/CPF:"path\filename.cpf" Creates a file

containing all of the
installation
parameters
provided. Note that
the file is not
encrypted, which
exposes parameters
such as the password

-? Provides help on all

command line
operations, usage,
and special switches.

See “Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)” on page 155.
166 Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

Uninstalling Backup Exec using the command line

If Backup Exec is already installed, you can use the setup.exe program to uninstall
Backup Exec program files and Backup Exec data.
To uninstall Backup Exec using the command line
1 Open a Windows command prompt.
2 Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec installation media.
3 Change directories to one of the following:

For 32-bit computers \be\winnt\install\be32

For 64-bit computers \be\winnt\install\bex64

4 To remove the Backup Exec program files but keep all of the Backup Exec
data, type:

SETUP /UNINSTALL:

To remove the Backup Exec program files and the Backup Exec data, type:

SETUP /REMOVEALL:

See “Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)” on page 155.

Creating installation parameter files

If you use the command line switches without the /S: switch, the Backup Exec
installation program launches with the command line parameters as defaults for
the installation options. For example, suppose you type:

SETUP /TS: /USER:user /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:license

key

The Backup Exec installation program is launched. The screens that allow you to
enter the logon credentials and the license key will appear with the information
you provided on the command line.
You can also use the /CPF: command to create a parameter file that contains all
of the command line options you provided. This parameter file can then be used
to provide the options for installing either Backup Exec or the Remote
Administrator. Note that the file is not encrypted, which exposes parameters such
as the password.
 Installing Backup Exec 167
Installing Backup Exec using the command line (silent mode)

To create installation parameter files

1 Open a Windows command prompt.
2 Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec installation media.
3 Change directories to one of the following:

For 32-bit computers \be\winnt\install\be32

For 64-bit computers \be\winnt\install\bex64

4 Type setup /TS: and the appropriate switches, including /CPF: and the full
path name of the parameter file. For example, type:

setup /TS: /USER:user /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:license

key /CPF:"A:\file name" /S:

Backup Exec will be installed on your server and a parameter file containing
the user name, domain, password, and license key will be saved to a floppy
diskette. You can use this parameter file to install to another computer.
See “Using installation parameter files” on page 167.

Using installation parameter files

You can use the /CPF: command to create a parameter file that contains all of the
command line options you provided. This parameter file can then be used to
provide the options for installing either Backup Exec or the Remote Administrator.
See “Creating installation parameter files” on page 166.
To use installation parameter files
1 Open a Windows command prompt.
2 Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec installation media.
3 Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.
4 Type:SETUP /PARAMS:"A:\file name" /S:
5 If you want to overwrite a parameter, specify the new parameter. For example,
to change the password, type:SETUP /PARAMS:"A:\file name" /PASS:new
password/S:
168 Installing Backup Exec
Installing a trial version of Backup Exec agents and options

Installing a trial version of Backup Exec agents and

options
You can install a trial version of most Backup Exec agents and options at any time
after the core product is licensed. Each agent and each option has its own
independent trial period. When a trial period is about to expire, Backup Exec warns
you with an alert.
You can view a list of agents and options that are available for a trial period. You
can also view the amount of time that is left in each individual trial period.
See “Viewing license information” on page 176.
To install a trial version of Backup Exec agents and options
1 On the Tools menu, click Install Options and License Keys on this Media
Server.
2 Click Next.
3 Select the agents or options you want to evaluate.
4 Click Next.
5 If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for the additional
options that you want to install. Click Next after each selection.
6 Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
The Backup Exec services are stopped while the additional options are
installed. If any active jobs are in progress, you are prompted to stop them,
or to wait for the jobs to finish.
When the installation is complete, the services restart.
7 Click Finish.

About the installation log

Backup Exec creates an installation log file, named Bkupinst.htm, when you install
Backup Exec and when you install patches. This log file can help you troubleshoot
installation problems. The log file provides links to TechNotes for the most
common errors. If you install the Remote Agent for Windows Systems, a log file
called RAWSinst.htm is also created.
In addition, the text in the log file uses the following colors so you can identify
warnings and errors:
 Installing Backup Exec 169
Repairing Backup Exec

Table 2-15 Installation log colors

This color Indicates

Black Normal operations

Orange Warning messages

Red Error messages

For most versions of Windows, Bkupinst.htm is saved in:

%allusersprofile%\Application Data\Symantec\Backup Exec\Logs.

The Application Data folder is a hidden folder. If you do not see the Application
Data folder, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation for instructions on
how to display hidden folders.

Repairing Backup Exec

If you have missing or corrupted Backup Exec files or registry keys on the local
media server, run the Repair option. The program stops all Backup Exec services,
reinstalls corrupted files and registry keys, reinstalls tape devices (stand-alone
drives and libraries), and restarts the services. The database is not reinstalled.
Any changes made to Backup Exec program files and registry keys will be reset
to the original settings.
To repair Backup Exec
1 Close the Backup Exec application.
2 From the Windows Control Panel, double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3 At the Add or Remove Programs dialog box, select Symantec Backup Exec,
and then click Change.
4 On the Welcome panel, click Next.
5 Select Local installation and Repair, and then click Next.
Make sure the option Remote installation is not selected.
6 If you are prompted to enter credentials for the Backup Exec service account,
type the correct credentials, and then click Next.
7 Select Install.
8 Click Finish.
170 Installing Backup Exec
Starting and stopping Backup Exec services

Starting and stopping Backup Exec services

You can start, stop, and restart Backup Exec services.
To start or stop Backup Exec services
1 On the Tools menu, click Backup Exec Services.
2 Select the appropriate options.
See “Backup Exec Services Manager options” on page 170.

Backup Exec Services Manager options

You can start, stop, and restart Backup Exec services.
See “Starting and stopping Backup Exec services” on page 170.

Table 2-16 Backup Exec Services Manager options

Item Description

Server Indicates the name of a server for which you want to start, stop,
or restart services. You can type the name of a server or import
a list of servers.

Add Enables you to add the name of a server for which you want to
start, stop, or restart services.

Import List Enables you to import a list of servers for which you want to
start, stop, or restart services.

Start all services Starts all Backup Exec services for the selected server.

Stop all services Stops all Backup Exec services for the selected server.

Restart all services Stops all Backup Exec services and then restart the services for
the selected server.

Services credentials Changes service account information or changes startup options.

Refresh Refreshes this dialog box.

Remove Servers Removes a selected server or servers from the server list.

Uninstalling Backup Exec

Use Microsoft’s Add or Remove Programs option to remove Backup Exec from a
computer. For additional information on Add or Remove Programs, refer to your
Microsoft documentation.
 Installing Backup Exec 171
Uninstalling Backup Exec options from the local media server

Uninstalling Backup Exec also removes Symantec tape class drivers. If you reinstall
Backup Exec and want to use Symantec tape class drivers, you must reinstall them.

Note: When using the Shared Storage Option, you must uninstall Backup Exec
from the secondary servers before uninstalling it from the primary server.

To uninstall Backup Exec

1 Close Backup Exec.
2 From the Windows Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs.
3 On the Add or Remove Programs dialog box, select Symantec Backup Exec,
and then click Remove.
4 When you are prompted to confirm that you want to uninstall Backup Exec
from your computer, click Yes.
5 If you want to remove all of the files that are associated with Backup Exec,
click Yes, please remove Backup Exec and all of its associated files from the
system.
6 Click Next.
If the uninstall program fails, click View Installation Log File for additional
information.
7 If you are prompted, restart the computer.
See “Uninstalling Backup Exec options from the local media server” on page 171.

Uninstalling Backup Exec options from the local media

server
The install wizard removes Backup Exec options from the local media server. All
corresponding files, registry keys, and configurations are removed.
To uninstall Backup Exec options from the local media server
1 On the Tools menu, click Install Options and License Keys on this Media
Server.
2 On the License Keys panel, select the license key of the option that you want
to uninstall, and then click Remove.
3 Click Next.
4 On the Configure Options panel, verify that the option you want to remove
is not checked, and then click Next.
172 Installing Backup Exec
About updating Backup Exec with LiveUpdate

5 If you are prompted to enter credentials for the Backup Exec service account,
type the correct credentials, and then click Next.
6 Read the installation summary, and then click Install to start the process.
7 When the install wizard has completed, click Finish.
See “Uninstalling Backup Exec” on page 170.

About updating Backup Exec with LiveUpdate

Symantec LiveUpdate, which provides updates, upgrades, and new versions of
Backup Exec, is installed automatically with Backup Exec. If you enable the
automatic update option, you can configure LiveUpdate to poll the main Symantec
Web server on a scheduled interval. The automatic update option only searches
for Backup Exec updates. It does not show updates for other Symantec products
that use LiveUpdate. Likewise, when LiveUpdate is scheduled to automatically
update other Symantec products, it does not search for Backup Exec updates.

Note: By default, LiveUpdate checks for updates every Sunday night at 10pm. If
there is an update, LiveUpdate notifies you with an alert.

In addition to scheduling LiveUpdate, you can also run it manually at any time.
You can access LiveUpdate from several locations in Backup Exec. However, you
cannot access it from the Windows Start menu.

Caution: During the installation and upgrade processes, Backup Exec stops and
starts the SQL Server service several times. Other user-created databases that
use the SQL Server instance are unavailable during the installation or upgrade
process. To avoid such conflicts, you should install Backup Exec into its own SQL
instance.

Backup Exec installs the latest version of LiveUpdate. If a previous version of

LiveUpdate is detected on the computer, Backup Exec upgrades it.
You can view any hot fixes or service packs that are installed on the media server.
See “Viewing installed updates” on page 175.
When LiveUpdate installs updates on the Backup Exec media server, it also
determines if computers on which the Remote Agent for Windows Systems have
the latest updates. If you do not have the latest updates you receive an alert to
install the updates. You can push-install or manually copy those updates to Backup
Exec Remote Agents.
 Installing Backup Exec 173
About updating Backup Exec with LiveUpdate

If LiveUpdate installs any files, the Bkupinst.htm installation log file is updated
with information about those files.
You can use the LiveUpdate Administrator Utility with LiveUpdate. The LiveUpdate
Administrator Utility allows an administrator to modify LiveUpdate so that
network users can download program and virus definition updates from an internal
server rather than going to the Symantec LiveUpdate server over the Internet.
Go to ftp://ftp.symantec.com/public/english_us_canada/liveupdate/luadmin.pdf
See “About scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate” on page 173.
See “Running LiveUpdate manually” on page 175.
See “About the installation log” on page 168.

About scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate

You can schedule LiveUpdate to check for updates as follows:
■ Once on a specific date at a specific time
■ Every day at a specific time
■ Every week on a specific day of the week and at a specific time
■ Every month on a specific day of the month and at a specific time
When you schedule automatic updates through Backup Exec, the settings apply
only to updates for Backup Exec. Changes that you make to the LiveUpdate
schedule for Backup Exec do not affect the schedule for any other software
applications that use LiveUpdate.
At the scheduled time, LiveUpdate automatically connects to the appropriate Web
site, and then determines if your files need to be updated. Depending on the options
that you select, Backup Exec either downloads and installs the files in the proper
location or sends an alert to notify you that updates are available.
Backup Exec sends the following LiveUpdate alerts:

Table 2-17 LiveUpdate alerts

Backup Exec sends this alert When

LiveUpdate Informational Alert An update is installed successfully.

LiveUpdate Warning Alert An update is installed successfully. However,

you must restart the computer.

LiveUpdate Error Alert An update fails to install.

See “Scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate” on page 174.

174 Installing Backup Exec
About updating Backup Exec with LiveUpdate

Scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate

You can schedule LiveUpdate to check for updates for Backup Exec.
See “About scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate” on page 173.
To schedule automatic updates using LiveUpdate
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 On the properties pane, under Settings, click LiveUpdate.
3 Complete the appropriate options.
See “Application settings for LiveUpdate” on page 174.
4 Click OK.

Application settings for LiveUpdate

You can schedule LiveUpdate to check for updates for Backup Exec.
See “Scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate” on page 174.

Table 2-18 Application settings for LiveUpdate

Item Description

Enable scheduled automatic Lets you schedule automatic updates, and then choose the
updates frequency of the updates.

Automatically download Enables Backup Exec to download and install all updates
and install all available that are available without prompting you first.
updates

Only notify me of available Enable Backup Exec to alert you when updates are available.
updates Updates are not downloaded or installed. This option is the
default.

If you select this option, you need to run LiveUpdate

manually to download and install the available updates.

Once Enables Backup Exec to check for new updates only on the
date and time that you specify in the On and At fields.

Daily Enables Backup Exec to check for new updates every day.
In the At field, enter the time to check for new updates.

Weekly Enables Backup Exec to check for new updates once a week.
In the Every field, select the day of the week on which to
check for updates. In the At field, enter the time to check
for new updates.
 Installing Backup Exec 175
About updating Backup Exec with LiveUpdate

Table 2-18 Application settings for LiveUpdate (continued)

Item Description

Monthly Enables Backup Exec to check for new updates once a month.
In the Every field, select the day of the month on which to
check for updates. In the At field, enter the time to check
for new updates.

Interval Lets you set the date and time that you want Backup Exec
to check for new updates.

Running LiveUpdate manually

You can either set a schedule for LiveUpdate or run LiveUpdate manually at any
time to check for updates. You can configure LiveUpdate to run in either Interactive
mode or Express mode. Interactive mode gives you the flexibility to choose which
updates you want to install. Express mode automatically installs all of the Backup
Exec updates. For information about how to change the LiveUpdate mode, see the
LiveUpdate documentation.

Note: By default, LiveUpdate is configured for Interactive mode. If you change it

to Express mode you must cancel the LiveUpdate session and restart it before the
change takes place.

To run LiveUpdate manually

1 On the Tools menu, click LiveUpdate.
2 Select Click here to run LiveUpdate.
3 Do one of the following:

If LiveUpdate is set for Express mode Click Start.

If LiveUpdate is set for Interactive mode Click Next.

See “Scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate” on page 174.

Viewing installed updates

You can view hot fixes and service packs that are installed on a media server. You
must be logged on with administrator privileges.
If a hot fix is installed prior to a service pack, that hot fix no longer displays as
installed since the service pack contains the hot fix.
176 Installing Backup Exec
Viewing license information

A hot fix that is offered after the service pack is released is displayed with the
prior service pack.
To view installed updates
1 On the Help menu, click About.
2 Click Installed Updates.
See “Installed Updates options” on page 176.

Installed Updates options

You can view hot fixes and the service packs that are installed on a media server.
You must be logged on with administrator privileges.
See “Viewing installed updates” on page 175.

Table 2-19 Installed Updates options

Item Description

Installed Updates Lists the hot fixes and the service packs that
are installed on the media server.

Click here to run LiveUpdate Lets you run LiveUpdate to install hot fixes
and service packs.

Click here to view available updates Lets you view the hot fixes and service packs
that are available for download.

Viewing license information

You can view information about the Backup Exec options that are licensed and
installed on a media server. You can also view a list of agents and options that are
available for a trial, as well as how much time is left in each individual trial period.
See “Adding licenses” on page 178.
To view license information
◆ Do one of the following:

To view license information from Do the following in the order listed:

the Help menu
■ On the Help menu, click About.
■ Click License Information.
 Installing Backup Exec 177
Viewing license information

To view license information from Do the following in the order listed:

the media server properties
■ On the navigation bar, click Devices.
■ Select the media server from the tree view.
■ Under General Tasks in the task pane, click
Properties, and then click License
Information.

See “License information options” on page 177.

License information options

You can view information about the Backup Exec options that are licensed and
installed on a media server.
See “Viewing license information” on page 176.

Table 2-20 License Information options

Item Description

Option Lists the names of the available Backup Exec

options.

Licensed Displays Yes if the option is licensed on the media

server. Displays No if the option is not licensed.

Installed Displays Yes if the option is installed on the media

server. Displays No if the option is not installed.

If the option is installed, it may still require some

additional configuration.

Trial Lists the following statuses:

■ Available
■ Expired
■ N/A

If the option is in a trial period, the remaining

number of days in the trial period appears.

Maintenance Contract Information Launches the Maintenance Contract Information

dialog box.

See “Backup Exec maintenance contract

information” on page 181.
178 Installing Backup Exec
Adding licenses

Adding licenses
You can add licenses to activate additional agents or options at any time. If the
trial period runs out on an agent or option, you need to enter a license key to
continue to use it.
For information about how to obtain a license key, contact your reseller, or go to
the following URL:
https://licensing.symantec.com
To add licenses
1 On the Tools menu, click Install Options and License Keys on this Media
Server.
2 Select one of the following methods to enter license keys:

To manually enter Do the following in the order listed:

license keys
■ Type a license key into the license key field.
■ Click Add.
■ Repeat for each license key for each option or agent
that you want to install.

To import license keys Do the following in the order listed:

from a file
■ Click Import from file.
■ Select the besernum.xml file.

3 Click Next.
4 Verify that the additional options are selected for installation, and then click
Next.
5 If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for the additional
options that you want to install. Click Next after each selection.
6 Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
The Backup Exec services stop while the agents or options are installed. If
any active jobs are in progress, you are prompted to stop them, or to wait for
the jobs to finish.
When the installation is complete, the services are restarted.
7 Click Finish.
See “Viewing license information” on page 176.
 Installing Backup Exec 179
Finding installed licenses in your environment

Finding installed licenses in your environment

The License Assessment Tool lets you run a license key scan on the computers on
which the following are installed:
■ Backup Exec 2010
■ Backup Exec System Recovery
Both of these products are Backup Exec installations.
You can also use the License Assessment Tool to view maintenance contract
expiration dates so that you can renew contracts before they expire.
The License Assessment Tool reports maintenance contract information when
the following conditions are met:
■ The media server in the license key scan must run Backup Exec 2010 R2.
■ The media server must have maintenance contract information available.
To obtain this information, on the Backup Exec Administration Console, click
Tools > Licensing and Maintenance Contract Information > Renewal
Assistant.
■ The media server must have a network connection.
See “About Backup Exec maintenance contract information” on page 180.
On each Backup Exec installation for which you run a license key scan, the License
Assessment Tool reviews the resources that are backed up. Resources are files
such as Windows shares, or application databases such as Microsoft SQL Server.
A report compares the number of resources that are backed up with the number
of license keys that are installed.

Note: Scans for time periods and date ranges do not apply to the Backup Exec
Archiving Option. Only the resources that are backed up by Remote Agents are
scanned if you select a time period or date range.

The License Assessment Tool report provides the following information:

■ The number of additional licenses that are recommended for a Backup Exec
installation.
■ The versions of Backup Exec that are installed so that you can consider
purchasing upgrades.
Running the License Assessment Tool does not ensure license compliance. For
more information about licensing, contact your reseller, or go to the following
URL:
180 Installing Backup Exec
About Backup Exec maintenance contract information

https://licensing.symantec.com
To find installed licenses in your environment
1 On the Tools menu, click Licensing and Maintenance Contract Information
> Backup Exec License Assessment Tool.
2 Follow the on-screen prompts.

About Backup Exec maintenance contract information

After you purchase maintenance contracts for your Backup Exec products,
Symantec automatically updates the Symantec Licensing Portal Web site with
your maintenance contract information. Maintenance contract information
includes the contract serial number and the contract expiration date.
You can use the Renewal Assistant to access the maintenance contract expiration
information from within Backup Exec. The Renewal Assistant then uses the
contract expiration information to automatically set Backup Exec alerts that
remind you to renew the maintenance contracts before they expire. Reminder
alerts are set at 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day intervals, based on the expiration date
of the maintenance contract.
To retrieve the contract expiration dates, you enter your maintenance contract
serial numbers in the Renewal Assistant. The Renewal Assistent connects to the
Symantec Licensing Portal Web site, at which point you may be prompted to enter
customer and technical contact information. The Renewal Assistant then retrieves
the maintenance contract information for each contract that you have purchased.

Note: The Renewal Assistant requires an active Internet connection on the media
server where you run the Renewal Assistant. If the Internet is unavailable, you
can use the Renewal Assistant to set a one-time manual alert for the contracts
that appear on your purchase certificate.

All Backup Exec products and maintenance contracts are assigned Symantec serial
numbers. The serial numbers appear on the printed certificate that you receive
with your order. To determine the correct serial numbers to enter in the Renewal
Assistant, look for the Maintenance/Subscription columns on your certificate.
Each maintenance contract specifies a start date and an end date; these dates
appear in the Maintenance/Subscription columns.
Maintenance contract serial numbers consist of a letter and a series of numbers.
They are not the same as Backup Exec license keys, nor do they use the same
format as license keys.
 Installing Backup Exec 181
About Backup Exec maintenance contract information

Table 2-21 Backup Exec serial number formats and license key formats

Serial number format License key format

M0000000000 00-A00-0000-000000

See “Running the Backup Exec Renewal Assistant” on page 181.

See “Viewing Backup Exec maintenance contract information” on page 181.

Running the Backup Exec Renewal Assistant

You can run the Renewal Assistant at any time to enter maintenance contract
serial numbers.
See “About Backup Exec maintenance contract information” on page 180.
To run the Backup Exec Renewal Assistant
1 On the Tools menu, click Licensing and Maintenance Contract Information
> Renewal Assistant.
2 Follow the on-screen directions.

Viewing Backup Exec maintenance contract information

You can view maintenance contract information after you enter contract serial
numbers in the Renewal Assistant. Backup Exec stores maintenance contract
details locally on the media server after it retrieves the information from the
Symantec Licensing Portal Web site.
See “About Backup Exec maintenance contract information” on page 180.
See “Running the Backup Exec Renewal Assistant” on page 181.
To view Backup Exec maintenance contract information
1 On the Tools menu, click Licensing and Maintenance Contract Information
> Maintenance Contract Information.
See “Backup Exec maintenance contract information” on page 181.
2 Click OK.

Backup Exec maintenance contract information

You can view the maintenance contract information that Backup Exec has retrieved
from the Symantec Licensing Portal Web site.
182 Installing Backup Exec
About upgrading from previous versions of Backup Exec

Note: A maintenance contract serial number must be entered in the Renewal

Assistant before the contract information appears.

See “About Backup Exec maintenance contract information” on page 180.

See “Running the Backup Exec Renewal Assistant” on page 181.
See “Viewing Backup Exec maintenance contract information” on page 181.

Table 2-22 Maintenance contract information details

Item Description

Feature Shows the name of the feature that the

maintenance contract covers.

A green check icon indicates that the

maintenance contract for the feature is valid.

A red X icon indicates that the maintenance

contract for the feature has expired.

Serial Number Shows the serial number of the maintenance

contract.

Expiration Date Shows the expiration date of the

maintenance contract.

Renewal Assistant Starts the Renewal Assistant.

About upgrading from previous versions of Backup

Exec
You can use the Backup Exec installation media to upgrade from Backup Exec
version 11d and later to the current version. No separate upgrade utility is
necessary. The current version of Backup Exec replaces any previous versions.
Separate installations of different versions cannot exist on the same computer.
Most settings and all catalogs and all data directories from previous versions of
Backup Exec are kept, unless you choose to remove them. Backup Exc 2010 R2
can read and restore data from any previous version of Backup Exec or Backup
Exec for NetWare, except where Symantec has made end-of-life decisions.
When you upgrade, Backup Exec automatically converts your existing definitions,
configurations, and jobs to the current version. If any aspect of the data migration
fails, then Backup Exec displays an error message stating that the upgrade did
not complete successfully. Backup Exec provides you with the choice to either
return to the previous version of Backup Exec or to continue with the upgrade. If
 Installing Backup Exec 183
About upgrading from previous versions of Backup Exec

you choose to continue with the upgrade, then devices, media, and jobs are not
migrated from the previous version of Backup Exec.
Backup Exec 2010 R2 provides backward compatibility as follows:
■ Backup Exec 2010 R2 can communicate with Backup Exec 12 Remote Agent
for Windows Systems and later.
■ Backup Exec 2010 R2 can communicate with Backup Exec for NetWare 9.2
Remote Agent.
■ Backup Exec 2010 R2 Central Admin Server Option server can communicate
with Backup Exec 12.5 (with the appropriate patch) or Backup Exec 2010 (with
the appropriate patch) for the purpose of rolling upgrades.
■ Backup Exec 2010 R2 Command Line Applet is compatible with Backup Exec
12 and later.
A Backup Exec 2010 R2 Remote Administration Console can manage media servers
on which Backup Exec version 11d and later is installed. However, if the media
server uses a previous version of Backup Exec, you cannot use any of the new
features of the current version. If you want to use the features of the current
version, you must use the current version on both the Remote Administration
Console and the media server. A Remote Administration Console that uses a
previous version of Backup Exec cannot be used with a media server on which the
current version is installed. For example, a Backup Exec 2010 Remote
Administration Console cannot manage a Backup Exec 2010 R2 media server.
However, a Backup Exec 2010 R2 Remote Administration Console is
backward-compatible with a Backup Exec 2010 Remote Administration Console.
Before you upgrade Backup Exec, do the following:
■ Delete the job histories and the catalogs that you no longer need to shorten
the upgrade window.
■ Run a database maintenance job.
■ Upgrade any existing instances of SQL Server 2000 to either SQL Server 2005
with SP3 or to SQL Server 2008.
You cannot change the configuration of your media servers during an installation.
For example, you cannot change a central administration server to a managed
media server. If you want to change the configuration of your media servers, do
it either before or after you upgrade to the current version. You cannot change
the database location during the upgrade process. If you want to change the
database location after the upgrade, use BEUtility.
To upgrade the options that are installed on remote computers, you must reinstall
them. Options that are push-installed are not upgraded until you reinstall them.
184 Installing Backup Exec
Post-installation tasks

The Remote Agent for Windows Systems and the Advanced Open File Option are
push-installed.

Note: If you upgrade from a previous version of Backup Exec that uses a
non-English version of Windows, you must download the SQL Express SP3 setup
file for that language from the Microsoft Web site.

See “Installing a typical installation of Backup Exec” on page 118.

See “Installing a custom installation of Backup Exec” on page 121.

Post-installation tasks
For best results before starting Backup Exec, do the following:
■ Make sure that your storage devices are connected and configured properly.
See “About storage devices” on page 449.
■ Decide if your backup will be to a tape device or a disk device. You can configure
both devices when you prepare your Backup Exec environment.
Note the following:
■ If you’re backing up to a tape device, verify that the device is supported.
You can install drivers for the devices when you configure your Backup
Exec environment.
■ If you’re backing up to a disk device using the Backup-to-Disk feature,
decide where you can create a backup folder. You should create it on a disk
that won’t be included in the backup jobs and that has enough free space
to contain the backup job.
See “About backup-to-disk folders ” on page 506.

■ Understand how Backup Exec provides overwrite protection for your media.
See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.
■ Understand the default media set and its four-week overwrite protection
period.
See “About media in Backup Exec” on page 225.
■ Learn about creating new media sets with weekly, monthly, or quarterly
retention periods.
See “About the default media set” on page 232.
■ Decide which resource credential you want your Backup Exec logon account
to use when browsing and making backup selections. You can use an existing
Backup Exec logon account, or create a new one.
 Installing Backup Exec 185
Post-installation tasks

See “Creating a Backup Exec logon account” on page 191.

■ Decide the format that you want to display all reports, either HTML or Adobe
Portable Document Format (PDF). The default setting is HTML.
See “Editing application settings for reports” on page 735.
186 Installing Backup Exec
Post-installation tasks
 Chapter 3
Configuring Backup Exec
settings and options
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About configuring Backup Exec

■ About configuring logon accounts

■ About Backup Exec defaults

■ About job priority

■ Changing the default device and media set for jobs

■ Changing application settings for Backup Exec preferences

■ Copying configuration settings to another media server

■ Copying logon account information

■ About audit logs

■ About database maintenance

■ Viewing the location of Backup Exec databases

■ About the Symantec RSS Reader

■ Hiding columns

■ Showing a hidden column

■ Rearranging columns

■ Sorting column information

188 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About configuring Backup Exec

■ Viewing properties

About configuring Backup Exec

During installation and prior to first use, you configure several Backup Exec
features, such as a default logon account, database information, and audit log
settings. Configuring Backup Exec lets you standardize Backup Exec before jobs
are created and run.
You can perform the following initial operations:
■ Configure logon accounts.
See “About configuring logon accounts” on page 188.
■ Set the default Backup Exec logon account.
See “About the default Backup Exec logon account” on page 189.
■ Create new Backup Exec system logon accounts.
See “About the Backup Exec System Logon Account” on page 193.
■ Copy configuration settings and logon information to another media server.
See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.
■ Configure audit logs.
See “About audit logs” on page 209.
■ Configure database maintenance.
See “Configuring database maintenance” on page 214.
■ Configure and organize columns in Backup Exec.
See “Hiding columns” on page 220.

About configuring logon accounts

A Backup Exec logon account stores the credentials of a user account that you
use to access a resource, such as a Windows computer. Backup Exec logon accounts
enable Backup Exec to manage user names and passwords and can be used to
browse resources or process jobs. Using Backup Exec logon accounts enables you
to apply credential changes to the jobs that use them.
Backup Exec logon accounts are used to browse local and remote resources.
Whenever the Backup Exec logon credentials are passed between the media server
and the remote resource, the credentials are encrypted.
Backup Exec logon accounts can also be associated with selection list entries at
the device level such as shares, databases, etc. If you need to edit the credentials,
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 189
About configuring logon accounts

you can edit the Backup Exec logon account and the changes will be applied to
the selected resources that use the Backup Exec logon account.
Backup Exec logon accounts are not user accounts. When you create a Backup
Exec logon account, an entry for the account is entered into the Backup Exec
database; no operating system accounts are created. If your user account
credentials change, you must update the Backup Exec logon account with the new
information. Backup Exec does not maintain a connection with the user account.
You can view, create, delete, edit, and replace Backup Exec logon accounts.
The following types of logon accounts are included in Backup Exec:

Table 3-1 Types of logon accounts

Type of logon account Description

Default Backup Exec logon Used to browse local and remote resources, make backup
account job selections, and restore data.

See “About the default Backup Exec logon account”

on page 189.

Backup Exec system logon Used to access most or all of your resources. It contains
account the Backup Exec Services credentials.

See “About the Backup Exec System Logon Account”

on page 193.

Backup Exec logon account Used to manage Backup Exec user names and passwords,
browse local and remote resources, process jobs, and
apply credential changes to the jobs that use them.

See “Creating a Backup Exec logon account” on page 191.

See “Creating a Backup Exec logon account” on page 191.

About the default Backup Exec logon account

The default Backup Exec logon account enables you to browse, make selections,
or restore data. The first time you start Backup Exec, you must specify a default
Backup Exec logon account using the Logon Account Wizard. You can select an
existing Backup Exec logon account or create a new one.
You can create multiple Backup Exec logon accounts; however, each Backup Exec
user can only have one default Backup Exec logon account.
Your default Backup Exec logon account enables you to perform the following:
■ Browse resources. Your default Backup Exec logon account enables you to
browse local and remote resources when you create backup jobs. To browse
190 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About configuring logon accounts

resources, each user must have a default Backup Exec logon account that is
associated with their user account. The Backup Exec logon account does not
have to be the same user name as the user that is used to log on to Backup
Exec.
For example, you are logged on to a media server named MEDIASERVER as
the local Windows administrator. When you start Backup Exec, you are
prompted to create a default Backup Exec logon account for the local
administrator because one does not exist. You can create a Backup Exec logon
account for the local administrator that has the credentials for a domain
administrator. The Backup Exec logon account will have the following
properties:
User name: DOMAIN\Administrator
Description: MEDIASERVER\Administrator Default Account
Owner: MEDIASERVER\Administrator
When you change your default Backup Exec logon account, you can use your
new default Backup Exec logon account to browse resources immediately; you
do not have to restart your system in order for the changes take effect.
■ Make backup selections. You can select a different Backup Exec logon account
when you make selections for backup. If your default logon account does not
have rights, the Logon Account Selection dialog box appears and enables you
to create or select a different Backup Exec logon account. You can also change
the Backup Exec logon account when making backup selections using the
Connect As command in the context menu.
See “How to use Backup Exec logon accounts for SQL resources” on page 1276.
See “Requirements for accessing Exchange mailboxes ” on page 1121.
■ Restore. You can assign Backup Exec logon accounts to resources when you
create restore jobs. The default Backup Exec logon account is used unless you
choose a different Backup Exec logon account when you create the restore job,
in Resource Credentials in the Restore Job Properties.
See “Changing your default Backup Exec logon account” on page 197.
See “About Backup Exec restricted logon accounts” on page 190.

About Backup Exec restricted logon accounts

Backup Exec logon accounts can be common or restricted. When you create a
Backup Exec logon account, you can designate it as a restricted account. To use
a restricted logon account, you must be the owner of the logon account or you
must know the password for the logon account. The person who created the logon
account is the owner. If you authorize only a few people to back up or restore data,
you can make the logon account a restricted logon account.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 191
About configuring logon accounts

The main reasons to restrict a logon account are as follows:

■ To help you limit access to the resources available for backup.
■ To help you limit the computers to which you can restore.
When you use a restricted logon account to select the resources for a job, the logon
account information is saved with the selection list. Anyone who tries to edit the
job must provide the password to the restricted logon account. Backup Exec loads
the selections for that job only when the password for the restricted logon account
is provided.
See “Creating a Backup Exec logon account” on page 191.
See “Editing a Backup Exec logon account” on page 194.

Creating a Backup Exec logon account

You can create Backup Exec logon accounts using the Logon Account Wizard,
which guides you through the creation of a Backup Exec logon account, or by
using the Logon Account Management dialog. You can enter Backup Exec logon
account property information when you create the Backup Exec logon account;
however, Backup Exec assigns the Backup Exec logon account owner to the user
name you used to log on to Backup Exec. The owner of the Backup Exec logon
account cannot be modified.
See “Editing a Backup Exec logon account” on page 194.
See “Replacing a Backup Exec logon account” on page 196.
See “Changing your default Backup Exec logon account” on page 197.
To create a Backup Exec logon account
◆ Do one of the following:

To create a new logon account by using On the Tools menu, click Wizards > Logon
the Logon Account wizard Account Wizard..

The wizard guides you through the setup

process.
192 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About configuring logon accounts

To create a new logon account manually Do the following in the order listed:
1 On the Network menu, click Logon
Accounts.

2 Click New.

3 Enter the appropriate options.

See “Add Logon Credentials options”

on page 192.

Add Logon Credentials options

You can enter Backup Exec logon account property information when you create
the Backup Exec logon account.
See “Creating a Backup Exec logon account” on page 191.

Table 3-2 New Logon Account options

Item Description

User name Indicates the fully qualified user name for the Backup
Exec logon account. For example,
DOMAIN\Administrator. The user name is provided
when you attempt to connect to a resource. The user
name is not case sensitive for the resources that are
accessed.

Password Indicates the password for the account. The password

you enter is encrypted for security. You can leave this
field blank if this Backup Exec logon account does not
need a password.

Confirm password Verifies the password. The password must match the
password you typed in the Password field.

Account Name Indicates the unique name for the Backup Exec logon
account. The user name is automatically added if you
do not enter information into the field.

Notes Indicates how the Backup Exec logon account will be

used.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 193
About configuring logon accounts

Table 3-2 New Logon Account options (continued)

Item Description

This is a restricted logon Enables the Backup Exec logon account to be used only
account by the owner of the logon account and those who know
the password. If this is not selected, the Backup Exec
logon account will be a common account. Common
accounts are shared accounts that can be accessed by
all users.

See “About Backup Exec restricted logon accounts”

on page 190.

This is my default logon account Makes this account your default Backup Exec logon
account, which is used to browse, make selections, or
restore data on your local and remote resources.

About the Backup Exec System Logon Account

The Backup Exec System Logon Account (SLA) is created when you install Backup
Exec. When the SLA is created, the user name and password match the credentials
provided during install for the Backup Exec Services credentials. The owner of
the SLA is the user that installed Backup Exec and is a common account by default.
Common accounts are shared accounts that can be accessed by all users.
The Backup Exec System Logon Account may have access to most or all of your
resources since it contains the Backup Exec Services credentials. If you want to
make Backup Exec more secure, you can change the SLA to be a restricted account.
You can also delete it after making another logon account the default. However,
if you delete the SLA, the jobs in which it is used may fail. If the SLA is deleted,
you can re-create it using the Logon Account Management dialog box.
The SLA is used for the following tasks and jobs:
■ Jobs migrated from a previous version of Backup Exec
■ Duplicate backup data jobs
■ Command Line Applet (bemcmd.exe)
■ Backup Exec Agent for SAP Applications
See “Creating a new Backup Exec System Logon Account” on page 197.
See “Creating a Backup Exec logon account” on page 191.
See “Editing a Backup Exec logon account” on page 194.
See “Replacing a Backup Exec logon account” on page 196.
194 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About configuring logon accounts

See “Deleting a Backup Exec logon account” on page 196.

See “Changing your default Backup Exec logon account” on page 197.
See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.

Editing a Backup Exec logon account

When you edit a Backup Exec logon account, the changes are automatically applied
to all the resources that use the Backup Exec logon account. Changes made to a
Backup Exec logon account are applied immediately. You do not have to restart
your system for the changes to take effect.
You can edit the following properties for a Backup Exec logon account:
■ Type (restricted or common)
■ Account name
■ Password
■ User name
■ Notes
See “Changing your default Backup Exec logon account” on page 197.
To edit a Backup Exec logon account
1 On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
2 Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to change, and then click
Edit.
If you are not logged on to Backup Exec with the same user name as the Backup
Exec logon account owner, you must provide the password before you can
edit the account.
3 Modify the Backup Exec logon account properties as needed.
See “Edit Logon Credentials options” on page 194.
4 On the Edit Logon Credentials dialog box, click OK.

Edit Logon Credentials options

You can change the properties of an existing logon account.
See “Editing a Backup Exec logon account” on page 194.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 195
About configuring logon accounts

Table 3-3 Edit Logon Credentials options

Item Description

User name Indicates the fully qualified user name for the
Backup Exec logon account. For example,
DOMAIN\Administrator. The user name is provided
when you attempt to connect to a resource. The user
name you enter is not case sensitive for the
resources that are accessed.

Change Password Enables you to change the password for the account.
The password you enter is encrypted for security.

Account Name Indicates the unique name for the Backup Exec
logon account. The user name is automatically
added if you do not enter information into the field.

Notes Indicates how the Backup Exec logon account will

be used.

This is a restricted logon account Enables the Backup Exec logon account to be used
only by the owner of the logon account and those
who know the password. If this is not selected, the
Backup Exec logon account will be a common
account. Common accounts are shared accounts
that can be accessed by all users.

See “About Backup Exec restricted logon accounts”

on page 190.

This is my default logon account Makes this account your default Backup Exec logon
account used to browse, make selections, or restore
data on your local and remote resources.

Changing a Backup Exec logon account password

You can change a Backup Exec logon account password using the following steps.
Changes made to a Backup Exec logon account password are applied immediately.
See “About configuring logon accounts” on page 188.
196 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About configuring logon accounts

To change a Backup Exec logon account password

1 On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
2 Select the Backup Exec logon account to change, and then click Edit.
If you are not logged on to Backup Exec with the same user name as the Backup
Exec logon account owner, you must provide the password before you can
edit the account.
3 Click Change password.
4 In the Password field, type a new password.
5 In the Confirm field, re-type the password, and then click OK.
6 On the Edit Logon Credentials dialog box, click OK.
7 On the Logon Account Management dialog box, click OK.

Replacing a Backup Exec logon account

You can replace a Backup Exec logon account within all existing jobs and selections
lists. The resources and selections lists in existing jobs that use the Backup Exec
logon account will be updated to use the new Backup Exec logon account. If the
new Backup Exec logon account is restricted, you must provide the password.
See “About configuring logon accounts” on page 188.
To replace a Backup Exec logon account
1 On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
2 Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to replace, and then click
Replace.
3 Select the Backup Exec logon account with which you want to replace the
selected Backup Exec logon account.
If the Backup Exec logon account is restricted and you are not logged on to
Backup Exec with the same user name as the Backup Exec logon account
owner, you must provide the password before you can edit the account.
4 Click OK.

Deleting a Backup Exec logon account

You cannot delete a Backup Exec logon account in the following situations:
■ It is being referenced by a job.
■ It is owned by a user who is logged on to the media server.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 197
About configuring logon accounts

■ It is set as the default Backup Exec logon account of a user who is logged on
to the media server.
You can delete a Backup Exec logon account when the owner is logged off and all
users who have it set as their default logon account are logged off.
See “About configuring logon accounts” on page 188.
To delete a Backup Exec logon account
1 On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
2 Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to delete, and then click
Delete.
3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

Changing your default Backup Exec logon account

You can change your default Backup Exec logon account that enables you to
browse, make selections, or restore data.
See “About the default Backup Exec logon account” on page 189.
To change your default Backup Exec logon account
1 On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
2 Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to use as your default Backup
Exec logon account, and then do one of the following:
■ Click Set as Default.
■ Click Edit, select This is my default logon account, and then click OK.

Creating a new Backup Exec System Logon Account

The Backup Exec System Logon Account enables you to perform several operations.
It is also used with Backup Exec Agent for SAP Applications and Command Line
Applet. If you delete the Backup Exec System Logon Account, you should create
a new one that enables you to perform the specified operations and use the agent
and applet.
See “About the Backup Exec System Logon Account” on page 193.
198 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About Backup Exec defaults

To create a new Backup Exec System Logon Account

1 On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
2 Click System Account.
3 Select the appropriate options, and then click OK to create the system logon
account.
See “Edit Logon Credentials options” on page 194.

About Backup Exec defaults

When you start Backup Exec for the first time, defaults are already configured.
You can adjust the defaults to meet the needs of your environment. Default settings
are available for various types of jobs, such as backup, restore, and test run. You
also can set defaults for catalogs, media management, bar code rules, and database
maintenance.
The defaults that will probably affect you the most are the backup job defaults.
You can change many of these defaults after devising a media rotation strategy
and creating additional media sets and drive pools. In the short term though, you
can run Backup Exec and backup and restore jobs safely by using only the defaults
set during installation.
See the following sections for more information about default options:

Table 3-4 Backup Exec default options

Item Description

Jobs See “Setting default backup options” on page 397.

See “Setting defaults for restore jobs” on page 652.

See “Setting test run default options” on page 393.

See “Changing application settings for the catalogs” on page 615.

See “Creating separate selection lists for each computer or resource”

on page 315.

See “Setting priority and availability windows for selection lists”

on page 313.

Customizing See “Setting default pre/post commands” on page 406.

Backup Exec
See “Setting default backup network and security options” on page 410.

Configuring See “Configuring database maintenance” on page 214.

Backup Exec
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 199
About job priority

Table 3-4 Backup Exec default options (continued)

Item Description

Reports See “Editing application settings for reports” on page 735.

Administrating See “Configuring default schedule options” on page 372.

Backup Exec
See “Using checkpoint restart on Microsoft Cluster Server failover”
on page 838.

See “Setting thresholds to recover jobs” on page 609.

See “About scheduling automatic updates using LiveUpdate”

on page 173.

Device and Media See “Changing application settings for Backup Exec preferences”
on page 201.

See “Media locations and vaults” on page 256.

See “Bar code rules in mixed media libraries” on page 251.

Options See “Setting offhost backup options for a backup job” on page 941.

See “Setting default options for the Advanced Open File Option”
on page 959.

See “Setting default backup and restore options for SQL” on page 1285.

See “How to prepare for disaster recovery of Exchange Server”

on page 1185.

See “Configuring default Lotus Domino options” on page 1089.

See “Setting default options for the Remote Agent for NetWare
Systems ” on page 1965.

See “Setting default options for SharePoint Server 2003 and later”
on page 1216.

About job priority

You can set the priority of access to the devices for Backup Exec jobs.
You can choose from the following levels of priority:
■ Highest
■ High
■ Medium
■ Low
200 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Changing the default device and media set for jobs

■ Lowest
This option is most useful if there are limited devices in your environment, but
you want certain jobs to have priority access to the devices. A ready job that has
a higher priority runs before a ready job that has a lower priority. A ready job that
has a higher priority also runs before a ready job that has an earlier scheduled
start time.
If multiple jobs are ready to run but must wait for a device to become available,
then Backup Exec determines which jobs to run first. To make this determination,
Backup Exec reviews the job priority and the scheduled start time of the job.

Changing the default device and media set for jobs

You can set the default device and media set to use for each job that you create.
You can change the defaults for each job individually.
To change the default device and media set for jobs
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 On the Options - Set Application Defaults dialog box, under Job Defaults,
click Device and Media.
3 In theDevice field, select the device that you want to use as the default device
for jobs.
4 If you have installed the Deduplication Option, select the default deduplication
method to use for deduplication backup jobs.
5 In the Media set field, select the media set that you want to be used as the
default media set for jobs.
See “About the Deduplication Option” on page 1588.

Default Device and Media options

You can set the default device and media set to use for each job that you create.
See “Changing the default device and media set for jobs” on page 200.

Table 3-5 Default Device and Media options

Item Description

Device Indicates the device that you want to use as the default device for jobs.
You can change this default for each job individually.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 201
Changing application settings for Backup Exec preferences

Table 3-5 Default Device and Media options (continued)

Item Description

Client-side Enables a remote computer that is configured as a Remote Agent for

deduplication Deduplication to deduplicate data and then send only the unique data
to the deduplication device that is selected in the Device field.
Note: This option is available only if the Deduplication Option is
installed and a deduplication device is selected in the Device field.

See “About client-side deduplication” on page 1610.

Use media server Enables the media server to deduplicate data. Media server
deduplication deduplication reduces the size of backups, which reduces storage
requirements. If the media server does not support deduplication, the
data is deduplicated on an intelligent disk device, such as Symantec
PureDisk or a device from a third-party vendor.
Note: This option is available only if the Deduplication Option is
installed and a deduplication device is selected in the Device field.

See “About the Deduplication Option” on page 1588.

Media set Indicates the media set that you want to be used as the default media
set for jobs. You can change this default for each job individually.

Changing application settings for Backup Exec

preferences
You can change the settings for how you prefer Backup Exec to display various
screens, indicators, and alerts.
To change application settings for Backup Exec preferences
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Preferences.
3 Select the appropriate options.
See “ Application settings for Backup Exec preferences” on page 201.

Application settings for Backup Exec preferences

You can change the settings for how you prefer Backup Exec to display various
screens, indicators, and alerts.
See “Changing application settings for Backup Exec preferences” on page 201.
202 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Changing application settings for Backup Exec preferences

Table 3-6 Application settings for Backup Exec preferences

Item Description

Show splash screen at Displays the splash screen when you start Backup Exec. If
startup this option is cleared, the Backup Exec Administration
Console is the first thing to display on startup.

Include robotic libraries in Enables Backup Exec to inventory all of the slots in a robotic
inventory job when Backup library when Backup Exec’s services are starting. Depending
Exec services start up on the number of storage devices that are attached to your
system, this process may take a few minutes.

Display the job summary Enables Backup Exec to display a summary of the job options
before creating a job you selected before submitting the job to the job queue.

Create jobs after a new Enables Backup Exec to automatically display the Create or
policy is created Delete Policy Jobs dialog box after you create a policy. You
can use the Create or Delete Policy Jobs dialog box to create
jobs by associating selection lists with policies.

Display progress indicators Displays the percentage complete number while a backup
for backup jobs. This job processes. These indicators appear in the Job Activity
requires additional time to tab, and they allow you to monitor the progress of the active
pre-scan devices. job. Backups might take a little longer to complete when
this option is selected because the target resources must be
scanned to determine the amount of data to be backed up.

Due to the time required to scan the target resources,

selecting this option when backing up remote resources is
not recommended.

Enable percentage bars Displays a shaded percentage complete bar in the Percent
when available Complete column for active jobs. The percentage complete
bar displays in addition to the percentage complete number.

If the color depth on your computer is set to 256 or less, this

option may appear as unavailable.

Enable ScreenTips Enables or disables ScreenTips, which provide brief

explanations of selected items on the Administration
Console. When ScreenTips are enabled, you can view them
by holding the mouse pointer on an item. Only selected
items have ScreenTips.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 203
Changing application settings for Backup Exec preferences

Table 3-6 Application settings for Backup Exec preferences (continued)

Item Description

Participate in the Backup Enables you to participate in the Symantec Backup Exec
Exec product improvement product improvement program.
program
General Backup Exec usage and statistical information is
periodically collected and sent anonymously to Symantec.
Symantec uses the information to help improve the Backup
Exec customer experience.
Note: Although usage and statistical information is
collected, Symantec never collects specific user information.

Automatically display new Enables alerts to automatically appear on the desktop when
alerts they are sent. Alerts that require a response always appear
on the Backup Exec console.

If you do not choose this option, you are required to view

and respond to alerts through the Alerts view.

Play sound after receiving Enables Backup Exec to send an audible tone when an alert
alert is generated. Information about alerts can be found in the
Alerts view.

Shade alternate rows in Enables or disables highlighting on every other row in

Backup Exec views various lists, such as the current jobs and job history lists
on the Job Monitor. Highlighting facilitates viewing of long
lists. This option is selected by default.
If the color depth on your computer is set to 256 or less, this
option may appear as unavailable.

Set contrast of shading Sets the darkness of the shading in the rows, if you selected
the Shade alternate rows in Backup Exec views option.

Send an alert on this date as Lets you select the date on which you want to receive a
a reminder to renew your reminder to renew your maintenance contracts for Backup
maintenance contracts Exec features that are installed.

Symantec recommends that you keep your maintenance

contracts current for the Backup Exec products that are
installed. Maintenance contracts ensure that you have
access to the latest upgrades and to technical support. If
your maintenance contracts expire, your entitlement to
technical support also expires, and upgrades are no longer
automatically sent.
204 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Copying configuration settings to another media server

Copying configuration settings to another media

server
You can copy configuration settings and logon information from one media server
to another. This copy ability allows you to quickly set up a group of media servers
with the same configuration or logon settings.
See “Copying logon account information” on page 208.
To copy configuration settings and logon information to other media servers, the
Copy Server Configurations feature must be installed.
See “Push-installing the Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Option to remote
computers” on page 136.
To copy configuration settings to another media server
1 On the Tools menu, click Copy Settings to Media Servers.
2 Select the appropriate settings to copy.
See “Copy Settings options” on page 207.
3 Do one of the following:

If the media server to which you want to Select the name of the media server.
copy the setting appears in the
Destination media servers list

If the media server to which you want to Do one of the following:

copy the settings does not appear in the
■ Click Add to add a media server to the
Destination media servers list
list. After you add the media server,
you can select it as a destination.
See “Add Server options in a CASO
environment” on page 207.
See “Add Server options in a
non-CASO environment” on page 205.
■ Click Import List to add multiple
media servers from a list. After you
add the list, you can select any of the
media servers on the list as a
destination.

4 Click OK.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 205
Copying configuration settings to another media server

Adding multiple destination media servers by importing a list

You can copy some settings from one media server to another media server. If
the media server to which you want to copy the settings does not appear in the
Destination media servers list on the Copy Settings dialog box, you can add it by
importing a list. After you add a media server to the Destination media servers
list, you can select it as a destination.
See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.
To add multiple destination media servers by importing a list
1 On the Tools menu, click Copy Settings to Media Servers.
2 On the Copy Settings dialog box, click Import List.
3 Browse to select the list, and then click Open.
4 Click OK.

Adding a destination media server in a non-CASO environment

You can copy some settings from one media server to another media server. If
the media server to which you want to copy the settings does not appear in the
Destination media servers list on the Copy Settings dialog box, you can add it.
After you add a media server to the Destination media servers list, you can select
it as a destination.
See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.
To add a destination media server in a non-CASO environment
1 On the Tools menu, click Copy Settings to Media Servers.
2 Click Add.
3 Enter the name of the media server.
4 If necessary, click Change Logon Account and select or enter the correct
logon account information
See “About configuring logon accounts” on page 188.
Changing a logon account does not permanently change the logon account
for each selected media server.
5 Click OK.

Add Server options in a non-CASO environment

You can use the Add Server options dialog box to add media servers to which you
want to copy settings.
206 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Copying configuration settings to another media server

See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.

See “Adding a destination media server in a CASO environment” on page 206.

Table 3-7 Add Server options in a non-CASO environment

Item Description

Media server name Indicates the name of the media server that
you want to add to the Destination media
servers list on the Copy Setting dialog box.

Logon account to use to connect to the Shows the name of the logon account that
media server is used to access the media servers you
selected.

Change Logon Account Lets you change the logon account that
Backup Exec uses to access the media servers
you selected.

Adding a destination media server in a CASO environment

You can copy some settings from one media server to another media server. If
the media server to which you want to copy the settings does not appear in the
Destination media servers list on the Copy Settings dialog box, you can add it.
After you add a media server to the Destination media servers list, you can select
it as a destination.
See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.
To add a destination media server in a CASO environment
1 On the Tools menu, click Copy Settings to Media Servers.
2 Click Add.
3 Select the appropriate options.
See “Add Server options in a CASO environment” on page 207.
4 If necessary, click Change Logon Account and select or enter the correct
logon account information to be used to complete the copy operation.
See “About configuring logon accounts” on page 188.
Changing a logon account's credentials for a copy operation does not
permanently change the logon account.
5 Click OK.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 207
Copying configuration settings to another media server

Add Server options in a CASO environment

You can use the Add Server options dialog box to add media servers to which you
want to copy settings.
See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.
See “Adding a destination media server in a CASO environment” on page 206.

Table 3-8 Add Server options in a CASO environment

Item Description

Add an individual media server Lets you select a single media server to add
to the Destination media servers list on the
Copy Settings dialog box. After you add the
name of the media server, you can then copy
settings to it.

Media server name Indicates the name of the media server that
you want to add to the Destination media
servers list on the Copy Setting dialog box.

Add all managed media servers Lets you add all of the managed media
servers in your environment to the
Destination media servers list on the Copy
Settings dialog box. This option lets you copy
settings to any managed media server.

Logon account to use to connect to the Shows the name of the logon account that
media servers is used to access the media servers you
selected.

Change Logon Account Lets you change the logon account that
Backup Exec uses to access the media servers
you selected.

Copy Settings options

On the Copy Settings dialog box, you can select the type of settings to copy to
another media server.
See “Copying configuration settings to another media server” on page 204.
208 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Copying logon account information

Table 3-9 Copy Settings options

Item Description

Default job options Lets you copy default job options from this
media server to another media server.

Default schedule Lets you copy the default schedule settings

from this media server to another media
server.

Error-handling rules Lets you copy error-handling rules from this

media server to another media server.

Alert configuration Lets you copy the alert configuration from

this media server to another media server.

Add Lets you add a media server to the

Destination media servers list. After you
add a media server to the list, you can copy
settings to it.

Edit Lets you change the logon account that is

used to connect to the selected media server.

Remove Lets you remove the selected media server

from the Destination media servers list.

Import List Lets you import a list of media servers to the

Destination media servers list. After you
add media servers to the list, you can copy
settings to them.

Copying logon account information

You can copy logon account information to a different media server.
To copy logon accounts information
1 From the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
2 Select the logon account information you want to copy, and then click Copy
to Servers.
3 In the Server Name field, enter the name of the media server you want to
copy the logon account information to, and then click Add.
4 Click OK.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 209
About audit logs

Copy Logon Account options

You can copy logon account information to a different media server.
See “Copying logon account information” on page 208.

Table 3-10 Copy Logon Account options

Item Description

Server Name Indicates the name of the media server you want to copy the logon
account information to, and then click Add.

Add Adds the media server from the Server Name field to the list of media
servers.

Remove Removes a media server from the list.

Import List Imports a list of media servers to be added to the media servers in the
list. The list should include only the media server name, with one per
line.

Logon Account Specifies the logon account to use when connecting to the media
servers in the list.

If an account with Overwrites logon accounts for an existing job having the same name.
this description This option only appears if you are copying a job to another media
already exists on server.
the destination
server, overwrite
it

About audit logs

Use audit logs to examine and review information about operations that have
been performed in Backup Exec. The audit log displays the date and time of the
activity, who performed it, what the activity was, and a description of the activity.
You can view information about activities that occur for all or any of the following:
■ Alerts
■ Audit logs
■ Devices and media
■ Encryption keys
■ Error-handling rules
■ Jobs
210 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About audit logs

■ Logon accounts
■ Policies and job templates
■ Selection lists
■ Server configuration
You can delete the audit logs as part of the Backup Exec database maintenance,
and you can save the audit log to a file. Changes made to the audit log, such as
when database maintenance occurs, can also be displayed in the audit log.
See “Configuring the audit log” on page 210.
See “Viewing the audit log” on page 211.
See “Removing entries from the audit log” on page 212.
See “Saving the audit log to a file” on page 213.

Configuring the audit log

Configure the audit log to display information about specific operations that are
performed on items in Backup Exec.
See “About audit logs” on page 209.
See “Viewing the audit log” on page 211.
To configure the audit log
1 On the Tools menu, click Audit Log.
2 Click Configure Logging.
3 On the Audit Log Configuration dialog box, select the check box of the
category that you want to display in the audit log.
Expand the category by clicking the plus sign to the left of the category. Select
the operations that you want to display for the category.
Clear the check box of any item or operation that you do not want to display.
4 Click OK.

Audit Log Configuration options

The Audit Log Configuration dialog box lets you select the categories and options
to include in the audit log.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 211
About audit logs

Viewing the audit log

You can view audit logs to see when changes were made in Backup Exec and which
users made the changes.
See “Configuring the audit log” on page 210.
To view the audit log
1 On the Tools menu, click Audit Log.
2 In Select category to view, select the category for which you want to view
audit information.
See “Audit Logs options” on page 211.
3 Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the Audit log window to view the whole
entry, or double-click the entry to display the same information in an
easy-to-read Audit Log Record.

Audit Log Record options

You can view audit logs to see when changes were made in Backup Exec and which
users made the changes.
See “About audit logs” on page 209.

Table 3-11 Audit Log Record options

Item Description

Date/Time Shows the date and time that this change

was made in Backup Exec.

User Name Shows the domain and the user name of the
user that made the change.

Category Shows the category to which the log belongs.

Message Shows the action that was recorded by

Backup Exec for the operation that was
performed.

Audit Logs options

You can view audit logs to see when changes were made in Backup Exec and which
users made the changes.
See “Viewing the audit log” on page 211.
See “Removing entries from the audit log” on page 212.
212 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About audit logs

See “Saving the audit log to a file” on page 213.

Table 3-12 Audit Logs options

Item Description

Select category to view Lets you select the category for which you
want to view audit logs.

Date/Time Shows the date and time that this change

was made in Backup Exec. Click the column
head to sort the information by date.

User Name Shows the domain and the user name of the
user that made the change. Click the column
head to sort the information alphabetically.

Category Shows the category to which the log belongs.

Click the column head to sort the
information alphabetically.

Message Shows the action that was recorded by

Backup Exec for the operation that was
performed. Click the column head to sort the
information alphabetically.

Refresh Updates the audit log with new entries.

Clear Category Log Removes all entries from an audit log

category.

Save Log to File Indicates where to save audit log entries. You
can save the audit log as a text (.txt) file.

Properties Provides information about the selected

entry.

Configure Logging Lets you select the categories and options to

include in the audit log.

Removing entries from the audit log

You can remove the entries for all categories or for a selected category.
See “About audit logs” on page 209.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 213
About database maintenance

To remove entries from the audit log

1 On the Tools menu, click Audit Log.
2 In Select category to view, select the category for which you want to view
audit information.
3 Click Clear Category Log to remove all entries from an audit log category.
If you select specific categories to view, only the logs generated for the selected
categories are cleared when you click Clear Category Log.

Saving the audit log to a file

You can save the audit log as a text (.txt) file.
See “About audit logs” on page 209.
To save the audit log to a file
1 On the Tools menu, click Audit Log.
2 Click Save Log to File to specify a file name and location to save the audit log
entries.

About database maintenance

The Database Maintenance option enables you to manage the Backup Exec database
and the Desktop and Laptop Option (DLO) database. Each database maintenance
operation is performed independently on each database. The Backup Exec database
maintains a record of files and data you have configured such as templates and
catalogs.
Database maintenance enables you to perform the following:
■ Optimize database size.
■ Delete expired data.
■ Save the contents of the database files.
■ Perform a database consistency check.
Informational alerts are generated at the beginning and the end of the database
maintenance process each time database maintenance is performed. The alerts
provide details about the type of maintenance that was performed on each database
and the amount of time the maintenance took to complete. If the database
maintenance process fails, the alert indicates where the failure occurred and the
reason for the failure.
See “Configuring database maintenance” on page 214.
214 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About database maintenance

Configuring database maintenance

The Database Maintenance option enables you to manage the Backup Exec database
and the Desktop and Laptop Option (DLO) database. Each database maintenance
operation is performed independently on each database. The Backup Exec database
maintains a record of files and data you have configured such as templates and
catalogs.
You do not have to select all the options; however, each one performs a different
process that enables you to protect and maintain your database. Selecting all the
options enables you to recover the database quickly and maintain optimal
performance.
See “About database maintenance” on page 213.
To configure database maintenance
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 Under Settings, click Database Maintenance.
3 Select the appropriate options, and then click OK.
See “Application settings for database maintenance” on page 214.

Application settings for database maintenance

You can manage the Backup Exec Database and the Desktop and Laptop Option
(DLO) database.
See “Configuring database maintenance” on page 214.

Table 3-13 Application settings for database maintenance

Item Description

Enable Backup Exec database Activates the database maintenance process.

maintenance

Last time maintenance was Indicates the date and time the last database
performed maintenance was performed.

Perform database maintenance Indicates the time you want to perform database
at maintenance. All the maintenance will occur once a
day at the time you specify.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 215
About database maintenance

Table 3-13 Application settings for database maintenance (continued)

Item Description

Delete aged data Activates the deletion of expired job history, job logs,
alert history, and reports from the Backup Exec
Database after the specified number of days have
passed.

For the Desktop and Laptop Option (DLO) database,

only the Alert History setting applies. DLO does not
have job history, job logs, or reports.

Keep job history for data on Keeps all job history data for any media to which an
media that have current overwrite protection policy is currently assigned. After
overwrite protection periods a media’s overwrite protection policy expires, the
media’s job history data can be deleted.

Keep job history for specified Indicates the number of days to keep job history data
number of days in the database before it is deleted. Job history data
includes summary statistics for a job and details about
media, devices, and backup sets that were used to
process the job.

Job logs Indicates the number of days to keep job logs in the
database before they are deleted. Job logs include
detailed information about the job.

Alert history Indicates the number of days to keep alert history data
in the database before it is deleted. Alert history data
includes property and response information for the
alert.

Reports Indicates the number of days to keep report data in the

database before it is deleted. Report data includes
property information about report jobs that were
generated. The report itself is not deleted.

Audit logs Indicates the number of days to keep audit log data in
the database before it is deleted. The audit log includes
information about operations that are performed in
Backup Exec.

See “About audit logs” on page 209.

216 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Viewing the location of Backup Exec databases

Table 3-13 Application settings for database maintenance (continued)

Item Description

Perform database consistency Checks the logical and physical consistency of the data
check in the database.

The option is not checked by default. It is recommended

that you run a consistency check periodically at a time
when there is minimal activity from Backup Exec.

Save contents of database to the Places the data that is contained in the database into
Backup Exec data directory the Backup Exec data directory so that the database
backup file (BEDB.bak) can be backed up. The dump
file will be maintained in the data directory until the
next database maintenance process is performed and
then this file will be overwritten. Selecting this option
enables you to recover the database in the event of
failure.

Optimize database size Reorganizes fragmented pages and decrease the size
of the physical database to 10 percent above what is
actually used.

Viewing the location of Backup Exec databases

On the media server’s advanced properties, you can view information about the
location of the databases for Backup Exec, which include the Backup Exec database,
the device and media database (ADAMM), and the catalog database.
During Backup Exec installation, if you chose the default option to create a local
Backup Exec SQL Express instance on which to store the Backup Exec database,
the databases are all located on the local media server. If you chose another
instance on the network on which to store the Backup Exec database, then the
databases are all located on the Microsoft SQL Server that contains that instance.
In a SAN SSO configuration, on the secondary servers, the database locations are
the same as the database locations displayed on the primary server.
In a Central Admin Server Option configuration, if the device and media database
location is on the central administration server, that information is displayed.
See “How CASO works” on page 1524.

Note: Advanced properties are displayed only for the media server that the Backup
Exec Administration Console is connected to.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 217
Viewing the location of Backup Exec databases

To view the location of Backup Exec databases

1 On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2 Select the media server from the tree view.
3 Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
4 On the Advanced tab, view the properties.
See “Advanced properties for a media server” on page 217.

Advanced properties for a media server

On the media server’s advanced properties, you can view information about the
location of the databases for Backup Exec, which include the Backup Exec database,
the device and media database (ADAMM), and the catalog database.
See “Viewing the location of Backup Exec databases” on page 216.

Table 3-14 Advanced properties for a media server

Item Description

Server Shows the name of the Microsoft SQL Server that contains the Backup
Exec database.

Instance Shows the name of the instance that the Backup Exec database is
installed on.

Name Shows the Microsoft SQL Server name of the Backup Exec database.

Path Shows the path of the Backup Exec database.

Server Shows the name of the Microsoft SQL Server that contains the
Advanced Device and Media Management (ADAMM) database.

Instance Shows the name of the instance that the Advanced Device and Media
Management (ADAMM) database is installed on.

Name Shows the Microsoft SQL Server name for the Advanced Device and
Media Management (ADAMM) database.

Path Shows the path of the Advanced Device and Media Management
(ADAMM) database.

Server Shows the name of the Microsoft SQL Server that contains the Backup
Exec catalog database.

Instance Shows the Database instance that contains the catalog database.
218 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
About the Symantec RSS Reader

Table 3-14 Advanced properties for a media server (continued)

Item Description

Name Shows the Microsoft SQL Server name for the Backup Exec catalog
database.

Path Shows the path of the Backup Exec catalog database.

About the Symantec RSS Reader

The Symantec RSS Reader is on the Home view on the Backup Exec Administration
Console. You can customize the Symantec RSS Reader and select the default
Backup Exec feeds that display in the reader. You can also add additional Symantec
RSS feeds to the reader. The Symantec RSS Reader refreshes the RSS feeds every
15 minutes when the item is open in the Home view.
See “About the Home view” on page 97.
See “Viewing an article in the Symantec RSS Reader” on page 218.
See “Customizing the Symantec RSS Reader” on page 219.
See “Removing a default RSS feed from the Symantec RSS reader” on page 219.

Viewing an article in the Symantec RSS Reader

The Symantec RSS Reader sorts articles by the date and the time. The reader
displays the last entry of an article in the RSS feed, however you can also choose
to view the full article.
See “About the Symantec RSS Reader” on page 218.
To view an article in the Symantec RSS Reader
1 On the navigation bar, click Home.
2 In the task pane, under Help and Technical Support Items, select the
Symantec RSS Reader check box.
3 In the Symantec RSS Reader, click the arrow next to the RSS feed that
contains the article.
4 Click the hyperlink for the article that you want to open.
The Symantec RSS Reader opens a new window that contains a portion of
the article from the RSS feed.
5 Click Go to full Article to open Internet Explorer and view the entire contents
of the article.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 219
About the Symantec RSS Reader

Customizing the Symantec RSS Reader

You can customize and add Symantec RSS feeds to the reader in addition to the
default Backup Exec RSS feeds. You can only add Backup Exec and Symantec RSS
feeds to the Symantec RSS Reader.
See “About the Symantec RSS Reader” on page 218.
To customize the Symantec RSS feeds to the Symantec RSS Reader
1 On the navigation bar, click Home.
2 In the task pane, under Help and Technical Support Items, select the
Symantec RSS Reader check box.
3 In the Symantec RSS Reader, click the pencil icon to add an RSS feed.
4 Type the URL and the name of the RSS feed that you want to add. Or click
More to view additional Symantec RSS feeds.
See “Add Symantec RSS Feed options” on page 219.
5 Click OK.

Add Symantec RSS Feed options

You can enter property information for an RSS feed that you want to add to the
Symantec RSS Reader.
See “Customizing the Symantec RSS Reader” on page 219.

Table 3-15 Symantec RSS Feed options

Item Description

URL Indicates the location of the RSS feed that

you want to add to the Symantec RSS Reader.

Name Indicates the name of the RSS feed that you

want to display in the Symantec RSS Reader.

More Shows a list of Symantec RSS feeds that you

can add to the Symantec RSS Reader.

Removing a default RSS feed from the Symantec RSS reader

You can remove the RSS feeds that display in the Symantec RSS reader. If the
RSS feed is not open in the reader, the RSS feed does not refresh.
See “About the Symantec RSS Reader” on page 218.
220 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Hiding columns

To remove an RSS feed from the Symantec RSS reader

1 On the navigation bar, click Home.
2 Do one of the following:

To remove a default Backup Exec RSS feed Select the check box of the Backup Exec
RSS feed.

To remove an RSS feed that you added to Click the red X next to the name of the
the Symantec RSS reader RSS feed.

Hiding columns
Backup Exec uses panes to present information to you in a structured and
organized manner. Each pane contains several columns that specify the type of
information that is displayed. You can remove the columns that may not interest
you.
See “Showing a hidden column” on page 220.
To hide columns
1 Right-click any column title.
2 Click Configure Columns.
3 Click the column title you want to hide.
4 Click Hide.

Showing a hidden column

If you hide a column, you can show it again at any time.
See “Hiding columns” on page 220.
To show a hidden column
1 Right-click any column title.
2 Click Configure Columns.
3 Select a column that you want to show.
4 Click Show.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 221
Rearranging columns

Rearranging columns
You can change the position of columns to suit your needs. You can also chane
the size of the columns to better match the size of the information in the columns.
To rearrange columns
1 Right-click any column title.
2 Click Configure Columns.
3 Select a column title, and then click Move Up or Move down.
Each click of the Move Up option moves the column name one column to the
left in the pane, while each click of the Move Down option moves the selected
column name one column to the right.
4 If you want to change the width of a column, do the following:
■ Select the column.
■ In the Width of selected column (in pixels) field, enter the column width.

5 Click OK.

Sorting column information

You can choose the order in which Backup Exec sorts the information in columns.
To sort column information
1 Right-click any column title.
2 Click Multi-Column Sort.
3 In the Sort by list, select the column titles on which you want to sort
information.
4 Click Ascending to sort the information in ascending order or click
Descending to sort the information in descending order.
5 To sort by additional columns, repeat step 3 and step 4 in the Then by lists.
6 Click OK.

Sort options
You can choose the order in which Backup Exec sorts the information in columns.
See “Sorting column information” on page 221.
222 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Sorting column information

Table 3-16 Sort options

Item Description

Sort by Indicates the column title on which you want

to sort information.

Then by Indicates the additional column titles on

which you want to sort information.

Ascending Sorts the information in ascending order.

Descending Sorts the information in descending order.

Column Settings options

Backup Exec uses panes to present information to you in a structured and
organized manner. Each pane contains several columns that specify the type of
information that is displayed. You can remove the columns that may not interest
you. You can also move the columns to suit your needs.

Table 3-17 Column Settings options

Item Description

Move Up Lets you move the selected column higher

in the list. The position of the column names
in the list dictates the column's position on
the pane. Column names that appear at the
top of the list are positioned on the left side
of the pane. Each time you click Move Up,
the selected column moves one column to
the left.

Move Down Lets you move the selected column lower in

the list. The position of the column names
in the list dictates the column's position on
the pane. Column names that appear at the
bottom of the list are positioned on the right
side of the pane. Each time you click Move
Down, the selected column moves one
column to the right.

Show Displays the selected column on the pane.

Hide Prevents the selected column from appearing

on the pane.
 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options 223
Viewing properties

Table 3-17 Column Settings options (continued)

Item Description

Width of selected column (in pixels) Indicates the size of the column.

Viewing properties
Properties provide detailed information, such as statistics, dates, and settings.
To view properties
◆ Do one of the following:
■ Right-click the item for which you want to view properties, and then click
Properties.
■ Select the item for which you want to view properties, and then in the
task pane under General Tasks, click Properties.
224 Configuring Backup Exec settings and options
Viewing properties
 Chapter 4
Managing media
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About media in Backup Exec

■ About media overwrite protection

■ Selecting settings for media management

■ Viewing audit log entries for media operations

■ Configuring specific media operations to appear in the audit log

■ Media labeling

■ About WORM media

■ Creating a new catalog

■ Creating a restore job while reviewing media or devices

■ Media locations and vaults

■ About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location

■ About removing damaged media

■ General properties for media

■ Statistics properties for media

■ Media rotation strategies

About media in Backup Exec

With Backup Exec’s media management tools you can do the following:
226 Managing media
About media in Backup Exec

■ Protect data from being overwritten.

■ Set up media rotation strategies.
■ Track the location of media.
■ Label media automatically.
■ Read and track media labels with bar codes.
■ Collect and report media statistics.
With Backup Exec, you are not required to select media for jobs; it is done for you
by the Advanced Device and Media Management (ADAMM) component. Backup
Exec tracks all media that is loaded into attached storage devices, media that is
offline, and media that has been placed in media vaults.
The following table lists and describes the Media nodes in the Media view.

Table 4-1 A description of media nodes in the Media view

Media node Media node description

All Media Lists all media that has been introduced into Backup Exec. Any
media that is available for overwriting in backup operations, such
as scratch or recyclable media, displays in blue.

See “General properties for media sets” on page 236.

Media Sets Lists default system media sets and media sets that you create. A
media set is a set of rules that manage media. These rules include
the append and the overwrite protection periods, and vault rules,
which allow you to set dates for when media should be moved to
or returned from a media vault

Media that are associated with a media set are allocated media.
Allocated media have current append and overwrite protection
periods. Media that are associated with a media set, but have
expired overwrite protection periods are recyclable media.

See “About creating media sets” on page 232.

Cleaning Media Lists all cleaning media.

See “Defining a cleaning slot ” on page 481.

 Managing media 227
About media in Backup Exec

Table 4-1 A description of media nodes in the Media view (continued)

Media node Media node description

Imported Media Lists all media created by a product other than this installation
of Backup Exec. By default, imported media have an overwrite
protection period of Infinite, but can still be overwritten if the
media overwrite protection level is set to Partial or None. You can
overwrite imported media using several methods. Data can be
restored from imported media until that media is overwritten.

See “Selecting settings for media management” on page 243.

Backup Exec and Lists all media from another installation of Backup Exec.
Windows NT Backup
See “Creating a new catalog” on page 254.
Media

Foreign Media Lists all media from a product other than Backup Exec.

See “Creating a new catalog” on page 254.

Retired Media Lists all media that you have taken out of service, usually because
of an excessive number of errors. After a media has been associated
with the retired media set, it is not selected for backup jobs by
Backup Exec. It is still available for restore operations, if it has
not been damaged. Retired Media protects media from being used
(overwritten).

You can delete media that is in Retired Media to remove it from

Backup Exec. You may want to delete media, for example, when
you have a lot of offsite media that you do not want to recycle or
if you throw away the media. If you decide to use deleted media
in Backup Exec, it is recognized as Imported Media and must be
cataloged before you can restore from it.

See “About removing damaged media” on page 265.

Scratch Media Lists all media that can be overwritten. New, blank, and erased
media are automatically associated with the Scratch Media set.

See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.

228 Managing media
About media in Backup Exec

Table 4-1 A description of media nodes in the Media view (continued)

Media node Media node description

Keep Data for 4 Weeks Lists all media that you associate with this media set. As long as
you use the backup job defaults that are set when you install
Backup Exec, the media set Keep Data for 4 Weeks is the default
media set for all backup jobs. This media set protects data from
being overwritten for four weeks and allows the media to be
appended to for six days.

You can edit and rename Keep Data for 4 Weeks after installation.
Therefore, it may not continue to appear in the Media view or in
the backup job defaults as Keep Data for 4 Weeks.

See “About the default media set” on page 232.

See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.

Keep Data Infinitely - Lists all media that you associate with this media set.
Do Not Allow When you associate media with this media set, data is not
Overwrite overwritten unless you perform any of the following actions on
the media:

■ Erase.
■ Label.
■ Format.
■ Associate the media with the scratch media set.

You can append data to this media for an infinite period (until the
media is full).

You can edit and rename Keep Data Infinitely - Do Not Allow
Overwrite after installation. Therefore, tt may not continue to
appear in the Media view or in the backup job defaults as Keep
Data Infinitely - Do Not Allow Overwrite.

See “About the default media set” on page 232.

See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.

Media Location Lists the location of media when it is online, offline, or in a

user-defined media vault.

See “Media locations and vaults” on page 256.

See “Creating media sets by using the Media Set Wizard” on page 233.
See “About creating media sets” on page 232.
See “Associating media with a media set” on page 235.
 Managing media 229
About media overwrite protection

About media overwrite protection

Each media is associated with a media set, which is a set of rules that manage
media.
These rules include the following:

Table 4-2 Rules specified in the media set

Rule Description

Append period The amount of time that data can be appended (added) to media. It is
measured from the time the media was first allocated. It can be
specified in hours, days, weeks, or years.

Overwrite The amount of time that media is protected from being overwritten.
protection period It is measured from the time of the last write to the media, that is, at
the end of the last append or overwrite job. It can be specified in hours,
days, weeks, or years. When the overwrite protection period is over,
the media becomes recyclable and can be overwritten.

The overwrite protection period begins when the backup job is

completed. If there is an append period, the overwrite protection
period begins again each time an append job completes. Because the
overwrite protection period does not begin until the job completes,
the amount of time that the job takes to complete affects the amount
of time until the media can be overwritten. You may shorten the
overwrite protection period to take into account the amount of time
a job may run.
For example, setting the overwrite protection period for seven days
and the append period for four days ensures that data will not be
overwritten for at least seven days, and that data can be appended to
the media for the next four days. The last data appended to this media
is retained for at least seven days.

Your media rotation strategy must balance between your need to save useful data
as long as possible, and the fact that media are not in infinite supply. The
compromise between the longevity of stored backup data and the cost of more
media is controlled in Backup Exec by the rules specified in the media set, which
allows Backup Exec to identify which media can be written to and which media is
overwrite-protected.
The following graphic shows the relationship between the append period and
overwrite protection periods.
230 Managing media
About media overwrite protection

Figure 4-1 Append periods and overwrite protection periods

The append period begins when the media is allocated to a

media set.
A PPE NDPERI OD

The overwrite protection period is

TIME

measured from the time of the last

OVER

write to the media.

During the append period, data

can be added to the media. Any
R IT E

data already on the media is The media

protected against loss. cannot be
Overwritten
P R OWT E C T I O N

by another
The append period ends.
job during
this interval.
After the append (However,
period expires, and you could
while the overwrite erase the
protection period is media or
still active, data associate it
cannot be added to with scratch
P ERIO D

the media. Any data media.)

TIME

already on the
media is protected
against loss.

The overwrite protection period

expires.

New
data
After the overwrite protection
period expires, the media
becomes recyclable. This
means that new data can be
TIME

written to the beginning of the

media by a new backup job
(causing loss of the original
data).
Old
data

The append and overwrite protection periods that you specify apply to all the data
on the media.
 Managing media 231
About media overwrite protection

Each time data is written to a media, the time remaining in the overwrite protection
period is reset and the countdown restarted.

Figure 4-2 How overwrite protection periods are reset

Time in Append period = 5 Time in Append period = 5 Time in Append period = 5

days days days days days days

1 Normal Bkup 1 Normal Bkup 1 Normal Bkup

2 2 Normal Bkup 1 2 Normal Bkup 1
3 3 3 Normal Bkup 1 2
4 4 4 Normal Bkup 1 2 3
Normal Bkup 1 2 3 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
Protection Protection Protection
8 8 period 14 8
period 14 period 14
9 9 days 9 days
days
10 10 10
11 11 11
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 The media can be 16 16
17 overwritten at this time 17 The media can be 17 Fifth Day
18 18 overwritten at this time 18
19 First Day 19 Second Day 19
The media can be
20 20 20 overwritten at this time

Because the overwrite protection period does not begin until the job completes,
the amount of time that the job takes to complete affects the amount of time until
the media can be overwritten.
For example, suppose that you create a media set named Weekly with an overwrite
protection period of seven days, and an append period of 0 days, and you schedule
a full backup job to run each Friday at 20:00. When it is time for the full backup
to run at 20:00 the following Friday, the job cannot run because the first backup
job that ran the previous Friday did not complete until 21:10 p.m. The overwrite
protection period for the Weekly media set still has 70 minutes remaining.
Typically, to prevent this situation, you would shorten the overwrite protection
period to account for the amount of time a job may run. For this example, the
scheduled job recurring at 20:00 can run if the overwrite protection period is set
to 6 days instead of 7 days.
232 Managing media
About media overwrite protection

About the default media set

When you install Backup Exec, a default media set named Keep Data for 4 Weeks
is created. All of the media that you use for the backup jobs that you create are
automatically associated with the media set Keep Data for 4 Weeks. The backup
data is protected from overwrite for four weeks. The media can be appended to
for six days.
You can change the media set by doing one of the following:
■ Create new media sets that have the append and overwrite protection periods
set to the time intervals that accommodate your data retention strategy. Then,
specify the media set that is most appropriate when you create a backup job.
For example, you can create a media set that keeps data for 60 days, and a
media set that keeps data for 90 days.
■ Select the media set Keep Data Infinitely - Do Not Allow Overwrite . The risk
that is associated with the media set Keep Data Infinitely - Do Not Allow
Overwrite is that you can use all of your scratch media. You must continually
add new media to Backup Exec.

Note: Symantec recommends that if you need to keep data longer than four weeks,
create a duplicate backup job. A duplicate backup job copies the backup data from
the original storage device to tape, which you can then send for long-term or
off-site storage.

See “About duplicating backed up data” on page 375.

See “About creating media sets” on page 232.
See “Associating media with a media set” on page 235.

About creating media sets

A media set consists of rules that specify append periods, overwrite protection
periods, and vaulting periods.
When you create a new media set, you specify an append period and an overwrite
protection period for the set. When media is associated with the media set, the
append and overwrite protection periods apply to that media.
You can also specify vault rules, which allow you to set dates for when media
should be reported as ready to be moved to or returned from a media vault. The
Vault Wizard logically moves the media, and then exports the media, but you
must physically move the media to and from the vault. You can use the Vault
Wizard to print or view reports that contain details on which media are ready to
be moved, and to update the media location.
 Managing media 233
About media overwrite protection

If your environment includes remote sites, you should create separate media sets
for each remote site, so that if vault rules are enabled, the reports contain details
on which media are ready to be moved for just that site.

Note: Even if the overwrite protection period is current, media can still be
overwritten if the overwrite protection level is set to None.

See “Creating media sets” on page 233.

See “Media overwrite protection levels” on page 238.
See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.
See “Deleting a media set” on page 234.
See “Renaming a media set” on page 234.
See “Editing general properties for media sets” on page 236.
See “Configuring vault rules for media sets” on page 258.
See “Using the Vault Wizard to move media” on page 262.

Creating media sets

Create a media set to set up the rules that specify append periods, overwrite
protection periods, and vaulting periods for media.
To create a media set
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 Under Media Set Tasks in the task pane, click New Media Set.
3 On the General tab, select the appropriate options, and then click OK.
See “General properties for media sets” on page 236.
4 On the Vault Rules tab, select the appropriate options, and then click OK.
See “Properties for vault rules for media sets” on page 258.

Creating media sets by using the Media Set Wizard

The Media Set Wizard guides you through the process of creating a new media
set, and may be helpful if you are new to Backup Exec or are unfamiliar with the
concepts and terminology of media sets. Before you run this wizard, you should
understand media overwrite protection and append periods.
See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.
If you do not need a wizard to set up a new media set, you can create it manually.
234 Managing media
About media overwrite protection

See “About creating media sets” on page 232.

If you set the media overwrite protection level to Full, you must have blank media
ready and online before the first backup job runs. If you plan to use imported
media, you must inventory it first.
To create media sets by using the Media Set Wizard
1 On the Tools menu, point to Wizards.
2 Click Media Set Wizard, and then follow the instructions.

Deleting a media set

Use Delete to remove a media set from the Media Sets category. If you delete a
media set to which scheduled jobs are targeted, you are prompted to retarget the
jobs to another media set.
You cannot delete a media set that has associated media. You must associate the
media with another media set first.

Caution: Make sure that the media set to which you associate the media has the
appropriate overwrite protection and append periods.

To delete a media set

1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select the media set that you
want to delete.
3 Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Delete.
4 When prompted to delete the media set, click OK.
5 If there are scheduled jobs allocated to the deleted media set, you are prompted
to redirect the jobs to another media set.
See “Retarget Job options ” on page 530.

Renaming a media set

When you rename a media set, any jobs that use that media set will display the
new media set name.
To rename a media set
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select the media set you want
to rename.
 Managing media 235
About media overwrite protection

3 Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Rename.

4 In the Name field, type the new name you want to assign to this media set,
and then click OK.

Associating media with a media set

When you associate media with a media set, the media uses the append and
overwrite protection period properties of that media set.

Note: Associating scratch or imported media with a media set is not recommended.
Backup Exec automatically associates scratch or imported media with a media set
when a backup job requires it.

To associate media with a media set

1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 Expand All Media to display a list of media.
3 Select the media that you want to associate with a media set.
4 Do one of the following:
■ Drag the media to the media set.
■ Under Media Tasks on the task pane, click Associate with media set,
select a media set to associate the media with, and then click Yes or Yes
to all.

Associate Media with Media Set options

The overwrite protection period, the append period, and any configured vault
rules for a media may change when you associate it with a different media set.
See “Associating media with a media set” on page 235.

Table 4-3 Options to associate media with a media set

Item Description

Name Displays the name of the media set that the

selected media is currently associated with.

Description Displays a description of the media.

Associate with Displays the name of the media set with

which you want to associate the selected
media.
236 Managing media
About media overwrite protection

Editing general properties for media sets

On general media set properties, you can change the following:
■ Name of a media set
■ Overwrite protection and append periods for a media set
■ Media vault and the vaulting periods associated with a media set.
To edit the general properties for media sets
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select a media set.
3 Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Properties.
4 To change the media set name or overwrite or append periods, click the
General tab.
See “General properties for media sets” on page 236.
5 Select the appropriate options, and then click OK.

General properties for media sets

General properties for media sets provide information about the retention period
and the append period for the media.
See “Creating media sets” on page 233.
See “Viewing properties” on page 223.

Table 4-4 General properties for media sets

Item Description

Name Displays the name of the media set.

Creation date Displays the date and time when the media set was
created. Backup Exec sets the date and time
automatically. You cannot change them.
 Managing media 237
About media overwrite protection

Table 4-4 General properties for media sets (continued)

Item Description

Overwrite protection period Displays the length of time in hours, days, weeks, or
years to retain the data on the media before the media
can be overwritten.
Note: Regardless of the overwrite protection period
that is set, media can be overwritten if it is erased,
formatted, labeled, associated with Scratch Media, or
if the Media Overwrite Protection Level is set to None

Because of the method Backup Exec uses to compute

time, the unit of time that you enter may be converted.
For example, if you enter 14 days, the next time you
view this property, it may be displayed as two weeks.

The default is Infinite - Don’t Allow Overwrite, which

protects the media from being overwritten for 1,000
years, unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled,
moved to Scratch Media, or if the media overwrite
protection level is set to None.

See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.

Append period Displays the length of time in hours, days, or weeks,

that data can be added to media. Because of the method
Backup Exec uses to compute time, the unit of time
that you enter may be converted. For example, if you
enter 14 days, the next time you view this property, it
may be displayed as two weeks.

The append period starts when the first backup job is

written to this media.

The default is Infinite - Allow Append, which allows

data to be appended until the media capacity is
reached.

See “Creating media sets” on page 233.

See “About creating media sets” on page 232.
See “Deleting a media set” on page 234.
See “Renaming a media set” on page 234.
See “Editing general properties for media sets” on page 236.
See “Configuring vault rules for media sets” on page 258.
See “Using the Vault Wizard to move media” on page 262.
238 Managing media
About media overwrite protection

Media overwrite protection levels

The media overwrite protection level is a global setting that supersedes the media
set’s overwrite protection period. Although the terms are similar, the media
overwrite protection level and the media overwrite protection period are different.
The media overwrite protection period is a time interval that changes from one
media set to another. The media overwrite protection level specifies whether to
overwrite scratch, imported, or allocated media, regardless of the media’s overwrite
protection period.
Use the media overwrite protection level to specify the type of media, such as
scratch or imported media, that you want to be available for overwrite backup
jobs.
The options for the media overwrite protection level are as follows:
■ Full - Overwrites scratch media, which are media that contain data you are
willing to discard, and recyclable media, which are media that are associated
with media sets and have expired overwrite protection periods.
■ Partial - Overwrites imported media, which are media that was created by
another installation of Backup Exec or some other backup product, and
overwrite scratch media.
■ None - Overwrites all media, including those that have current overwrite
protection periods (allocated media).

Caution: The None option is not recommended. It does not protect data from being
overwritten.

See “Selecting settings for media management” on page 243.

See “Media locations and vaults” on page 256.
See “About media overwrite protection” on page 229.

About overwriting allocated or imported media

Backup Exec protects allocated and imported media from being overwritten when
full or partial overwrite protection is used. However, if necessary, you can allow
allocated and imported media to be overwritten by Backup Exec before the data
overwrite protection period expires, and without setting the media overwrite
protection level to None.
The following methods are available:
■ Move the media to Scratch Media. The media is overwritten when it is selected
for an overwrite job.
 Managing media 239
About media overwrite protection

■ Erase the media. Erased media is automatically recognized as scratch media

and will be overwritten immediately.
■ Label the media. The Label Media operation immediately writes a new media
label on the media, which destroys any data contained on the media.
■ Format the media. Formatting destroys any data contained on the media.
■ Change the overwrite protection period for the media set so that it is expired.
See “About media in Backup Exec” on page 225.
See “About deleting media” on page 266.
See “Editing general properties for media sets” on page 236.
See “How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media” on page 239.

How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media

Media overwrite options set the order in which Backup Exec searches for
overwritable media. When Backup Exec searches for overwritable media for a
backup job, it searches for either scratch media or media that has an expired
overwrite protection period.
You are prompted to select one of the following types of media that you want
Backup Exec to use first:
■ Overwrite scratch media before overwriting recyclable media contained in the
targeted media set.
If you choose to overwrite scratch media before recyclable media, more media
may be required for the same number of jobs, but the recyclable media may
be preserved longer for possible recovery.
■ Overwrite recyclable media contained in the targeted media set before
overwriting scratch media.
If you choose to overwrite recyclable media before scratch media, you will
re-use the same media more frequently than if you choose to overwrite scratch
media before recyclable media.
In a device pool, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in all of the
devices in the device pool to use first.
In a robotic library, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in the library
to use first. If the robotic library is partitioned, Backup Exec searches for the
oldest recyclable media in the targeted partition only.
240 Managing media
About media overwrite protection

Caution: It is recommended that you physically write-protect media containing

critical data by using the write-protect tab on the media cartridge to protect
against unintentional move or erase operations, or expired overwrite protection
periods.

The following table describes the order in which Backup Exec searches for media
to use for an overwrite job, depending on the combination of the overwrite
protection level and the media overwrite option you select.

Table 4-5 How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media

Overwrite protection level and Media is overwritten in this order:

overwrite option:

Full + Overwrite scratch media first ■ Scratch media

Note: This combination provides ■ Recyclable media in the targeted media set
the most protection against ■ Recyclable media in any media set
overwriting media.

Full + Overwrite recyclable media ■ Recyclable media in the targeted media set
first ■ Scratch media
■ Recyclable media in any media set

Partial + Overwrite scratch media ■ Scratch media

first ■ Recyclable media in the targeted media set
■ Recyclable media in any media set
■ Imported media

Partial + Overwrite recyclable ■ Recyclable media in the targeted media set

media first ■ Scratch media
■ Recyclable media in any media set
■ Imported media

None - No overwrite protection + ■ Scratch media

overwrite scratch media first ■ Recyclable media in the targeted media set
Warning: This options is not ■ Recyclable media in any media set
recommended because it does not ■ Imported media
protect data from being ■ Allocated media in any media set
overwritten.
 Managing media 241
About media overwrite protection

Table 4-5 How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media (continued)

Overwrite protection level and Media is overwritten in this order:

overwrite option:

None - No overwrite protection + ■ Recyclable media in the targeted media set

overwrite recyclable media first ■ Scratch media
Warning: This options is not ■ Recyclable media in any media set
recommended because it does not ■ Imported media
protect data from being ■ Allocated media in any media set
overwritten.

In addition to setting overwrite protection levels, you must set overwrite options,
which set the order in which Backup Exec searches for overwritable media.
242 Managing media
About media overwrite protection

Figure 4-3 Media overwrite protection

1
Media Overwrite
Protection Level
2

Media Overwrite Protection

None Partial Full

Media Overwrite Options

Scratch
Recyclable Media Media Overwrite
Option can reverse
these, causing the Recyclable
Scratch media set to be
Scratch Media
examined second rather
than first. Recyclable

Recyclable Media Imported

(other media sets With the Media Overwrite
Options, you can make
Allocated
Imported Media Backup Exec favor
scratch media over the
expired (recyclable) media
Allocated Media in the Media Set of the
current job (on the right
side of this page), or favor When Backup Exec is unable to locate
the latter over the former usable media, it prompts you to provide
(on the left of this page). one.

The most obvious candidates for backup jobs requiring overwritable media are
scratch media and recyclable media (media with expired overwrite protection
periods). These are the first types of media for which Backup Exec searches when
a backup requires media to overwrite. The search pattern is different according
to whether you have chosen Full, Partial, or None. The media indicate that a type
of media set is examined for availability.
See “Selecting settings for media management” on page 243.
See “Media locations and vaults” on page 256.
 Managing media 243
Selecting settings for media management

Selecting settings for media management

Use this procedure to select settings for the media overwrite protection level, the
media overwrite options, and media labeling.
To select settings for media management
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Media Management.
See “Settings for media management ” on page 243.
3 Select the appropriate options, and then click OK.

Settings for media management

Settings for media management include the media overwrite protection level, the
media overwrite options, and media labeling.
See “Selecting settings for media management” on page 243.

Table 4-6 Settings for media management

Item Description

Full - protect allocated and Prevents media in media sets and imported media from
imported media being overwritten.

See “Media overwrite protection levels” on page 238.

This is the safest option to choose because the media
being protected cannot be overwritten until the
following occurs:

■ The overwrite protection period for the media

expires.
■ You move media that belongs to an active media set
to Scratch Media.
■ You erase, format, or label the media.
■ You move media from Imported Media to Scratch
Media.

Partial - protect only allocated Allows imported and scratch media to be overwritten.
media Media in a media set that has an overwrite protection
period that has not expired (allocated media), cannot
be overwritten.

This option is recommended if you have media from an

earlier version of Backup Exec or another product
(imported media) that you want to reuse.
244 Managing media
Selecting settings for media management

Table 4-6 Settings for media management (continued)

Item Description

Prompt before overwriting Prompts you before Backup Exec overwrites imported
imported media media when Partial has been selected.

The job will not run until you respond to this prompt.

None Disables the media overwrite protection feature. With

this option, you are responsible for making sure that
This option is not recommended
the media in your storage devices are not accidentally
because it does not protect data
overwritten.
from being overwritten.
For example, when an overwrite job is submitted to a
device, and the media overwrite protection level is set
to None, the media in that device is overwritten.

Prompt before overwriting Prompts you before Backup Exec overwrites allocated
allocated or imported media or imported media. If you selected None (no overwrite
protection), it is highly recommended that you select
this option to be prompted before overwriting allocated
or imported media.

The job will not run until you respond to this prompt.

Overwrite scratch media before Lets Backup Exec overwrite scratch media first when
overwriting recyclable media an overwrite job occurs.
contained in the targeted media
See “How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media”
set
on page 239.
If no scratch media are found in any of the storage
devices, Backup Exec overwrites recyclable media in the
targeted media set.

If no recyclable media are found in the targeted media

set, Backup Exec searches for recyclable media in any
media set.

If no recyclable media are found, Backup Exec

automatically searches for other media to overwrite.
The media that is overwritten depends on the level of
overwrite protection that you set (Full, Partial, or None).
If you select this option, more media may be required
for the same number of jobs than if you choose to
overwrite recyclable media first.

Because this option affects the order in which Backup

Exec overwrites media, choosing to overwrite scratch
media first may allow the recyclable media to be
preserved longer for possible recovery.
 Managing media 245
Selecting settings for media management

Table 4-6 Settings for media management (continued)

Item Description

Overwrite recyclable media Lets Backup Exec overwrite recyclable media in the
contained in the targeted media targeted media set first when an overwrite job occurs.
set before overwriting scratch
If no recyclable media are found in any of the storage
media
devices, Backup Exec overwrites scratch media.

If no recyclable or scratch media are found, Backup Exec

searches for media to overwrite. The media that is
overwritten depends on the level of overwrite protection
that you set (Full, Partial, or None).

See “How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media”

on page 239.

If you choose to overwrite recyclable media in the

targeted media set first, you will re-use the same media
more frequently than if you choose to overwrite scratch
media first.

Media type Displays the types of media for which you can create
default labels.

See “Imported media labeling” on page 250.

For example, if you select 4mm, then all 4mm-type

media that are entered for the first time into this
installation of Backup Exec are assigned a label
according to what you specify in the following fields.

Prefix Displays the current default prefix for the selected

cartridge type. To specify a new prefix on the label, type
from one to eight alphanumeric characters.
246 Managing media
Selecting settings for media management

Table 4-6 Settings for media management (continued)

Item Description

Next value Displays the next number that will be included in the
label of the next media that matches the selected
cartridge type when that media is entered for the first
time into this installation of Backup Exec. This number
is incremented by one each time a media that matches
the selected cartridge type is entered into this
installation of Backup Exec.

For example, if Cartridge type is set to 4mm, and Next

value is set to 1, the first time a 4mm media is entered
into this installation of Backup Exec, its label will
include the number 1. The label on the next 4mm media
entered will include the number 2.

To enter a new value, type from one to eight numeric

characters. This number must not exceed the number
specified in the Digits field.

Digits Displays the length of Next value, including placeholder

zeroes. This field defines the minimum size of the
numeric portion of the label.

For example, if Next value is set to 1, and Digits is set

to 6, then the Next value for the media label is 000001,
000002, 000003, and so on.

If the Next value exceeds the entry in the Digits field,

the extra digit is added. Using the previous example, if
label numbering continued until 999,999, the next label
would be 1,000,000 even though the value specified in
Digits is 6.

Rolling over the label numbering to 1,000,000 and

1,000,001 rather than 000,000 and 000,001 prevents
the duplication of labels.

The number entered in the Digits field must be in the

range of three to eight.

Default media vault Displays the default vault that you want media moved
to when a job is run to move media to a vault or to export
media. The default media vault that you select here is
displayed on the job properties dialog box, in Options.

See “Scheduling a job to move media” on page 261.

See “Exporting expired media from a robotic library”

on page 502.
 Managing media 247
Viewing audit log entries for media operations

See “How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media” on page 239.

Viewing audit log entries for media operations

The audit log provides information about media operations, such as when media
are overwritten or appended to. This information can help you find all of the
media that is required for a restore job.
The following options for media operations are enabled by default in the audit
log:
■ Delete media
■ Delete media set
■ Erase media (long)
■ Erase media (quick)
■ Format media
■ Format media (WORM)
■ Label media
■ Move media
■ Overwrite media
To view the audit log entries for media operations
1 On the Tools menu, click Audit Log.
2 In the Select category to view field, click Devices and Media .
3 View the entries in the Audit Log window.

Configuring specific media operations to appear in

the audit log
You can enable some or all media operations to appear in the audit log.
To configure specific media operations to appear in the audit log
1 On the Tools menu, click Audit Log.
2 On the Audit Logs dialog box, click Configure Logging.
3 Expand the Devices and Media category.
248 Managing media
Media labeling

4 Select the operations that you want to log, or clear the check box of any item
or operation that you do not want to log.
5 Click OK.

Media labeling
Media used in Backup Exec is identified by its media label. When new, blank, or
unlabeled media is used during a backup operation, Backup Exec automatically
labels the media. This label consists of a prefix that identifies the cartridge type,
and an incrementing number. For example, if the media is a 4mm tape, then the
prefix would be 4M, followed by 000001. The next media label generated for an
unlabeled 4mm tape would be 4M000002, and so on.
You can allow the media label to be assigned automatically by Backup Exec, or
you can specify a label prefix and number to be assigned for a type of media. For
example, you can specify that all 4mm media that are entered for the first time
into this installation of Backup Exec are labeled with a prefix of ACCT, and with
numbering starting from 1000. You can specify another media type to be labeled
with a prefix of FIN, and with numbering starting at 10,000. Customizing labels
in this manner can help you recognize and organize media.
Another type of media label used by Backup Exec is the media ID, which is a unique
label assigned by Backup Exec to individual media used in Backup Exec. The media
ID is used internally by Backup Exec in order to keep statistics on each media.
Because the media label or bar code label for media can be changed, Backup Exec
must use the media ID, which cannot be changed or erased, to preserve continuity
in record keeping for each individual media. The media ID has no effect on the
media label, or on your ability to rename, label, or erase media.
At times, you may need to use the media ID to distinguish media that have
duplicate media labels. Duplicate labels can be automatically generated in instances
when Backup Exec is reinstalled or media from another Backup Exec installation
is used. Use the media ID to distinguish between duplicate labels. You can view
the media ID in a media’s property page.
Write the media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical
media. Whenever you change the media label, you should also change the external
label to match.
The following methods are available in Backup Exec to change a media label:
■ Label Media operation. Writes a new media label on the media. This write
operation destroys any data on the media. This option is available on the
Devices view.
 Managing media 249
Media labeling

■ Rename operation. Changes the name of the media in the display, but does not
write the new label to the media until an overwrite operation occurs. The data
on the media is viable until the media is overwritten.
■ Edit the label in the media’s property page. Editing the label changes the name
of the media in the display, but does not write the new label to the media until
an overwrite operation occurs. The data on the media is viable until the media
is overwritten.
See “Media locations and vaults” on page 256.
See “Labeling media” on page 496.
See “Bar code labeling” on page 250.
See “Renaming a media label” on page 249.
See “General properties for media sets” on page 236.

Renaming a media label

Use Rename to assign a new label to media. The new label is not actually written
to the media until an overwrite operation occurs. All data on the media is preserved
until the next overwrite job. However, the new media label is stored in the database
and is displayed for that media. To write a new media label to the media
immediately, use Label Media on the device’s property page. The media’s contents
will be erased.
If you rename a media, and then use it in another installation of Backup Exec,
that media is treated as imported media, and the media’s original media label is
displayed; the renamed label is not transferred to other installations of Backup
Exec.
To rename media
1 Do one of the following:
■ If the media is in a device, then from the navigation bar, click Devices,
and then click that device to display the media.
■ If you don’t know where the media is, from the navigation bar, click Media,
and then click All Media to display all media.

2 Select the media you want to rename.

3 Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.
4 In Name, type a new media label, and then click OK.
5 Write this media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical
media.
250 Managing media
Media labeling

Imported media labeling

Backup Exec does not automatically relabel imported media. The imported media’s
existing label is read and displayed in the Media view, in one of the Imported
Media sets. Additionally, the imported media’s original media label is displayed
under the heading Media Description in the Results pane of the Media view. You
can edit the media description in the media’s property page to make it a more
descriptive label.
If the media overwrite protection level is set to Partial or None, the imported
media may be selected for a job and be overwritten. The imported media is
automatically labeled when it is overwritten during a job.
If you want to label a specific imported media while maintaining full media
overwrite protection for other imported media, erase the specific media and then
label it.
See “General properties for media sets” on page 236.

Bar code labeling

If there is a bar code label on the physical cartridge, and the cartridge is in a robotic
library that has a bar code reader, the bar code label automatically becomes the
media label.
You can change the media label in Backup Exec, but as long as the media has a
bar code label that can be read, the bar code label takes precedence over the media
label. To use the media label you entered using Backup Exec, you must remove
the physical bar code label from the media cartridge, or use the media in a device
without a bar code reader.
For example, Robotic Library 1 has bar code support. During a backup operation,
Backup Exec requests a new or overwritable media for the operation. A new media
with the bar code label 'ABCD' is inserted in the robotic library magazine and the
bar code reader scans the bar code ID on the media label. Backup Exec selects this
media for the operation and detects that a bar code label has been assigned to the
media. Backup Exec automatically uses the bar code label and continues the
operation.
When you change magazines or insert new media in a magazine, use the Scan
option to quickly update slot information.
See “Media labeling” on page 248.
See “Bar code rules in mixed media libraries” on page 251.
 Managing media 251
Media labeling

Bar code rules in mixed media libraries

If you have bar code support for a robotic library that uses different types of
drives, you can create a bar code rule so that Backup Exec can identify which
media type to use in a drive. When Backup Exec reads the bar code rule, it locates
the type of media that corresponds to the prefix or suffix and then mounts the
media into a drive that accepts that type of media.
Bar code rules for robotic libraries do not go into effect until you enable them.
See “Enabling bar code rules for robotic libraries” on page 480.
See “Creating bar code rules in mixed media libraries” on page 251.

Creating bar code rules in mixed media libraries

If a robotic library has bar code support, then you can create bar code rules. Bar
code rules specify the type of media that Backup Exec should use in a robotic
library drive.
To create bar code rules in a mixed media library
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 In the Properties pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.
3 Click New.
4 Select the appropriate options.
See “Add Bar Code Rule options” on page 253.
5 Click OK to save the bar code rule for the media.
6 Verify that bar code rules are enabled for the robotic library. The bar code
rules do not go into effect until you enable them for the robotic library.
See “Enabling bar code rules for robotic libraries” on page 480.

Editing a bar code rule

You can change the settings of a bar code rule.
To edit a bar code rule
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 In the Properties pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.
3 Click Edit, and then change the options as needed.
See “Add Bar Code Rule options” on page 253.
4 Click OK to save the changes, and then click OK to exit.
252 Managing media
Media labeling

Deleting a bar code rule

You can delete a bar code rule.
To delete a bar code rule
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 In the Properties Pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.
3 Select a bar code rule to delete, and then click Delete.
4 Click Yes to verify that you want to delete the rule, and then click OK.

Application settings for bar code rules

Default bar code rules appear in the list. You can add, edit, or delete bar code rules.

Table 4-7 Application settings for bar code rules

Item Description

Vendor Displays the name of this library’s

manufacturer.

Prefix Displays a prefix that is placed before the

bar code. Only media with bar codes that
have this prefix are used in the specified
drive.

Suffix Displays a suffix that is placed after the bar

code. Only media with bar codes that have
this suffix are used in the specified drive.

Media type Displays the media type.

New Lets you add a new bar code rule.

See “Creating bar code rules in mixed media

libraries” on page 251.

Edit Lets you edit a bar code rule.

See “Editing a bar code rule” on page 251.

Delete Lets you delete a bar code rule.

See “Deleting a bar code rule” on page 252.

See “Bar code rules in mixed media libraries” on page 251.

 Managing media 253
About WORM media

Add Bar Code Rule options

Bar code rules specify the type of media that Backup Exec should use in a robotic
library drive.
See “Creating bar code rules in mixed media libraries” on page 251.

Table 4-8 Add Bar Code Rule options

Item Description

Select a media type Displays the types of media that you can select to include
in the bar code rule.

Vendor Displays the name of this library’s manufacturer. You can

find the name of the library manufacturer on the library’s
property page. This field is not case-sensitive.

By typing a vendor name here, you restrict the bar code

rule to that vendor’s libraries. If you are creating a general
bar code rule that applies to libraries from different
vendors, leave this field blank.

Bar code prefix Displays a code that is placed before the bar code that
represents a media type. The code can be up to 16
characters, and any combination of letters and numbers.
This field is not case-sensitive.

Bar code suffix Displays a code that is placed after the bar code that
represents a media type. The code can be up to 16
characters, and any combination of letters and numbers.
This field is not case-sensitive.

See “Bar code rules in mixed media libraries” on page 251.

About WORM media

Write once, read many (WORM) data storage is used for archiving data that
requires a long retention period. Data can be written to WORM media one time
only. After that, the media can be appended to, but it cannot be overwritten, erased,
or reformatted.
When WORM media is used in a media set, the overwrite protection period is not
applied to it, but the append period is applied.
New WORM media is WORM media that has not been written to. When new WORM
media is introduced into Backup Exec, it is placed in the Scratch Media set.
254 Managing media
Creating a new catalog

After the WORM media has been written to one time, you cannot move it to the
Scratch media set. You can move WORM media to the Retired Media set to delete
it from Backup Exec, but you cannot erase it or reformat it.
You can use WORM media for ad hoc backup jobs and for backup jobs created
from policies. When you select the option Use Write once, read many (WORM)
media, Backup Exec confirms that the destination device is or contains a
WORM-compatible drive, and that the WORM media is available in the drive. If
WORM media or a WORM-compatible drive is not found, an alert is sent.
See “Device and media options for backup jobs and templates” on page 345.

Creating a new catalog

Catalog media to do the following:
■ Log the contents of a media created by a product other than this installation
of Backup Exec (imported media)
■ Create a new catalog on the local hard drive if the catalog for the media no
longer exists.
Before you can restore or verify data , the media must have a catalog. If the media
is being used by this computer for the first time, you may need to inventory the
media first.
See “About inventorying media” on page 456.
To create a new catalog
1 On the navigation bar, click Media or Devices.
2 Select the media set or location that is associated with the media to be
cataloged, or select the device containing the media to be cataloged, and then
select the media that you want to catalog.
3 On the task pane, under Media Tasks, click Catalog media.
4 To specify a device, or a password for a media that is password-protected ,
on the Properties pane, under Target, click Device, and then select the
appropriate options.
See “Device options for catalog jobs” on page 255.
5 To specify a name for the job, or to specify a job priority, on the Properties
pane, under Settings, click General, and then select the appropriate options.
See “General options for utility jobs ” on page 492.
 Managing media 255
Creating a new catalog

6 If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and then select the
options you want.
See “Sending a notification when a job completes” on page 697.
7 Do one of the following:

To run the job now Click Run Now.

To set the On the Properties pane, under Frequency, click Schedule.

scheduling options
See “Scheduling jobs” on page 362.
you want to use

You can monitor or cancel the catalog job on the Job Monitor.
8 If the job requires that media be inserted into a robotic library, you are
prompted to create an Import Library job.
See “Importing media to a robotic library” on page 499.
9 When you create the Import Library job, under Import Job Properties, click
Options, and then select Auto-inventory after import is completed.

Device options for catalog jobs

Device options include the device on which to run a catalog job, and a password
if necessary.
See “Creating a new catalog” on page 254.

Table 4-9 Device options for catalog jobs

Item Description

Device Displays the device on which this job will

run.

Password Displays the password to use if this media is

password-protected and is being cataloged
by this system for the first time.

Confirm password Confirms that the same password is retyped.

256 Managing media
Creating a restore job while reviewing media or devices

Creating a restore job while reviewing media or

devices
You can create a restore job while reviewing media or devices in Backup Exec. You
must catalog the media before you can select the files that you want to restore.
The catalog for media that was backed up at other Backup Exec installations does
not exist on the media server. You must catalog media that was backed up at other
Backup Exec installations on the local media server before you can view data in
the Restore Job Properties dialog box.
Creating a restore job while reviewing media or devices
1 On the navigation bar, click Media or Devices.
2 Double-click the media set or location that is associated with the data to be
restored.
3 Select the media that you want to restore.
4 On the task pane, under Media Tasks, click Restore data.
5 Select restore job properties.
See “Restoring data by setting job properties” on page 619.
6 If the job requires that media be inserted into a robotic library, you are
prompted to create an Import Library job.
See “Importing media to a robotic library” on page 499.
7 When you create the Import Library job, under Import Job Properties, click
Options, and then select Auto-inventory after import is completed.

Media locations and vaults

Media in Backup Exec can be located in any of the following:
■ Online media. This location lists media that reside in a storage device, robotic
library slot, or backup-to-disk folder. Online media is defined by Backup Exec,
so you cannot delete or rename it, and you cannot add or move media to it.

Note: If you move media from the online media location, its overwrite protection
period and append period remain in effect.

■ Offline media. This location displays all media that are onsite but are not in
devices or slots, or media vaults. Media are automatically moved to this location
if you use Backup Exec to remove media from a device or slot. You can add
 Managing media 257
Media locations and vaults

media to the offline location from another media location. To move offline
media back to online, run an inventory of the devices or slot, or catalog the
media. You cannot delete or rename the offline location.
■ User-defined media vault. A media vault is a logical representation of the
actual physical location of media. You can create media vaults to keep track
of where media is physically stored, such as a special media room, a scratch
bin, or an offsite location. For example, you could create a media vault where
media to be sent offsite are moved. Then, print the Media Vault Contents
report, which lists the media contained in that vault, to accompany the physical
media to their offsite storage. You can also create vault rules to help you track
when media should be moved to or returned from a vault.
See “Creating media sets” on page 233.
See “Finding media in a location or vault” on page 260.
See “Configuring vault rules for media sets” on page 258.
See “Using the Vault Wizard to move media” on page 262.
See “Renaming a media vault” on page 259.
See “About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location” on page 260.
See “Deleting a media vault” on page 259.
See “Media Vault Contents Report” on page 767.

Creating media vaults

Create a media vault so that you can track media that are stored in specific sites.
The new vault is displayed under Media Location in the Media view.
To create media vaults
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 Under Media Location Tasks on the task pane, click New media vault.
3 Type the name and a description of the new vault.
See “Media Vault Properties” on page 257.
4 Click OK.

Media Vault Properties

Properties for media vaults include the name and a description of the media vault.
See “Creating media vaults” on page 257.
258 Managing media
Media locations and vaults

Table 4-10 Properties for media vaults

Item Description

Name Displays the name of the media vault.

Description Displays a description of the media vault.

Configuring vault rules for media sets

On the vault rule properties for media sets, you can add or change the following:
■ The media vault to which you want to send media that are associated with this
media set.
■ The amount of time to wait between when the media is allocated and when it
is sent to the vault.
■ The amount of time to wait between returning the media from the vault and
when it was last written to.
Backup Exec does not update the vault automatically. You must use the Update
vault using wizard task to print or view reports that contain details on which
media are ready to be moved to and from the vault, and to update the media
location. You can also schedule a job called Move Media to a Vault to export media
from a device, and update the media location for any media that are moved to a
vault.
To configure vault rules for media sets
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select a media set.
3 Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Properties.
4 Click the Vault Rules tab.
See “Properties for vault rules for media sets” on page 258.
5 Select the appropriate options, and then click OK.

Properties for vault rules for media sets

Properties for vault rules provide information on the dates on which media is
moved to or returned from a media vault.
See “Configuring vault rules for media sets” on page 258.
See “Creating media sets” on page 233.
 Managing media 259
Media locations and vaults

Table 4-11 Properties for vault rules for media sets

Item Description

Select the media vault to use Displays the media vault that stores the media that is
with this media set: associated with this media set.

Before the media location can be updated, even if the

move and return dates are overdue, you must run the
task Update vault using wizard .

See “Using the Vault Wizard to move media” on page 262.

This wizard can print reports that detail which media

are ready to move to and return from the vault, and can
update the location of the media if you choose to move
them. However, you must physically collect the media,
and move the media to and from the vault.

Move media to this vault x after Displays the time period after which this media will be
it is allocated (first written to or reported as ready to be moved to this vault.
overwritten)

Return media from this vault x Displays the time period after which this media will be
after it is last written to reported as ready to be returned from this vault.

See “About creating media sets” on page 232.

Deleting a media vault

You can delete an empty media vault. If there is any media in the vault, you must
move it before you can delete the vault. You cannot delete the online or offline
locations.
To delete a media vault
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 Select the media vault that you want to delete.
3 Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.
4 When prompted if you are sure that you want to delete the media vault, click
OK.

Renaming a media vault

You can rename a media vault. You cannot rename the Backup Exec Media
Location defaults Online Media and Offline Media.
260 Managing media
About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location

To rename a media vault

1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 On the Media selections pane, click the media vault that you want to rename.
3 Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.
4 Type the new name, and then click OK.

Finding media in a location or vault

You can find where media is located by searching for the name on the media label.
To find media in a location or vault
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 On the Media selection pane, click Media Location.
3 Under Media Location Tasks on the task pane, click Find media.
4 Type the name from the media label of the media you want to find, and then
click OK.

About moving media to a vault or to the offline media

location
Several operations are available for you to logically move media to a vault or to
the offline media location. Some move operations also prompt you to export the
media as part of the operation. While these operations logically move the media,
you must physically move the media to an actual location that is represented by
the vault name.
Move media to a vault or to the offline media location using any of the following
methods:
■ Scan the bar code label or type the media label to logically move media to a
vault or to the offline media location.
See “Scanning bar code labels to move media” on page 261.
■ Schedule a job to logically move media to a vault after it is successfully exported
from a device.
See “Scheduling a job to move media” on page 261.
■ In a policy, create a job template to export media.
See “Adding an export media template to a policy” on page 547.
■ Run the Vault Wizard to export media from a device and to logically move
media to a vault.
 Managing media 261
About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location

See “Using the Vault Wizard to move media” on page 262.

■ Drag and drop media to a vault or to the offline media location, and then export
the media from the device.
See “Drag and drop methods to move media” on page 264.
■ Use the Move to vault option to logically move media to a vault or to the offline
media location.
See “Using the Move to vault task to move media” on page 263.

Scanning bar code labels to move media

If you have a bar code scanner, this is an efficient method for moving media to a
vault or to the offline media location. You can also type a media label into the
dialog box.
To scan bar code labels to move media
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 In the Media selections pane, select the media location or vault to which you
want to move media.
3 In the task pane, under Media Location Tasks in the task pane, click Add
media to selected vault.
See “Move Media to Vault options” on page 264.
4 Enter each label on a separate line.
5 Click OK.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all the media you want to add.
7 Click OK.

Scheduling a job to move media

If you set up vault rules for a media set, you can schedule a job called Move Media
to Vault. This job exports the media from the device, and then logically moves
the media to the specified vault.
You can specify a vault for a media set in the media set vault rules, or you can
specify a default vault.
There must be an existing user-defined media vault under the Media Location
node in the Media view.
See “Creating media vaults” on page 257.
262 Managing media
About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location

To schedule a job to move media

1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 On the task pane, under Backup Strategy Tasks, click New job to move media
to a vault.
3 To specify a name for the job, or to specify a job priority, on the Properties
pane, under Settings, click General, and then select the appropriate options.
See “General options for utility jobs ” on page 492.
4 To move the media to a media vault after a successful export, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Options, and select a media vault.
5 If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and then select the
options you want.
See “Assigning recipients to alert categories for notification” on page 695.
6 If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties
pane, under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you
want to use.
See “Scheduling jobs” on page 362.

Using the Vault Wizard to move media

Use the Vault Wizard to print or view reports that contain details on which media
are ready to be moved to and from a vault, and to update vaults.
After a vault is updated, if Backup Exec detects a robotic library, you are prompted
to export media. If you choose to export the media, an Export Media job runs.
See “Exporting expired media from a robotic library” on page 502.

Note: If your environment includes remote sites, you should create separate media
sets for each remote site, so that if vault rules are enabled, the reports contain
details on which media are ready to be moved for just that site.

To use the Vault Wizard to move media to a vault

1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 Select the vault that you want to update.
 Managing media 263
About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location

3 Under Media Location Tasks on the task pane, click Update vault using
wizard.
The Vault Wizard appears.
4 Follow the instructions on the wizard.

Using the Move to vault task to move media

You can select media in the Media view, and then choose a vault or the offline
media location to move the media to. The media location is updated in the Backup
Exec database, but the media is not ejected or exported.
To use the Move to vault task to move media
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 Expand All Media to display a list of media, and then select the media that
you want to move to a media vault.
3 Under Media Tasks on the task pane, click Move to vault.
See “Move Media options” on page 263.
4 Select a media vault to which you want to move this media, and then click
Yes or Yes to All.

Move Media options

You can move media to a vault or to the offline media location.
See “Using the Move to vault task to move media” on page 263.

Table 4-12 Move Media options

Item Description

Name Displays the media label that you selected

to move.

Description Displays the media description, if there is

one.

Move to Displays a media vault or a media location

to which the media is moved.

Yes Moves a single media to the new location and

updates the Backup Exec database.

No Unselects the media and does not move it.

264 Managing media
About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location

Table 4-12 Move Media options (continued)

Item Description

Yes to All Moves all media that was seleted to the new
location and updates the Backup Exec
database.

Move Media to Vault options

You can use a bar code scanner to enter the media labels of the media that you
want to move to this vault. You can also type the media label for any media that
you want to move to this vault.
See “About moving media to a vault or to the offline media location” on page 260.

Drag and drop methods to move media

To move media to a vault or to the offline media location, drag and drop it from
one location to another location. The drag and drop method also prompts you to
export the media from a device.
The following table lists the drag-and-drop rules for media:

Note: If you move media from an online location, its overwrite protection period
and append period remain in effect.

Table 4-13 Media Drag-and-Drop Rules

From/To Online Location Offline Location Media Vaults Media All Media
Pools/Sets

Online location No Yes, with a Yes, with a No No

warning that the warning that the
media is not media is not
physically moved physically moved
from the online from the online
location. location.

Offline location No No Yes No No

User-defined vault No Yes Yes No No

Media Pools/Sets No Yes, with a Yes, with a Yes No

warning warning
 Managing media 265
About removing damaged media

Table 4-13 Media Drag-and-Drop Rules (continued)

From/To Online Location Offline Location Media Vaults Media All Media
Pools/Sets

All Media No Yes, with a Yes, with a Yes No

warning that the warning that the
media is not media is not
physically moved physically moved
from the online from the online
location. location.

Using drag and drop methods to move media

After you drag and drop media to a new location, an Export Media job runs. After
the job runs, you are prompted to remove the media from the device.
See “Drag and drop methods to move media” on page 264.
To use the drag and drop method to move media
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 On the Media selections pane, click the vault containing the media.
3 Select the media from the Results pane, and drag it to the new location.
4 When you are prompted to export the media, click Yes or Yes to All.

About removing damaged media

Media that meets or exceeds the discard thresholds determined by the media
manufacturer should be associated with the Retired Media media set. Based on
a measurement of soft errors generated by the storage device firmware, media
that exceeds acceptable levels of these errors are reported to Backup Exec as
potential candidates to be discarded.
To decide which media to retire, run a Media Sets report to see the total number
of errors for media, or view the properties for a specific media.
Associate any media with an unacceptable level of errors to Retired Media so
that you are protected against using defective media before critical backup
operations begin. After you mark media as retired, it will not be used by Backup
Exec for future backup jobs. The media is still available to be restored from if it
is not damaged.
See “About deleting media” on page 266.
See “Statistics properties for media” on page 269.
266 Managing media
About removing damaged media

See “Failed Backup Jobs Report” on page 760.

About deleting media

When you delete media from Backup Exec, all records of the media are removed
from the Backup Exec Database. These records include catalog information, media
statistics, and other information that is associated with the media. You can only
delete media when it belongs to the Retired Media set.
You may want to delete media when the following occurs:
■ You have a lot of offsite media that you do not want to recycle.
■ You throw away damaged or old media.
Media can only be deleted from Backup Exec after it has been associated with the
Retired Media set.
When deleted media is reused in Backup Exec, it is recognized as imported media.
Before you can restore from the media, you must catalog it.

Note: Deleting media from Backup Exec is not the same operation as erasing media.

See “Deleting media” on page 266.

See “Statistics properties for media” on page 269.
See “Failed Backup Jobs Report” on page 760.

Deleting media
You can delete media from the Backup Exec Database.
To delete media
1 On the navigation bar, click Media.
2 Associate the media that you want to delete with the Retired Media set by
doing one of the following:
■ Drag the media to the Retired Media icon.
■ Under Media Tasks on the task pane, click Associate with media set,
select the Retired Media set to associate the media with, and then click
Yes or Yes to all.

3 Double-click the Retired Media icon, and then select the media that you want
to delete.
 Managing media 267
General properties for media

4 Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.

If Delete is unavailable, the media is not associated with the Retired Media
set. You must associate the media with Retired Media before Delete is
available.
5 Click Yes or Yes to All to delete the media that are displayed.

General properties for media

General properties for media provides information about the media.
See “Viewing properties” on page 223.

Table 4-14 General properties for media

Item Description

Media label Displays the media label that was assigned

automatically by Backup Exec, or that was assigned
or changed by the administrator, or that was a
pre-assigned bar code label.

You can edit the media label, which is limited to

32 characters. Editing the label changes the name
of the media in the display, but does not write the
new label to the media until an overwrite operation
occurs. When you edit a media label, try to make
it a concise identifier that will remain constant
even when the media is reused. You should write
this media label on a label fixed to the outside of
the physical media.

Duplicate labels can be automatically generated.

For example, reinstalling Backup Exec or bringing
media from another Backup Exec installation could
cause duplication in labels. Duplicate labels are
allowed, but not recommended.

If a bar code is available, and a bar code-equipped

device is used, then the media label automatically
defaults to that bar code.

Description Displays the original media label if the media is

imported media.

You can edit the media description, which is

limited to 128 characters, to make it a more
descriptive label.
268 Managing media
General properties for media

Table 4-14 General properties for media (continued)

Item Description

Media type Displays the media type and subtype (if available).
Click the button next to the field to change the
media type or subtype.

Export pending Displays Yes when a job runs that has an

associated Export Media template to export this
media.

See “About export media templates” on page 546.

Media set Displays the name of the media set this media
belongs to.

Media location Displays the name of the device or vault where

this media is located.

Creation date Displays the date and time when the media was
first entered into Backup Exec.

Allocated date Displays the date and time when the media was
added to a media set as a result of an overwrite
operation.

Modified date Displays the date and time when data was last
written to the media.

Overwrite protection until Displays the date and time after which the media
can be overwritten.

Appendable until Displays the date and time after which the media
can no longer be appended to.

Supports HW encryption Displays Yes if this media supports hardware

encryption.

See “About hardware encryption” on page 422.

See “Media labeling” on page 248.

See “Creating a test run job” on page 392.
See “Properties for robotic library slots” on page 482.
See “Statistics properties for media” on page 269.
 Managing media 269
Statistics properties for media

Statistics properties for media

You can view statistics about a media.
See “Viewing properties” on page 223.

Table 4-15 Statistics properties for media

Item Description

Hours in use Displays the total number of hours that this media has
been in use.

Used capacity Displays the amount of raw capacity on the media that
has been used. Used capacity is calculated by subtracting
available capacity from total capacity.

Used capacity may or may not equal bytes written.

Available capacity Displays the amount of expected raw capacity on the

media that remains unused. Some tape devices support
the ability to read the amount of remaining capacity of
the media that is currently loaded in the device. If a tape
device supports reading of the remaining capacity
amount, then available capacity is derived from the
remaining capacity amount. Otherwise, available
capacity is calculated by subtracting bytes written from
total capacity.

Because free space is reported in terms of unused raw

capacity, review bytes written and compression ratio
to better estimate if there is enough free space to
accommodate a specific job.

Total capacity Displays the amount of expected total raw capacity of

the media. Some tape devices support the ability to read
the amount of total capacity of the media that is currently
loaded in the device. If a tape device supports reading of
the total capacity amount, then total capacity is derived
from the total capacity amount. Otherwise, total
capacity is estimated based on past usage of the media.

Compression ratio Displays the ratio of bytes written to used capacity.

Compression ratio will show the overall effect that data
compression and media flaws are having on the amount
of data that is being stored on the media.
270 Managing media
Statistics properties for media

Table 4-15 Statistics properties for media (continued)

Item Description

Bytes written Displays the amount of data that has been written into
blocks on the media. Bytes written may differ from used
capacity due to the effects of data compression and
media flaws. Data compression will tend to increase bytes
written when compared to used capacity. Media flaws
will decrease bytes written when compared to used
capacity.

Bytes read Displays the number of bytes that have been read from
this media.

Mounts Displays the number of times this media has been

mounted.

Seeks Displays the total number of seek operations that have

been performed on this media. Seek operations run to
locate a specific piece of information on the media.

Seek errors Displays the number of errors encountered while trying

to locate data.

Soft write errors Displays the number of recoverable write errors

encountered. If you receive soft errors, it may indicate
the beginning of a problem. If you receive excessive
errors for your environment, check the media for
damage.

Hard write errors Displays the number of unrecoverable write errors

encountered. If you receive hard errors, check the media
for damage.

Soft read errors Displays the number of recoverable read errors

encountered. If you receive soft errors, it may indicate
the beginning of a problem. If you receive excessive
errors for your environment, check the media for
damage.

Hard read errors Displays the number of unrecoverable read errors

encountered. If you receive hard errors, check the media
for damage.

See “Editing general properties for media sets” on page 236.

See “About creating media sets” on page 232.
 Managing media 271
Media rotation strategies

Media rotation strategies

There are many media rotation strategies you can use to protect your data. They
differ mostly by the number of media required and by the amount of time the
media is kept before it is rotated back into the schedule.
The most commonly used media rotation strategies include the following:
■ Son, which uses the same media each day to run a full backup.
See “Son media rotation strategy” on page 271.
■ Father/Son, which uses multiple media, includes a combination of weekly full
and daily differential or incremental backups for a two-week schedule, and
provides backups for offsite storage.
See “Father/son media rotation strategy” on page 272.
■ Grandfather, which uses multiple media, includes a combination of weekly
and monthly full and daily differential or incremental backups, and provides
backups for offsite storage.
See “Grandfather media rotation strategy” on page 273.

Son media rotation strategy

The Son media rotation strategy requires the following:

Table 4-16 Son media rotation strategy

Item Description

Number of media required 1 (minimum)

Overwrite protection period Last backup

The Son strategy involves performing a full backup every day.

Figure 4-4 Son Backup Strategy

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri

Media 1 Media 1 Media 1 Media 1 Media 1

Week 1

Full Backup
272 Managing media
Media rotation strategies

Although the Son strategy is simple to administer, backing up with a single media
is not an effective method of backup. This is because magnetic media eventually
wears out after many uses and the data you can restore only spans back to your
last backup.

Father/son media rotation strategy

The Father/son media rotation strategy requires the following:

Table 4-17 Father/son media rotation strategy

Item Description

Number of media required 6 (minimum)

Overwrite protection period Two weeks

The Father/Son media rotation strategy uses a combination of full and differential
or incremental backups for a two-week schedule.
In the Father/Son scenario, four media are used Monday through Thursday for
differential or incremental backups. The other two media containing full backups
are rotated out and stored offsite every Friday.
The Father/Son strategy is easy to administer and allows you to keep data longer
than the Son strategy, but it is not suitable for the stringent data protection needs
of most network environments.

Figure 4-5 Father/Son Backup Strategy

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri

Media 1 Media 2 Media 3 Media 4 Media 5

Week 1

Media 1 Media 2 Media 3 Media 4 Media 6

Week 2

Full Backup Incremental or Differential

Backup

When this backup strategy is first implemented, you must start with a full backup.
 Managing media 273
Media rotation strategies

Grandfather media rotation strategy

The Grandfather media rotation strategy requires the following:

Table 4-18 Grandfather media rotation strategy

Item Description

Number of media required 19 (minimum)

Overwrite protection period One year

The Grandfather method is one of the most common media rotation strategies.
It is simple to administer and comprehensive enough to allow easy location of
files when they need to be restored.
In the Grandfather scenario, four media are used Monday through Thursday for
incremental or differential backups; another three media are used every Friday
for full backups.
The remaining 12 media are used for monthly full backups and are kept offsite.
274 Managing media
Media rotation strategies

Figure 4-6 Grandfather Backup Strategy

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri

Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 5

Week 1

Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 6

Week 2

Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 7

Week 3

Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Monthly

Week 4

Full Backup Incremental or

Differential
Backup

The Grandfather strategy is recommended because it offers a good media number

to storage life ratio (19 media/1 year). It is also easy to modify if you want to
incorporate more media. For example, you could perform a full backup on the last
Saturday of the month to keep permanently.
 Chapter 5
Preparing for backup
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ How to prepare for backup

■ About backup strategies

■ How to choose a backup strategy

■ About selecting data to back up

■ About using fully qualified computer names in backup selections

■ About the Computer Name node in the backup selections list

■ About the Favorite Resources node in the backup selections list

■ About the Domains node in the backup selections list

■ Adding an Active Directory domain to the Active Directory Domains node

■ Deleting an Active Directory domain from the Active Directory Domains node

■ About the User-defined Selections node in the backup selections list

■ Adding a user-defined selection to the User-defined Selections node

■ Deleting a user-defined selection from the User-defined Selections node

■ About managing Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk (VHD) files in Backup Exec

■ How to back up user-defined Microsoft Windows Distributed File System data

■ About selection lists

■ About resource discovery

■ About the Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system

276 Preparing for backup
How to prepare for backup

■ How to restore individual items by using Granular Recovery Technology

How to prepare for backup

Before you back up your data, you should become familiar with how to do the
following:
■ Use backup strategies
See “About backup strategies” on page 276.
■ Select data to back up
See “About selecting data to back up ” on page 286.
■ Create user-defined selection lists
See “About selection lists” on page 301.
■ Protect specific types of data, such as Windows Server systems and utility
partitions
See “About selecting data to back up ” on page 286.

About backup strategies

A backup strategy is the collection of procedures you implement for backing up
your network, including what methods of backups are performed, when backups
are performed, and how media is rotated back into use for your regular backups.
A good backup strategy allows minimal time to get a system up and running in
the event of a disaster.
Backup Exec offers flexible solutions for protecting the data on your network. Use
the media rotation feature and let Backup Exec do all the administrative work for
you, or design and manage your own media rotation strategy, the procedures for
reusing media, that meets your exact specifications.
You can create backup job templates that define your backup strategy, and then
reuse the templates to implement your strategy for all resources being protected
by your media server.
See “Media rotation strategies” on page 271.
See “How to choose a backup strategy” on page 276.

How to choose a backup strategy

In order to develop a secure and effective plan for managing your data, you should
consider the following:
 Preparing for backup 277
How to choose a backup strategy

■ The importance of the data you are backing up.

■ How often your system needs to be backed up.
■ How much storage media you will use.
■ When you will use certain storage media.
■ How you will keep track of your backup information.
See “About backup strategies” on page 276.

How to determine your backup schedule

While there is no requirement on how often to back up your data, there is one
consideration that can help you decide: The cost of re-creating data that was added
or modified since the last backup.
Calculate the manpower, lost time and/or sales, and other costs that would be
incurred if the file server or workstation crashed right before the next backup
was scheduled to take place (always assume the worst scenario). If the cost is
excessive, the strategy should be adjusted accordingly.
For example, the cost to re-create an extensive database system that is continually
updated by several database operators would be quite substantial. On the other
hand, the cost to re-create the data for a user creating one or two inter-office
memos would be considerably less. In this scenario, the network administrator
would probably opt to back up the database several times daily, and set up daily
jobs for the user’s workstation.
In an ideal environment, one full backup should be performed on workstations
every day and servers should be fully backed up more often. Important data files
and directories that constantly change may need to be backed up several times a
day. Because of time and media constraints, this is not feasible for many
environments, so a schedule including incremental or differential backups must
be implemented. For safety reasons, a full backup should always be performed
before adding new applications or changing the server configuration.

How to determine the amount of data to back up

The amount of data to be backed up is a key determinant of the media rotation
strategy you choose. If you are backing up large amounts of data that needs to be
retained on media for long periods of time, you will need to select a strategy that
is suitable for these requirements.
278 Preparing for backup
How to choose a backup strategy

How to determine a schedule for data storage

The amount of time the data needs to be stored is directly related to the media
rotation scheme you use. For example, if you use one media and back up every
day, your backups will never be more than a day old.
Since storage media is relatively inexpensive when compared to the value of your
data, it is a good idea to periodically back up your system on media not used in
the media rotation scheme and store it permanently. Some administrators may
choose to do this every week, while others may choose to store only one permanent
backup per month.
The threat of viruses is an issue also. Some viruses take effect immediately, while
others may take days or weeks to cause noticeable damage.
You should have at least the following backups available to restore at any time:
■ 3 daily backups (for example, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday).
■ A one-week-old full backup.
■ A one-month-old full backup.
Having these backups available should allow you to restore your system prior to
when it became infected.

How to determine which devices to back up

Since Backup Exec can back up servers, workstations, and agents, you should
consider which resources you want to protect. You will need to coordinate times
that are suitable to back up different resources. For example, you may want to
back up file servers during the evening and back up workstations at lunchtime.

How to determine the number of resources to back up in a job

When you are setting up jobs for the network, you must decide if you want to
create one job that includes many resources or a job for each resource.
Here are some of the advantages and disadvantages of each method.
 Preparing for backup 279
How to choose a backup strategy

Table 5-1 Advantages and disadvantages of including more than one system
in a job

Method Advantages Disadvantages

One job per device ■ If a job fails, you know ■ You have more jobs to keep
immediately which resource track of (for example,
was not backed up. reviewing job histories, and so
■ If a resource is turned off or forth).
moved, backups of other
resources are not affected.
■ When resources are added to
the network you can simply set
up new jobs for each resource.

Multiple resources ■ There are fewer jobs to keep ■ If any of the resources in the
per job track of and create. job are not available during the
■ You know the order in which backup, the job results in an
the data is backed up. abnormal completion status.
■ You could make it an overwrite
job and thus be able to use the
same name for the media and
the job.

About the archive bit and backup methods

Whenever a file is created or changed, the operating system activates the Archive
Bit or modified bit. Unless you select to use backup methods that depend on a date
and time stamp, Backup Exec uses the archive bit to determine whether a file has
been backed up, which is an important element of your backup strategy.
Selecting the following backup methods can affect the archive bit:
■ Full - Back up files - Using archive bit (reset archive bit)
■ Differential - Back up changed files since last full - Using archive bit (does not
reset archive bit)
■ Incremental - Back up changed files since last full or incremental - Using
archive bit (reset archive bit)
Whenever a file has been backed up using either the Full - Back up files - Using
archive bit (reset archive bit) or Incremental - Changed Files - Reset Archive Bit
backup method, Backup Exec turns the archive bit off, indicating to the system
that the file has been backed up. If the file is changed again prior to the next full
or incremental backup, the bit is turned on again, and Backup Exec will back up
the file in the next full or incremental backup. Backups using the Differential -
Changed Files backup method include only files that were created or modified
280 Preparing for backup
How to choose a backup strategy

since the last full backup. When this type of differential backup is performed, the
archive bit is left intact.
Consider the following backup strategy scenario:
Fred wants to implement a backup strategy for the office fileserver. Fred knows
that all backup strategies begin with a full backup (backup of an entire device
using the full backup method), so he creates a Selection List for his server and
submits the job to run at the end of the day on Friday.
Since most files on the server, such as operating system files and application files,
seldom change, Fred decides that he can save time and media by incorporating
incremental or differential backups in his media rotation scheme. Fred opts to
use incremental backups, so he schedules the script to run at the end of the day,
Monday through Thursday, with the incremental backup method.
Here’s what happens: Fred’s Friday tape contains all of the data on the fileserver
and Backup Exec changes all of the files’ statuses to backed up. At the end of the
day on Monday, the incremental job runs and only the files that were created or
changed (had the archive bit re-set by the operating system) are backed up. When
the incremental job completes, Backup Exec will turn the archive bit off, showing
that the files have been backed up. On Tuesday through Thursday, the same events
happen.
If Fred’s fileserver crashed on Thursday morning, after he got it running, he would
restore each backup in the order in which it was created (for example, Friday,
Monday, Tuesday, and so forth).
If Fred had decided to perform differential backups on Monday through Thursday,
he would have only needed Friday’s and Wednesday’s tapes: Friday’s tape because
it included all of the data, and Wednesday’s tape because it included every file
that had been created or changed since Friday’s backup.

About backup methods

Before you can develop your media rotation strategy, you will need to decide
whether you want to perform only full backups or use a strategy that includes
Full backups and one of the modified backup methods (differential, incremental
or working set backups).

Note: You need to perform a full backup of your server to establish a baseline for
disaster recovery.

The backup methods used by Backup Exec are as follows:

■ Full
 Preparing for backup 281
How to choose a backup strategy

See “About the full backup method” on page 281.

■ Differential
See “About the differential backup method” on page 282.
■ Incremental
See “About the incremental backup method” on page 282.
■ Working Set
See “About the working set backup method” on page 283.
There are advantages and disadvantages to each backup method.
See “About backup method advantages and disadvantages” on page 283.

About the full backup method

Full backups include all of the data that was selected for backup. Backup Exec
detects the device as having been backed up. You can use either archive bit or
modified time to determine if a file has been backed up.

Note: You will need to perform a full backup of your server to establish a baseline
for disaster recovery.

Full backups also include Copy backups, which include all selected data and do
not affect any media rotation scheme because the archive bit is not reset. Copy
backups are useful when you need to:
■ Back up data for a special purpose (for example, to send to another site).
■ Back up specific data.
■ Perform an additional backup to take off-site.
■ Back up data that belongs to a media rotation job without affecting the rotation
cycle.
Another Full backup option is the Back up and delete the files option. This option
deletes the selected files and folders from the volume after a successful copy
backup. This backup option moves data from disk to storage media to free valuable
disk space and to reduce clutter on your server volume. You should not use this
option as part of a regular backup schedule.

Note: For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file must be granted; otherwise data
is backed up but not deleted. Backup Exec does not delete data from remote
computers on which remote agents are installed when you select the Back up and
delete the files option.
282 Preparing for backup
How to choose a backup strategy

See “About backup methods” on page 280.

About the differential backup method

Differential backups include all files that have changed since the last full or
incremental backup. The difference between differential and incremental backups
is that incremental backups include only the files that have changed since the
last full or incremental backup.
Backup Exec provides two differential backup methods, one that uses archive bit
and one that uses modified time to determine if the file was backed up. If you
select to use the Full - Back up files - Using archive bit (reset archive bit) and want
to run differential backups, you must use the Differential - Back up changed files
since last full - Using archive bit (does not reset archive bit) method. If you select
to use the Full - Back up files - Using modified time, you must use the Differential
- Back up changed files since last full - Using modified time method.

Note: If you use modified time to determine if files have been backed up, the full
and differential backups must use the same backup selection list.

In most schemes, differential backups are recommended over incremental backups.

Differential backups allow much easier restoration of an entire device than
incremental backups since only two backups are required. Fewer required media
also decreases the risk of not being able to restore important data because of
media errors.
You should not mix differential and incremental backups together.
See “About backup methods” on page 280.

About the incremental backup method

Incremental backups include only the files that have changed since the last full
or incremental backup.
Backup Exec provides two incremental backup methods, one that uses archive bit
and one that uses modified time to determine if the file was backed up. If you
select to use the Full - Back up files - Using archive bit (reset archive bit) and want
to run incremental backups, you must use the Incremental - Back up changed files
since last full or incremental- Using archive bit (reset archive bit) method. If you
select to use the Full - Back up files - Using modified time, you must use the
Incremental - Back up changed files since last full or incremental - Using modified
time method. The advantages and disadvantages described in this section pertain
to either type of differential backup.
 Preparing for backup 283
How to choose a backup strategy

Note: If you use modified time to determine if files have been backed up, the full
and incremental backups must use the same backup selection list.

See “About backup methods” on page 280.

About the working set backup method

The working set backup method includes two options; Changed today and Last
accessed in x days. The Changed today option was called Daily backup in previous
versions of Backup Exec. You can perform backups using the Changed today
method in addition to the media rotation scheme selected. The Changed today
method backs up all files with today’s date (created or changed today). The Changed
today method does not affect the files’ backup status because the archive bit is
not reset.
If you select the Last accessed in x days method, you can then indicate in the Files
accessed in x days field that you want to include data that has been accessed in a
specific number of days.
This option is similar to a differential backup, in which files that have been created
or changed since the last full backup are included; however, the difference lies in
that you can also specify to include all files accessed within the last x number of
days. This option can speed the recovery of a crashed server because you only
need to restore the working set backup to get up and running again, and then
restore the latest full backup at a later time (if necessary).
To effectively include the data needed to make your system operational after
restoring a working set backup, specifying at least 30 days in the Files accessed
in x days field is recommended. With a full/working set backup scheme, the
non-full backups will require more media space than full/differential or
full/incremental schemes. However, in environments where active data is migrated
frequently between machines, or when restore times are especially critical, working
set backups can make up the cost of extra media in time savings for restoring
data.
See “About backup methods” on page 280.

About backup method advantages and disadvantages

There are advantages and disadvantages to each backup method.
See “About backup methods” on page 280.
284 Preparing for backup
How to choose a backup strategy

Table 5-2 Backup Method Advantages and Disadvantages

Method Advantages Disadvantages

Full ■ Files are easy to find - Since ■ Redundant backups - since

full backups include all data most of the files on your file
contained on a device, you server rarely change, each full
don’t have to search through backup following the first is
several media to find a file merely a copy of what has
that you need to restore. already been backed up. This
■ There is always a current requires more media.
backup of your entire system ■ Full backups take longer to
on one media or media set - If perform - Full backups can be
you should need to restore time consuming, especially
your entire system, all of the when you have other devices
most current information is on the network that need to be
located on the last full backup. backed up (e.g., agent
workstations, remote servers).

Differential ■ Files are easy to find - ■ Redundant backups - All of the

Restoring a system backed up files created or modified since
with a differential strategy the last incremental backup
requires a maximum of two are included; thus creating
backups - the latest full redundant backups.
backup and the latest
differential backup. This is
less time consuming than
backup strategies that require
the latest full backup and all
incremental backups created
since the full backup.
■ Less time required for backup
and restore - Differential
backups take less time to
restore than full backups.
Faster recovery is possible in
disaster situations because
you only need the latest full
and differential backup media
to fully restore a device.
 Preparing for backup 285
How to choose a backup strategy

Table 5-2 Backup Method Advantages and Disadvantages (continued)

Method Advantages Disadvantages

Incremental ■ Better use of media - Only ■ Backups are spread across

files that have changed since multiple media - Since
the last backup are included, multiple media is required in
so there is much less data a disaster situation, this can
storage space required. cause recovery of a device to
■ Less time required for backup take longer. In addition, the
- Incremental backups take media must be restored in the
much less time than full and correct order to effectively
differential backups to bring the system up to date.
complete.

Working Set ■ Restoring a system backed up ■ The Last accessed in (x) days
with a working set strategy method is available only on
requires only the media platforms that support the last
containing the latest working accessed date (Windows,
set backup media and the NetWare, and UNIX). Working
media containing the most set backups will work as
recent full backup. differential backups when
■ You can perform a working selected for other platforms.
set backup, restore the data to
a new system, and be up and
running faster than if you had
to restore a full backup
followed by all of the
incremental or differential
backups.
■ Working set backups take less
time to run than full backups.

About modified time and backup methods

If you select to use Full - Back Up Files - Using modified time, Differential - Using
modified time, or Incremental - Using modified time, Backup Exec uses a file’s
modified time rather than the archive bit to determine if it needs to be backed up.
When Backup Exec runs a full or incremental backup, the time the backup launches
is recorded in the Backup Exec database. The next time an incremental or
differential backup launches, Backup Exec compares the file system time to the
backup time recorded in the Backup Exec database. If the file system time is later
than the database time, the file is backed up.
286 Preparing for backup
About selecting data to back up

Note: A file's last modified date and timestamp does not change when the file is
copied or moved. If the file's modified time is older than the previous backup's
modified time, that file is not backed up. To ensure that the files are protected,
run a full backup after you copy or you move files. If you have the Advanced
Disk-based Option, you can run synthetic backups to ensure that any copied or
moved files are protected.

When an incremental backup is run, a new time is recorded in the Backup Exec
database. The database time is not updated with differential backups.
Using the modified time allows Backup Exec to run differential backups on file
systems, such as UNIX, which do not have an archive bit.
If you want Backup Exec to use modified time to determine if a file has been backed
up, the full and incremental (or full and differential) backups must use the same
backup selection list.
See “About selection lists” on page 301.
The Full - Using modified time backup method adds the time of the backup to the
Backup Exec database only if the full backup job completes successfully. If the
full backup job does not complete successfully, any subsequent backup jobs that
use the differential or incremental modified time backup methods back up all of
the data instead of just the data that changed since the last full backup.

About using the Windows NTFS Change Journal to determine changed

files
For Windows 2000 or later systems, you can enhance incremental and differential
backup performance by selecting to have Backup Exec use the information recorded
in the NTFS Change Journal. NTFS logs all file system changes in the Change
Journal. If you select to use the Change Journal and select Differential - Using
modified time or Incremental - Using modified time as the backup method, Backup
Exec will scan the journal to get a list of changed files rather than scan all files,
reducing the amount of time required to perform the incremental or differential
backup.

About selecting data to back up

When you are setting up a backup job, select the data you want to back up. Make
your selections from the backup selections pane on the Backup Job Properties
dialog box.
You can find a list of icons that appear in the backup selections pane at the
following URL:
 Preparing for backup 287
About selecting data to back up

http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-12
There are several ways you can select data to back up. You can select an entire
drive, a folder, files, System State, network share, Backup Exec Agent volume, or
user-defined selection. You also can use the Advanced File Selection feature to
include or exclude specific files or specific types of files. Or you can set up a
selection list that you can reuse for several backups.

Note: If the account to which you are logged on does not have sufficient rights,
you are required to supply another logon account that can be used to view files
for backup.

To expand the view for an item, click the plus sign (+) next to it or double-click
the item name. To collapse the view, click the minus sign (-) next to an item or
double-click the item name.
To view the contents of an item, double-click the item’s icon. The item’s contents
appear in the right frame of the backup selections view. For all items (except
System State), you can traverse file levels from either side of the window by
clicking folders and subfolders as they appear.
When you are browsing remote selections, Backup Exec requires a valid logon
account to expand the resources and devices. If the default logon account does
not enable access to a remote selection, Backup Exec prompts you to select another
existing logon account or create a new logon account that can access the selection.
To select data, select the check box next to the drive or directory you want to back
up.

Figure 5-1 Data selection

A slash in a shaded check box means some items below

the check box are selected, but the item itself cannot be
selected.

A slash in a check box means some items below the

directory or drive level are selected.

A check mark in a check box means all items at or below

the directory or drive level are selected.

A clear check box means the item can be selected.

288 Preparing for backup
About using fully qualified computer names in backup selections

About using fully qualified computer names in backup

selections
You can enter fully qualified computer names in Backup Exec anywhere that you
can enter a computer name. In addition, Backup Exec can show fully qualified
computer names where computer names are listed.
For fully qualified computer names, the following rules apply:
■ The maximum number of characters for each label (the text between the dots)
is 63
■ The maximum total number of characters in the fully qualified name is 254,
including the dots, but excluding the \\
■ The name cannot include the following characters: * | < > ?
To find a fully qualified computer name, from the Control Panel, select System >
Computer Name. The fully qualified name appears in the Full computer name
field.
Symantec does not recommend using both fully qualified computer names and
non-qualified computer names in selection lists. Symantec recommends using
fully qualified computer names.
For example, if you have a computer named Test_Computer, you can have two
selections for it. One selection is called Test_Computer. The fully qualified selection
is called Test_Computer.domain.company.com. In this case, Backup Exec treats
each selection as a separate computer, even though both selections are for the
same computer. For backup jobs that use the short computer name, the catalog
contains the short computer name. For backup jobs that use the fully qualified
name, the catalog contains the fully qualified name.

About the Computer Name node in the backup

selections list
The first node under All Resources shows the name of the computer on which
Backup Exec is installed.
The Computer Name node includes the following sub-nodes:
 Preparing for backup 289
About the Computer Name node in the backup selections list

Table 5-3 Sub-nodes of the Computer Name node

Sub-node name Description

Local Drives Includes hard drives as well as CD-ROM drives that physically
reside on the media server.

Shadow Copy Uses Microsoft’s Volume Shadow Copy Service to protect critical
Components operating system and application service data, and third-party
(Windows Server application and user data on Windows Server 2003/2008 resources.
2003/2008)

System State Lists a collection of system-specific data that is backed up

whenever the computer name node is selected. Symantec
recommends that you back up System State. However, you can
clear the check box next to System State if you do not want to
back it up with the resources on the server. You cannot select or
expand the System State resources individually. They are backed
up only as a collection, never individually.

You can only perform a full backup on System State. However, if

you select other items at the same time, you can perform other
backup methods on those items. You can back up System State
remotely on other computers if Backup Exec Remote Agent is
installed on the remote computer. For more information about
System State, refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation.

Active Directory Appears only when Active Directory Application Mode (ADAM)
Application Mode resources are available for backup. Even though ADAM is a Shadow
Copy component, the ADAM node is not selected automatically
when you select the Shadow Copy Components node. You must
select the ADAM node if you want to back up the ADAM resources.

Backup Exec database Includes job, schedule, job history, notification, alerts, device,
media, and catalog indexes data for Backup Exec.

Utility Partition Includes the utility partitions that are installed on the system and
available for backup. Individual utility partition objects are named
Utility Partition on Disk disk_number (for example, Utility
Partition on Disk 0), and cannot be expanded. Backing up utility
partitions is recommended when a full system backup is done,
such as for disaster recovery preparation. Utility partitions can
be backed up individually. If there are not utility partitions on the
system, this resource is not available. Administrative rights are
required to browse and back up utility partitions.
290 Preparing for backup
About the Favorite Resources node in the backup selections list

Table 5-3 Sub-nodes of the Computer Name node (continued)

Sub-node name Description

EFI System Partition Appears if an Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) system partition
is on the computer. In most cases, each computer will have only
one EFI system partition. However, if more than one exists on a
computer, Backup Exec displays only the active partition.

See “How the Active Directory Recovery Agent works” on page 898.

About the Favorite Resources node in the backup

selections list
The Favorite Resources node lists the remote computers that are set up to publish
information to the media server. Several nodes may appear under the Favorite
Resources node, depending on the type of remote computers that you use.
The nodes that may appear include the following:
■ Linux/Unix Servers
See “About publishing Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh computers to media servers”
on page 1906.
■ Macintosh Servers
See “About publishing Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh computers to media servers”
on page 1906.
■ NetWare Agents
See “About publishing NetWare servers to the NetWare agents list” on page 1957.
■ Windows Systems
See “About publishing the Remote Agent for Windows Systems to media
servers” on page 1975.
From the Windows Systems node, you can add or delete remote Windows
computers. When you add or delete a remote computer, it may take a few minutes
for the computer name to appear or to be removed from the Windows Systems
node.
Backup Exec automatically deletes a remote computer from the Windows Systems
node in the following situations:
■ The remote computer becomes disconnected from the network.
■ The Remote Agent is uninstalled from the remote computer.
 Preparing for backup 291
About the Favorite Resources node in the backup selections list

If the media server receives published information from the remote computer
again, Backup Exec adds the computer name to the Windows Systems node again.
If the media server does not receive published information within a 24-hour period,
a user attention icon appears next to the remote computer’s name. This icon is
displayed for 13 days.
Some of the reasons why the media server may not receive published information
include the following:
■ The publishing option is disabled on the Remote Agent.
■ A media server is removed from the list to publish to.

Adding a Windows system to the Favorite Resources node in the backup

selections list
To add a Windows system to the Favorite Resources node, you must know the
name or IP address of the remote computer.

Note: It may be several minutes before the computer name appears under the
node.

To add a Windows system to the Favorite Resources node in the backup selections
list
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Do one of the following:

To work with a backup job that is In the Backup Selection Lists pane, click
associated with a policy the backup job with which you want to
work.

To work with a backup job that is not In the Jobs pane, click the backup job with
associated with a policy which you want to work.

3 In the Task pane, under General Tasks, click Properties.

4 On the backup selection tree, expand the Favorite Resources node.
5 Right-click Windows Systems.
6 Click Add Windows System.
7 In the System Name field, type the name of the Windows computer that you
want to add.
292 Preparing for backup
About the Favorite Resources node in the backup selections list

8 Do one of the following:

To install the Remote Agent on a Windows Select Install the Remote Agent, and then
computer and then add it to the Favorite add to Favorite Resources.
Resources node
If you select this option, the installation
wizard appears when you complete the
dialog box.

See “About installing the Remote Agent

for Windows Systems” on page 141.

To add a Windows computer that already Select Add a system that already has the
has the Remote Agent installed on it Remote Agent installed.

9 In the Logon Account field, select the logon account you use for the remote
computer. Click New to add a new logon account instead.
10 Click OK.

Deleting a Windows system from the Favorite Resources node in the

backup selections list
You can delete a Windows system from the Favorite Resources node at any time.

Note: It may be several minutes before the computer name is removed from the
node.

To delete a Windows system from the Favorite Resources node in the backup
selections list
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Do one of the following:

To work with a backup job that is In the Backup Selection Lists pane, click
associated with a policy the backup job with which you want to
work.

To work with a backup job that is not In the Jobs pane, click the backup job with
associated with a policy which you want to work.

3 In the Task pane, under General Tasks, click Properties.

4 On the backup selection tree, expand the Favorite Resources node, and then
expand the Windows Systems node.
 Preparing for backup 293
About the Domains node in the backup selections list

5 Right-click the Windows system that you want to delete.

6 Click Delete from Favorite Resources.

Add Windows System options

You can add a Windows system to the Favorite Resources in the backup selections
list.
See “Adding a Windows system to the Favorite Resources node in the backup
selections list” on page 291.

Table 5-4 Add Windows System options

Item Description

System Name Specifies the name or IP address of the

remote computer that you want to add.

Install the Remote Agent, and then add to Installs the Remote Agent on the remote
Favorite Resources computer, and then adds the remote
computer to the Favorite Resources .

Add a system that already has the Remote Adds the remote computer to the Favorite
Agent installed Resources node

Logon Account Specifies the logon account to use for the

remote computer. This option is not
available if you selected Install the Remote
Agent, and then add to Favorite Resources.

New Allows you to select a new logon account to

use for the remote computer. This option is
not available if you selected Install the
Remote Agent, and then add to Favorite
Resources.

About the Domains node in the backup selections list

The Domains resource includes Active Directory Domains and the Microsoft
Windows Network. The Microsoft Windows Network node enables you to browse
to resources in a Microsoft Windows network.
The Active Directory Domains node enables you to browse Active Directory
domains. Backup Exec automatically discovers the Active Directory domain to
which the media server belongs and displays it in the backup selection list. Also,
you can manually add Active Directory domains to the backup selections list.
294 Preparing for backup
Adding an Active Directory domain to the Active Directory Domains node

You cannot select the Active Directory Domains node itself for backup. You must
expand the node to browse Active Directory domains.
When you add an Active Directory domain, you must use a fully qualified domain
name. An example of a fully qualified domain name is domain.companyname.com.
For fully qualified domain names, the following rules apply:
■ The maximum number of characters for each label (the text between the dots)
is 63
■ The maximum total number of characters in the fully qualified domain name
is 254, including the dots, but excluding the \\
■ The name cannot include the following characters: * | < > ?

Adding an Active Directory domain to the Active

Directory Domains node
You must know the fully qualified domain name of the Active Directory domain.
To add an Active Directory domain
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Do one of the following:

To work with a backup job that is In the Backup Selection Lists pane, click
associated with a policy the backup job with which you want to
work.

To work with a backup job that is not In the Jobs pane, click the backup job with
associated with a policy which you want to work.

3 In the Task pane, under General Tasks, click Properties.

4 On the backup selections tree, expand the Domains node.
5 Right-click Active Directory Domains.
6 Click Manage Active Directory Domains.
7 In the Name box, type the fully qualified domain name.
8 Click Add.
9 Click Close.
 Preparing for backup 295
Deleting an Active Directory domain from the Active Directory Domains node

Deleting an Active Directory domain from the Active

Directory Domains node
You can delete an Active Directory domain from the Active Directory Domains
node if you no longer need it.
To delete an Active Directory domain
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Do one of the following:

To work with a backup job that is In the Backup Selection Lists pane, click
associated with a policy the backup job with which you want to
work.

To work with a backup job that is not In the Jobs pane, click the backup job with
associated with a policy which you want to work.

3 In the Task pane, under General Tasks, click Properties.

4 On the backup selections tree, expand the Domains node.
5 Right-click Active Directory Domains.
6 Click Manage Active Directory Domains.
7 Select the domain you want to delete in the Domains list.
8 Click Delete.
9 Click Close.

Manage Active Directory Domains options

You can add or delete Active Directory domains from Active Directory Domains
in the backup selections.
See “Adding an Active Directory domain to the Active Directory Domains node”
on page 294.
See “Deleting an Active Directory domain from the Active Directory Domains
node” on page 295.
296 Preparing for backup
About the User-defined Selections node in the backup selections list

Table 5-5 Manage Active Directory Domains options

Item Description

Name Specifies the name of the Active Directory

domain you want to add or delete from
Active Directory Domains in the backup
selections.

Domains Lists the domains that currently reside in

Active Directory Domains in the backup
selections.

Add Adds the new domain you specified to Active

Directory Domains in the backup selections.

Delete Deletes the domain you selected in the

Domains list from Active Directory
Domains in the backup selections.

About the User-defined Selections node in the backup

selections list
You can create shortcuts to shares and save them as user-defined selections. Use
this feature to quickly access shares that have a very long path or that are
unavailable when you set up a backup job. A share may be unavailable because
the network resources that are used to locate the computer are offline, even though
the computer may still be running and available. In some cases this happens
because the computer is on the Internet and accessible from within the company’s
private network, but cannot be located by using just its name or normal browsing
methods.
See “Adding a user-defined selection to the User-defined Selections node”
on page 296.
See “Deleting a user-defined selection from the User-defined Selections node”
on page 298.

Adding a user-defined selection to the User-defined

Selections node
You can set up direct access to a share by entering its Universal Naming
Convention (UNC) path name or computer name, or a fully qualified computer
 Preparing for backup 297
Adding a user-defined selection to the User-defined Selections node

name. The selections that you specify can be selected for backup operations from
the User-defined Selections node.

Table 5-6 User-defined selection formats

Format type Example

UNC name \\mycomputer\shared\temp

Fully qualified \\mycomputer.domain.companyname.com\temp

computer name

See “About using fully qualified computer names in backup selections” on page 288.
To add a user-defined selection to the User-defined Selections node
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Do one of the following:

To work with a backup job that is In the Backup Selection Lists pane, click
associated with a policy the backup job with which you want to
work.

To work with a backup job that is not In the Jobs pane, click the backup job with
associated with a policy which you want to work.

3 In the Task pane, under General Tasks, click Properties.

4 On the backup selections tree, right-click User-defined Selections, and then
click Manage User-defined Selections.
5 In the Name box, type the server name and volume name, the computer name,
or fully qualified computer name.
You can provide TCP/IP addresses for user-defined selections, but Symantec
does not recommended it. Backup Exec does not support user-defined
selections for IP addresses in a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
environment.
6 Click Add.
7 When you are finished adding selections, click Close.
298 Preparing for backup
Deleting a user-defined selection from the User-defined Selections node

Deleting a user-defined selection from the

User-defined Selections node
You can delete a user-defined selection from the User-defined Selections node
if you no longer need it.
See “About the User-defined Selections node in the backup selections list”
on page 296.
To delete a user-defined selection from the User-defined Selections node
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Do one of the following:

To work with a backup job that is In the Backup Selection Lists pane, click
associated with a policy the backup job with which you want to
work.

To work with a backup job that is not In the Jobs pane, click the backup job with
associated with a policy which you want to work.

3 In the Task pane, under General Tasks, click Properties.

4 On the backup selections tree, right-click User-defined Selections, and then
click Manage User-defined Selections.
5 Select the user-defined selection you want to delete in the Selections defined
list.
6 Click Delete.
7 Click Close.

User-defined Selections options

You can add or delete user-defined selections from User-defined Selections in
the backup selections.
See “Adding a user-defined selection to the User-defined Selections node”
on page 296.
See “Deleting a user-defined selection from the User-defined Selections node”
on page 298.
 Preparing for backup 299
About managing Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk (VHD) files in Backup Exec

Table 5-7 User-defined Selections options

Item Description

Name Specifies the name of the user-defined

selection you want to add or delete from
User-defined Selections in the backup
selections.

Selections defined Lists the user-defined selections that are

currently defined under User-defined
Selections in the backup selections.

Add Adds the new user-defined selection you

specified to User-defined Selections in the
backup selections.

Delete Deletes the domain you selected in the

Selections defined list from User-defined
Selections in the backup selections.

About managing Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk (VHD)

files in Backup Exec
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 gives users the ability to create native Virtual Hard
Disk (VHD) files. VHD files are virtual hard disks contained in a single file. For
more information about VHD files, see your Microsoft Windows documentation.
Backup Exec gives you the ability to back up and restore native VHD files. If a
native VHD file is not mounted, you can back up the volume on which it resides
normally.
If a native VHD file is mounted to a drive letter or to an empty folder path, the
file is skipped during backup jobs. You cannot include a mounted VHD as part of
a selection list. To back up the data in a mounted VHD file, select its mount point
in the backup selections.
See “Creating a backup job by setting job properties” on page 338.
You can restore native VHD files as part of any normal restore job. You can also
redirect a restore job to a native VHD if you use Microsoft Windows 2008 R2.
When you redirect a restore job to a native VHD, Backup Exec creates a VHD file
that expands dynamically as you save data to it. The file expands until it reaches
2040 GB, which is the maximum size for a native VHD file. You can create one
VHD file with data from all redirected backup sets or you can create a VHD file
for each backup set.
300 Preparing for backup
How to back up user-defined Microsoft Windows Distributed File System data

See “About redirecting restore jobs to native Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk (VHD)
files” on page 650.

How to back up user-defined Microsoft Windows

Distributed File System data
The Microsoft Distributed File System (DFS) feature consists of DFS Namespaces
and DFS Replication technologies. To back up user-defined DFS configuration
settings and file system data, Symantec recommends specific backup selections.
Backup Exec supports the following:
■ DFS for Windows Server 2003 and earlier
■ DFS Namespace for Windows Server 2003 R2 and later
■ DFS Replication for Windows Server 2003 R2 and later
■ File Replication Service (FRS) for Windows Server 2003 and earlier
The following backup selections are recommended for DFS:

Table 5-8 Recommended backup selections for DFS

DFS item to back up Recommended backup selections

Stand-alone DFS or DFS Namespaces The following selections should be backed

configuration settings up:

■ The System State registry of the server

that hosts the DFS root
■ The System State registry of all remote
servers that host target shares

Domain-based DFS or DFS Namespaces The following selections should be backed

configuration settings up:

■ The System State registry of the target

server
■ The Active Directory of the domain
controller that hosts the DFS root
■ The System State registry of all the
remote servers that host target shares
Note: You cannot restore domain DFS or
DFSN configuration settings from Active
Directory backups for which the Granular
Recovery Technology option was enabled.
 Preparing for backup 301
About selection lists

Table 5-8 Recommended backup selections for DFS (continued)

DFS item to back up Recommended backup selections

DFS Namespaces shared data, if Microsoft The system volume of the server that hosts
replication technologies are not used the shared folders or targets

FRS configuration settings for Windows The System State registry and the Active
Server 2003 and earlier Directory of the domain controller that hosts
the replicated data
Note: You cannot restore FRS configuration
settings from Active Directory backups for
which the Granular Recovery Technology
option was enabled.

FRS data for Windows Server 2003 and The system volume on any server that hosts
earlier the replicated data

About selection lists

Selection lists provide a quick and easy way of selecting files that you back up
often. After you choose devices, directories and files, you can save the selections
as a selection list that you can use in regularly scheduled operations or once-only
operations. Selection lists, which define what is to be backed up, are also
automatically created when you create a backup. You can combine a selection list
with a policy and quickly create a backup job.
Backup Exec detects and notifies you about items in a selection list that are no
longer on the resource. Notification occurs as a selection list is loaded for local
selections, and as any remote server is expanded in the tree.
You can also choose to notify recipients when a job completes that contains a
particular selection list. This feature allows you to notify users who may be
interested that a particular set of selections was backed up. The completion status
of the job is included in the notification.
You can view the job history of the jobs that are associated with a selection list.
See “Viewing the history for backup selection lists” on page 320.
See “Creating selection lists” on page 302.
See “Merging selection lists” on page 306.
See “Replacing selection lists” on page 307.
See “Copying selection lists” on page 308.
See “Deleting selection lists” on page 309.
302 Preparing for backup
About selection lists

See “Editing selection lists” on page 310.

See “Creating separate selection lists for each computer or resource” on page 315.

Creating selection lists

A backup selection list is a list of the resources that you want to back up. After
you create a selection list you can use it with any backup job or policy.
Depending on how you set the Backup Exec default options for selection lists,
Backup Exec will do one of the following when you create a new selection list:
■ Create a separate selection list for each computer you choose.
■ Create a separate selection list for each resource you choose.
■ Create one selection list, regardless of the number of computers or resources
you choose.
See “About selection lists” on page 301.
To create a selection list
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 In the task pane, under Selection Lists Tasks, select New backup selection
list.
3 Select the resources that you want to back up from the backup selections
pane.
4 Select the appropriate options.
See “New Backup Selection List options” on page 303.
5 (Optional) To change the order in which the resources in the selection list
are backed up, in the Properties pane, under Source, click Resource Order.
See “Resource Order Backup options” on page 344.
6 (Optional) To change or test a logon account for the resources, in the
Properties pane, under Source, click Resource Credentials.
See “Resource Credentials options” on page 343.
7 (Optional) To set the priority for processing the jobs associated with the
selection list, or to can set a time range when the resources in the list will be
available for backup, in the Properties pane, under Source, click Priority
and Availability.
See “Priority and Availability backup options” on page 314.
 Preparing for backup 303
About selection lists

8 (Optional) To notify users that a job containing this selection list was
completed, in the Properties pane, under Source, click Selection List
Notification.
See “Notification options for jobs” on page 697.
9 (Optional) To select a preferred server or servers for the resources in the
selection list, in the Properties pane, under Source, click Preferred Servers.
See “Preferred Servers backup options” on page 444.
10 If you are creating a selection list for a CASO environment, do the following
in the order listed:
■ In the Properties pane, under Destination, click Device.
■ Check Restrict backup of the selection list to devices on the following
media server or media servers in a pool.
■ Select the media server from the drop-down list.

11 Click OK.

New Backup Selection List options

A backup selection list is a list of the resources that you want to back up.
See “Creating selection lists” on page 302.
The New Backup Selection List dialog box contains the following options:

Table 5-9 New Backup Selection List options

Item Description

Selection list name Designates the name of this selection list.

Load selections from existing list Loads an existing selection list or merges
multiple selection lists.

See “Merging selection lists” on page 306.

Selection list description Describes this selection list.

Include/Exclude Lets you use the Advanced File Selection for

selecting files for backing up.

See “Backup Include/Exclude Selections

options” on page 304.

Include subdirectories Selects the contents of all the subfolders

when a directory is selected.
304 Preparing for backup
About selection lists

Table 5-9 New Backup Selection List options (continued)

Item Description

Show file details Displays any details about the files available
for selecting.

View by Resource Lets you view resources in a tree view.

View Selection Details Lets you view selections as a list of files and
directories.

Device options for backup selection lists

The Restrict backup of the selection list to devices on the following media server
or media servers in a pool option specifies where certain jobs are delegated. You
can run jobs on devices on a specific managed media server or on the devices that
are on a group of managed media servers. This option only displays if you have
the Central Admin Server Option installed.
For example, you can run Exchange database backups only on the devices that
are attached to managed media servers in a pool named Exchange Backups. You
would select this option and then select the Exchange Backups media server pool.

Backup Include/Exclude Selections options

Advanced file selection allows you to quickly select or de-select files for backup
operations by specifying file attributes.
The Include/Exclude Selections dialog box contains the following fields:

Table 5-10 Include/Exclude Selections options

Option name Description

General Lets you include or exclude any type of resource other than NDMP.

NDMP Lets you include or exclude NDMP resources.

Resources Allows you to include or exclude files from a backup of a different

drive than the one you selected previously on the Backup Job
Properties dialog box.
 Preparing for backup 305
About selection lists

Table 5-10 Include/Exclude Selections options (continued)

Option name Description

Path Specifies the name of the folder and/or subfolder that contains
any specific file you want to include or exclude.

You can use wildcard characters. use a question mark (?) to

represent any single character. Use two asterisks (**) to represent
any number of characters.

For example, on your C: drive you have a My Documents folder

that contains a subfolder called Work Files. There are three Work
Files subfolders called 1999, 2000, and 2001. Each one of those
subfolders has a subfolder called Personnel.
If you type the path as \My Documents\**\Personnel, the backup
will include or exclude the following:

■ C:\My Documents\Work Files\2001\Personnel

■ C:\My Documents\Work Files\2000\Personnel
■ C:\My Documents\Work Files\1999\Personnel

In addition, every subfolder below the ** wildcard is included or

excluded. However, the only files from the subfolders that are
included or excluded are those that match the file name you type
in the File field. So in the example above, every subfolder of C:\My
Documents is included in or excluded from the backup, and only
the files that match the file name you type in the File field are
included or excluded.
Note: The Remote Agent for NetWare Systems does not support
wildcard characters.

After you type the path, type the file name in the File field.

File Specifies the file you want to include in or exclude from the backup.

You can use wildcard characters. Use a question mark (?) to

represent any single character. Use two asterisks (**) to represent
any number of characters.

For example, to include all files with the .exe extension, type **.exe.

After you type the file name, indicate whether you want to include
or exclude it.

Include Specifies that the files that you selected should be included in the
job. This is the default option.

Exclude Specifies that the files that you selected should be excluded from
the job.
306 Preparing for backup
About selection lists

Table 5-10 Include/Exclude Selections options (continued)

Option name Description

Include Includes the contents of all the subfolders when a directory is

subdirectories selected.

Only modified files Includes or excludes modified files in the path you specify.

Only read-only files Includes or excludes files that cannot be modifed.

Files dated Includes or excludes the files created or modified during a specific
time period. Then select the beginning and ending dates.
Note: The Remote Agent for NetWare Systems does not support
this option.

Files not accessed in Includes or excludes files that have not been accessed in a specified
x days number of days. This is useful when you need to migrate older files
from your system.

Merging selection lists

You can create a new selection list by merging two or more existing lists with new
selections.
To merge and replace selection lists
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Under Selection Lists Tasks in the task pane, select New backup selection
list.
3 On the New Backup Selection List dialog box, select resources to include in
the selection list.
See “New Backup Selection List options” on page 303.
4 Click Load selections from existing list.
5 Select the selection lists that you want to merge with the previously selected
backup selections.
See “Load Selections from Existing List options” on page 307.
6 Click Merge.
7 Complete the other options on the New Backup Selection List dialog box.
See “Creating selection lists” on page 302.
8 Click OK.
 Preparing for backup 307
About selection lists

Replacing selection lists

You can replace selections in the selection tree with other selection lists.
To replace selection lists
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 Under Selection Lists Tasks in the task pane, select New backup selection
list.
3 On the New Backup Selection List dialog box, select resources to include in
the selection list.
See “New Backup Selection List options” on page 303.
4 Click Load selections from existing list.
5 Select the selection lists that you want to replace the previously selected
backup selections.
See “Load Selections from Existing List options” on page 307.
6 Click Replace.
7 Complete the other options on the New Backup Selection List dialog box.
See “Creating selection lists” on page 302.
8 Click OK.

Load Selections from Existing List options

You can merge selection lists to create a new selection list. You can also replace
the selections with an existing selection list.

Table 5-11 Load Selections from Existing List options

Item Description

Name Displays the names of existing selection lists.

Description Displays the descriptions of existing

selection lists.

Properties Lets you view the properties of the selected

selection list.

Replace Replaces the items in the selection tree with

the selection list you selected in the Name
column.
308 Preparing for backup
About selection lists

Table 5-11 Load Selections from Existing List options (continued)

Item Description

Merge Merges the items in the selection tree with

the selection list you selected in the Name
column.

Copying selection lists

You can copy a selection list to reuse it on a new media server. You can also copy
a selection list to the same media server and then edit its settings to create an
entirely new selection list.
See “Editing selection lists” on page 310.
To copy a selection list
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 In the Backup Selection Lists pane, right-click the selection list you want to
copy, and then click Copy.
3 Complete the appropriate options.
See “Copy Selection List options” on page 308.
4 Click OK.

Copy Selection List options

You can copy a selection list to one or more media servers.
See “Copying selection lists” on page 308.

Table 5-12 Copy Selection List options

Item Description

Copy to this media server Copies the selection list to the media server
on which the selection list currently resides.

Copy to other media servers Copies the selection list to other media
servers.

Name Indicates the name of the destination media

servers to which you can copy the selection
list.

Logon Account Indicates the logon account for each

destination media server.
 Preparing for backup 309
About selection lists

Table 5-12 Copy Selection List options (continued)

Item Description

Add Lets you add a new media server to the list

of destinations.

Edit Lets you edit information about the selected

media server.

Remove Removes the selected media server from the

list of destinations.

Import List Imports a list of media servers.

Overwrite selection lists with identical Lets you overwrite selection lists on the
names that already exist on the destination destination media server if they have the
media server same name as the selection list you select to
copy.

Holding jobs that back up a selection list

You can place all jobs that back up a selection list on hold to prevent the jobs from
running. The jobs do not run until you change the job’s hold status.
To hold jobs that back up a selection list
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 In the Backup Selection Lists pane, right-click the selection list whose jobs
you want to place on hold, and then click Hold Jobs. You can select multiple
selection lists by selecting a selection list, and then pressing the <Ctrl> or
<Shift> keys while you click other selection lists.
The jobs that back up this selection list are placed on hold.
3 To remove the hold and run the jobs according to the schedule, click Remove
Hold.

Deleting selection lists

You can delete a selection list. However, if a selection list is associated with a
policy, you must remove the selection list’s association from the policy before
you can delete the selection list.
See “About selection lists” on page 301.
You cannot delete the Excludes selection list.
See “To edit the Excludes selection list” on page 311.
310 Preparing for backup
About selection lists

To delete selection lists

1 On the Edit menu, click Manage Selection Lists.
2 Click the selection list that you want to delete.
3 Click Delete.
4 Click Yes to delete the selection list or click No to cancel the delete operation.
If the selection list is being used by a job, you will not be able to delete it.
5 Click Close.

Manage Selection Lists options

You can delete or edit existing selection lists.
See “Deleting selection lists” on page 309.
See “Editing selection lists” on page 310.

Table 5-13 Manage Selection Lists options

Item Description

Name Displays the name of the selection list.

Type Displays the type of selection list.

Edit Lets you edit the selected selection list.

Delete Deletes the selected selection list.

Editing selection lists

Editing a selection list affects all jobs that use the selection list. However, if you
edit a selection list that is being used by an active job, the changes do not affect
that job. If you want to only edit selections for a specific job, edit the job rather
than the selection list.
If a resource on your selection list no longer exists and you want to delete it, you
must use the View Selection Details tab.
To edit a selection list
1 On the Edit menu, click Manage Selection Lists.
2 Select the selection list that you want to edit.
3 Click Edit.
 Preparing for backup 311
About selection lists

4 Edit the selection list properties.

See “New Backup Selection List options” on page 303.
5 Click OK.

Editing the Excludes selection list

You can change the Excludes selection list at any time.
See “How to include or exclude files for backup” on page 361.
See “About selection lists” on page 301.
To edit the Excludes selection list
1 On the Edit menu, click Manage Selection Lists.
2 On the Manage Selection Lists dialog box, select Excludes.
3 Click Edit.
4 Do one of the following:

If the Excludes list was edited ■ Select the selection rule that you want to
previously edit.
■ Click Edit.

If this is the first time the Excludes list Click Insert.

is being edited

5 Edit the selection list properties.

See “New Backup Selection List options” on page 303.
6 If you want to delete one of the selection rules:
■ Select the selection rule that you want to delete.
■ Click Delete.

7 Click OK.
8 Click Close.

Excludes Properties options

You can exclude or include new files or folders.
See “Editing the Excludes selection list” on page 311.
312 Preparing for backup
About selection lists

Table 5-14 Excludes Properties options

Item Description

Selection list name Displays the selection list name. If you edit
the Excludes properties it should say
"Excludes."

Selection list description Describes the Excludes selection list. You

can enter a description here to help
remember the contents of your Excludes
selection list.

View Selection Details Displays the details about the Excludes

selection list.

Edit Lets you edit the Excludes selection list to

add or remove files and folders. You can also
edit the selection criteria.

Insert Lets you create criteria and settings for the

Excludes selection list.

Delete Lets you delete criteria and settings from the

Excludes selection list.

About priority and availability windows for selection lists

When you create a backup selection list, you can specify the priority for processing
the jobs associated with the selection list. In addition, you can set a time range
when the resources in the list will be available for backup. The time range is called
the availability window. You can set a default availability window for selection
lists. When you create a new selection list, the default availability window displays,
but you must select the Limit availability to this daily time window option in
order for the selection list to use the default window.
See “Setting priority and availability windows for selection lists” on page 313.
You can set one availability window per selection list, and the window is the same
for each day of the week. If you merge two or more selection lists or replace a
selection list, Backup Exec uses the availability window of the original list.
If you schedule a job to run outside of the availability window, the job does not
run and Backup Exec displays an Invalid Schedule status for the job on the Job
Monitor. For example, you set the availability window to allow resources to be
available for backup between the hours of 11:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m. If you schedule
a backup job to run at 7:00 a.m, the job will not run because the resources are not
 Preparing for backup 313
About selection lists

available at that time. When scheduling a job, be sure that the schedule overlaps
the availability window for the resources.

Setting default priority and availability windows for all selection lists
You can set a default availability window for selection lists. When you create a
new selection list, the default availability window displays, but you must select
the Limit availability to this daily time window option in order for the selectin
list to use the default window.
See “About priority and availability windows for selection lists” on page 312.
You can also specify priority or set an availability window for specific selection
lists.
See “Setting priority and availability windows for selection lists” on page 313.
To set default priority and availability windows for all selection lists
1 On the Tools menu, select Options.
2 In the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Priority and Availability.
3 Complete the appropriate options.
See “Priority and Availability backup options” on page 314.

Setting priority and availability windows for selection lists

When you create a backup selection list, you can specify the priority for processing
the jobs associated with the selection list.
See “About priority and availability windows for selection lists” on page 312.
You can also set a default availability window for selection lists. When you create
a new selection list, the default availability window displays, but you must select
the Limit availability to this daily time window option in order for the selection
list to use the default window.
See “Setting default priority and availability windows for all selection lists”
on page 313.
To set priority and availability windows for selection lists
1 On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2 In the task pane, under Selection Lists Tasks, select New backup selection
list.
3 Select the data you want to back up.
314 Preparing for backup
About selection lists

4 In the Properties pane, under Source, click Priority and Availability.

5 Complete the appropriate option